Patent application number | Description | Published |
20080212535 | Controlling and enhancing handoff between wireless access points - A process of maintaining access information between wireless hotspots is disclosed. A logon request from a wireless portable device is received by a first access point of a first wireless hotspot and use of the first access point by the wireless portable device is authenticated to establish an access session. Then, information related to the access session is passed to a shared register accessible by a plurality of wireless hotspots and the access session is monitored to determine whether a disconnect by the wireless portable device occurs. Additionally, when the wireless portable device moves from a coverage area of the first wireless hotspot to one coverage area of one of the plurality of wireless hotspots, the information related to the access session may be used to facilitate access to the one of the plurality of wireless hotspots by the wireless portable device. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219381 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUNDANCY-BASED DECODING OF VIDEO CONTENT IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of video content in a wireless system are provided. A wireless receiver may determine whether a received multimedia data stream comprises video content and may select a redundancy-based decoder when video content is detected. The wireless receiver may be a WLAN receiver or a cellular receiver. Video content may be indicated by at least one flag in a preamble or a reserved field of the received multimedia data. The redundancy-based decoder may be a Viterbi decoder. The wireless receiver may enable a standard Viterbi decoder to decode portions of the multimedia data that do not comprise video content. The wireless receiver may generate at least one signal to select the redundancy-based decoder or the standard Viterbi decoder. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225163 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUNDANCY-BASED DECODING OF VIDEO CONTENT - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of video content are provided. A bit sequence comprising video content may be decoded in a multilayer process based on a decoding algorithm and at least one physical constraint. The decoding algorithm may be based on the Viterbi algorithm. Whether the bit sequence comprises video content may be determined based on information provided by a portion of a packet header or by packet priority information necessary for enabling quality of service applications. The physical constraint may be based on border, DC component, and/or low frequency continuity between neighboring discrete cosine transform (DCT) blocks. The physical constraint may also be based on the consistency of video data coded by a variable length coding (VLC) operation. At least one physical constraint test may be performed on selected estimated video bit sequences to select a decoded output video bit sequence. | 09-18-2008 |
20080284646 | USE OF BROADCAST POSITION DATA FOR SUBSEQUENT GPS LOCATION FIX - A radio device that is capable of positioning itself within a broadcast radio system includes a radio receiver operable to receive a plurality of broadcast radio signals, each broadcast from a respective one of a plurality of broadcast radio signal sources, and a GPS receiver coupled to receive a broadcast parameter determined using the broadcast radio signals and operable to calculate a GPS location of the radio device using the broadcast parameter. | 11-20-2008 |
20080291086 | POSITION DETERMINATION USING AVAILABLE POSITIONING TECHNIQUES - A radio device that is capable of positioning itself using one or more available positioning techniques includes a selection parameter defined to enable selection of at least one of the available positioning techniques supported by the radio device for use in calculating the location of the radio device. At least one of the positioning techniques supported by the radio device is a broadcast positioning technique that uses broadcast radio signals broadcast from radio stations to calculate the location of the radio device. | 11-27-2008 |
20080294791 | Media Exchange Network Supporting Varying Media Guide Based on Viewing Filters - Systems having a user interface comprising a filtered view of media available for consumption are disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may provide a first user with a view that enables consumption of only the available media that matches characteristics of a media filter. The characteristics of the media filter may be specified by a second user, and the second user may define the characteristics of the media filter remotely, via a communication network. The user interface may support separate media filters for each of a number of different users. Filter characteristics such as type of media channel, the language of any dialogue, an industry rating, an overall viewer rating, and the media format may be supported. The media filter characteristics may be applied not only to what is displayed on the user interface, but also the media available for selection via a remote control. | 11-27-2008 |
20080304425 | Method And System For A Configurable Communication Integrated Circuit And/Or Chipset - A deployed configurable communication integrated circuit (IC) and/or chipset which may be integrated within a wireless communication and/or multi-media communication device may be operable to monitor its operating conditions, performance and/or utilization characteristics. It may send information via a wireless, optical and/or wired network to a remote analysis and/or development system and/or service, such as an engineering service, that may determine and return configuration parameters. The configuration parameters may be utilized to adjust antenna and/or MIMO, SIMO, MISO and beamforming configuration, power level, interference rejection, equalizer length, dynamic range, modulation, encoding and/or decoding, analog to digital conversion precision, error detection and/or correction parameters, MAC parameters such as timing thresholds, transmit window size and/or buffer space. The configurable communication IC and/or chipset may configure and/or reconfigure itself one or more times over a period of time while deployed in the field. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304431 | Method And System For A Digital Diary System - A wireless communication device may generate an interactive digital diary for one or more users. The device may handle location information, multimedia data, transactions and/or secure communications via a plurality of technologies. Digital diary information may be stored internally or externally, it may be searchable and/or may comprise moving images, still images, audio, text, geographic location, entity information, time, date, transactions, financial information, consumer information, security information, user input, communications, user contacts, software applications, user profiles, scheduled events, prompts and/or reminders. The digital diary may comprise an interactive user interface which may have mapping capability and may provide link access to digital diary information and/or associated entities. User input methods may comprise screen touch, pressure sensor, key entry and/or voice. Information may be captured via a camera, microphone, geo-location data receiver, transaction write/reader, digital clock, digital calendar, key entry and/or tactile sensor. | 12-11-2008 |
20080305839 | SELECTIVE POWER MANAGEMENT FOR A HAND HELD HOST - A hand held radio host includes circuitry for selectively providing power to radiating transceiver elements and non-radiating application elements according to a plurality of power modes of operation to achieve desired effects and in a way that saves power and extends battery life. In one embodiment of the invention, the hand held host operates in one of three modes. In a full power mode, any selected application element as well as all transceiver elements are powered on at the same time. Thus, for example, a cell phone module, a wireless personal access network module, a wireless local area network module and one of a pager/short message service message module may all be powered on at the same time to receive corresponding messages, calls, data sessions, etc. At the same time that all of the transceiver elements are powered on, any selected application element receives power. Thus, application elements such as address books, calendar functions, games, word processors, and similar other application elements may receive power when selected. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310332 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A 60 GHZ PHY LAYER FOR HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN BLUETOOTH DEVICES - Wireless devices may utilize a Bluetooth stack to setup a data transmission session between the devices. The data transmission session may comprise a Bluetooth PHY and/or MAC/PHY layer that enables the wireless devices to perform discovery, pairing, and security setup operations. A secondary physical layer may be utilized to perform high speed data transmission. The secondary physical layer may comprise a 60 GHz PHY and/or MAC/PHY. The secondary physical layer may be integrated via the Bluetooth stack, and applications running on top of the Bluetooth stack may utilize the secondary physical layer transparently. A portion of the transmitted data may be multiplexed onto other secondary physical layers that may be available in the wireless devices. Alternatively, transmission of data may comprise switching among available secondary physical layers. The Bluetooth PHY and/or MAC/PHY layer may be utilized during data transmission to continually monitor and/or manage the data transmission. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310354 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOW RATE MAC/PHY FOR 60 GHZ TRANSMISSION - One or more coordinating devices may be utilized to control high speed data transmission among a plurality of wireless devices utilizing 60 GHz for high speed data transmission. Control messages may be sent and/or received between each of the plurality of wireless devices and the one or more coordinating devices utilizing low rate control connections via available secondary physical layers. The secondary physical layers may comprise Bluetooth, 802.11, and/or UWB physical layers. The controlling may comprise time coordination, frequency coordination, and/or spatial coordination that may enable the wireless devices to align and/or position directional antenna that may be utilized to perform the 60 GHz high speed data transmission. The wireless devices may utilize the low rate control connections to communicate reporting messages to the one or more coordinating devices. The reporting information may enable the one or more coordinating devices to manage available resources in the plurality of wireless devices. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310394 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTISESSION BLUETOOTH COMMUNICATION USING MULTIPLE PHYSICAL (PHY) LAYERS - A wireless device may utilize a plurality of Bluetooth sessions to perform a plurality of applications simultaneously in said wireless device. A Bluetooth interface may be utilized to perform initial connectivity and/or control functionality associate with each of said plurality of Bluetooth sessions. The connectivity and/or control functionality may comprise discovery, pairing, and/or initial connection. Each of the plurality of Bluetooth sessions may comprise utilizing one or more of a plurality of high speed data standards to perform data transmission and/or reception. The plurality of high speed data standard may comprise WLAN, ultra-wideband (UWB), and/or 60 GHz PHY and/or PHY/MAC layers. Two or more of the plurality of Bluetooth sessions may contemporaneously utilize different PHY and/or PHY/MAC layers pertaining to the same high speed data standard. Performing each of the plurality of applications may comprise utilizing one or more of the plurality of Bluetooth sessions. | 12-18-2008 |
20080311851 | Method and system for 60 GHZ location determination and coordination of WLAN/WPAN/GPS multimode devices - Within a local region, information may be communicated between two or more wireless multimode communication devices (WMCD) comprising 60 GHz band and lower frequency band wireless interfaces, wherein spatial relationships between devices may vary. The 60 GHz interface may handle location determination operations and data transfers. The lower frequency band may support WPAN, WLAN and may handle coordination of communications and data transfers. The WMCDs may be coupled with a network. Antennas may be directional. Moreover, the spatial orientation of the antennas may be dynamically modified or swept across a specified angle. Furthermore, intelligent and/or adaptive antenna systems may be utilized. The WMCDs may utilize a position and/or time reference system to aid in location determination operations. | 12-18-2008 |
20080311896 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A MOBILE MULTI-SERVICE INTERFACE DEVICE - A mobile communication interface (MCI) device may enable utilizing a plurality of communication interfaces to enable connectivity to a plurality of available networks, user interface devices, resources, and/or communication devices; and to support a plurality of users of the MCI device. The communication interfaces may be wired and/or wireless; and may be based on standard network interfaces and/or device-based interfaces. The user devices and/or resources may be local and/or remote, and may comprise service provider devices. Users may interact directly with the MCI device and/or indirectly via communication interfaces. The MCI device may enable concurrent use of the device by a group of supported users; and user specific profiles may be utilized enable determining each user's preferences and operation settings. The user specific profiles may be generated, stored, updated, and/or utilized via the MCI device directly and/or external to the MCI device via its connectivity. | 12-18-2008 |
20080311944 | Method And System For 60 GHZ Antenna Adaptation And User Coordination Based On Base Station Beacons - Information may be communicated between two or more wireless devices via adaptive or steered antennas or antenna systems and 60 GHz signals. The adaptive or steered antennas or antenna systems may be initialized based upon location information determined from a beacon signal and/or a reference system. The beacon signal may be swept through an angle and may be utilized along with reference system information to determine the direction and/or distance between the two or more wireless devices. Spatial relationships between the two or more wireless devices may vary. The two or more wireless devices may communicate and coordinate communications between them via alternate lower frequency signals. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313230 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING EVOLVING USER PREFERENCES - A system and method for managing evolving user preferences. Various aspects of the present invention may, for example and without limitation, comprise maintaining a user preference profile in which is stored a variety of information, including information indicating the manner in which a user desires an electronic device to operate. Information of the manner in which a user utilizes an electronic device may, for example, be obtained, and the user preference profile may be maintained in accordance with such information. The user profile information may, for example, be transferred between various computing systems and/or devices. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313315 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A NETWORKED SELF-CONFIGURING COMMUNICATION DEVICE UTILIZING USER PREFERENCE INFORMATION - A first personal electronic (PE) device may enable generation, updating, and/or storage of user configuration information. The user configuration information may comprise information pertaining to device configuration and/or operational preferences specific to the device user and/or various use settings, connectivity, and/or use of available resources. The generation, updating, and/or storage of the user configuration information may be performed manually and/or automatically, and may be performed directly within the first PE device and/or via networked devices, which may communicatively coupled to the first PE device. A second PE device may be enabled to be communicatively coupled to the first PE device and/or the networked devices. The second PE device may then be enabled to download existing user configuration information from the first PE device and/or the networked device, and the downloaded user configuration may be utilized to configure the second PE device. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313558 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MEDIA WITH VIRTUAL DIRECTORIES - A system and method for managing media files (e.g., utilizing virtual directories). Various aspects of the present invention, for example, comprise interacting with a user to define one or more virtual file directories and/or associated media file characteristics. One or more media file characteristics may, for example, be associated with a media file. Such associated media file characteristics may, for example, be analyzed to determine whether to associate a media file with one or more virtual directories. | 12-18-2008 |
20080313642 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING SPARE SYSTEM RESOURCES - A system and method for allocating and/or utilizing spare computing system (e.g., personal computing system) resources. Various aspects of the present invention may, for example and without limitation, provide a system and/or method that communicates incentive information with computing systems, and/or representatives thereof, regarding the allocation of computing resources for utilization by other computing systems and/or incentives that may be associated with such utilization. Various aspects of the present invention may, for example, allocate one or more resources of a computing system for utilization by another computing system based, at least in part, on such communicated incentive information. | 12-18-2008 |
20090007206 | COMMON MEDIA CONSUMPTION ACROSS MULTIPLE MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEMS VIA SINGLE USER CONTROL - A system and method for the management of common consumption of media in a media exchange network is disclosed. Various embodiments of the present invention provide for control by a first user at a first location in a media exchange network of the simultaneous consumption of media content by other users at other locations in the media exchange network. The media content consumed may comprise audio, still pictures, video, and data. The first user may consume the media content simultaneous with the consumption of the other users, and the media content may be stored at the location of the first user, or at other locations in the media exchange network. | 01-01-2009 |
20090007212 | MANAGEMENT OF MULTIMEDIA DISPLAY CONTENT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system and method for managing multimedia display content in a communication network is disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may support the selection, scheduling, and delivery of media from a set top box at a first location to a multimedia display at a second location, using a communication network. The selection and scheduling may be performed via a user interface having at least one view comprising a representation of at least one media channel. The media delivered may comprise at least one of audio, a still picture, video, real time video, and data. The multimedia display may comprise a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, “electronic paper”, or a light emitting diode (LED) display. The multimedia display may be communicatively coupled to a set top box at the second location via a wireless link, and may comprise at least one sensor for detecting conditions such as, for example, the movement of a viewer. The display may change if the sensor detects the condition. | 01-01-2009 |
20090016318 | SYNCHRONIZED UWB PICONETS FOR SOP (SIMULTANEOUSLY OPERATING PICONET) PERFORMANCE - Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance. A common backbone (either wired or wireless) is employed that provides a common CLK (clock signal) to all of the various PNCs (piconet coordinators) of various piconets that may operate within a sufficiently close region such that interference could undesirably occur. By providing a very reliable CLK signal from a common backbone to all of the PNCs of the various piconets operating within a substantially close proximity to one another, very precise synchronization may be ensured for all of the communications performed therein. The various piconets may then even operate using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)—whose performance would be substantially compromised without effective synchronization. In addition, combined TFC (time frequency code) and TDMA may also be employed to support the communications therein thereby providing even another degree of orthogonality that provided by TDMA alone. | 01-15-2009 |
20090021413 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A PROXY DEVICE OVER A NETWORK BY A REMOTE DEVICE - Methods and systems for wireless communication are disclosed and may include generating via a wireless mobile communication device (WMCD), persistent remote agents (PRAs) that may be enabled to perform one or more tasks. The PRAs may be communicated to remote devices to perform the tasks. The preferences of a user of the WMCD may be incorporated into the PRAs. The result of the tasks may be received by the WMCD from the remote devices. The PRAs may be communicated from the WMCD to the remote devices via one of a plurality of wireless protocols. At least one additional PRA may be spawned from the PRAs at the remote devices, and may be communicated to additional remote devices. The tasks may be performed by the PRAs periodically. The WMCD may communicate a message to the remote devices to initiate performance of the tasks by the PRAs. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022061 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-STANDARD MESH OF NETWORKS - Aspects of a method and system for quality of service management in a multi-standard mesh of networks are provided. In a wireless mobile communication device (WMCD) enabled to communicate utilizing a variety of communication networks, QoS information, such as latency, available bandwidth, and/or throughput, communicated to the WMCD may enable the coordination of data transfers to and/or from the WMCD. In this regard, the WMCD and each of the networks may comprise a QoS management entity. A QoS management entity may be enabled to poll other QoS management entities to discover QoS information. Similarly, a QoS management entity may be enabled to receive QoS information broadcast by other QoS management entities. A QoS management entity may enable selecting a network and/or communication protocol for the transmission and/or reception of data based on exchanged QoS information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022091 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING STANDARDIZED INTERFACE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE TO DISCOVER AND USE LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may discover available networks, and available local and/or remote resources. The WMC device may configure routes utilizing one or more of discovered resources and one or more available networks. The routes may be utilized to performed operations requested via the WMC device. A standardized language and/or protocol may be utilized in discovering and/or communicating with available resources and/or networks. The standardized language and/or protocol may enable commonality among the discovered networks and/or resources, and encryption of data communicated through the established routes. The standardized language and/or protocol may be updated and/or modified to incorporate new resources either by direct interactions between said new resources and the WMC device, or via existing available resources and/or networks. The discovery of resources and/or establishment of routes may be user-triggered, or it may be based on user preference information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022092 | Method And System For Managing Information Among Personalized And Shared Resources With A Personalized Portable Device - A user's request via a portable or handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) to process data may result in discovery of one or more networked resources capable of handling the processing. One or more communication routes may be established between one or more discovered network resources and one or more of the HWCD and a networked terminating device. The portable HWCD may be configured as a gateway. The user's identity may be determined and the user's personal networking preferences may be acquired. Based user's preferences, a route may be established between discovered networked resources and one or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device. The user's identity may be authenticated. Data may undergo rate and/or format conversion. The data may be protected by secure operations. One or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device may consume or render the requested data. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022096 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENVIRONMENT CONFIGURATION BY A DEVICE BASED ON AUTO-DISCOVERY OF LOCAL RESOURCES AND GENERATING PREFERENCE INFORMATION FOR THOSE RESOURCES - Methods and systems for environment configuration by a device based on auto-discovery of local resources and generating preference information for those resources are disclosed and may include discovering available networked resources utilizing a wireless mobile communication device (WMCD). Wireless communication may be established with one or more of the available networked resources utilizing the WMCD, which may then configure the resources according to user preferences. The user preferences may be stored internal or external to the WMCD, and may be modified based on subsequent changes to the configuring of the resources. The WMCD may communicate with the resources utilizing one or more of a plurality of wireless protocols, which may comprise cellular, WLAN, near-field communication, Bluetooth, and radio frequency identification. The WMCD may auto-discover as well as determine and authenticate access privileges for the resources, which may comprise devices for adjusting a user's local environment. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022116 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING UP AND TEARING DOWN CONNECTIONS IN MESH NETWORKS - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices may form and/or tear down intra-mesh connection with other WMC devices in the same mesh network. WMC devices may utilize information related to other WMC devices in the mesh network in determining formation and tearing down of intra-mesh connections. This information may comprise relative speeds, locations, and directions of movement of the WMC devices forming/tearing intra-mesh connections. Other information including data bandwidth and/or power consumption may be utilized in such determination. This information may also comprise available services advertised by WMC devices in the mesh network. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022117 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING CONNECTION TO AND USE OF LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - Methods and systems for a handheld portable communication device for configuring connection to and use of local and remote resources are disclosed and may include discovering available networks and resources, establishing a route between the handheld wireless communication device and a selected one or more of the available resources via a selected one or more of the available networks based on user preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device, and communicating multimedia data between the handheld wireless communication device and the selected one or more of the available resources via the established route. The established route may be dynamically adjusted, based on network availability and bandwidth. The handheld wireless communication device may communicate utilizing a plurality of wireless protocols. The preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device may be dynamically adjusted. The resources may be local or remote to the handheld wireless communication device. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022118 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN ATOMIZING FUNCTION OF A MOBILE DEVICE - Methods and systems for an atomizing function for a mobile device are disclosed and may include discovering available resources via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) and assessing respective cost functions for processing tasks by the HWCD and/or the discovered resources. The tasks may be apportioned for local and/or remote execution by the HWCD and/or the discovered resources based on the assessed cost functions. The assessed cost functions may be dependent on factors comprising communication bandwidth, memory space, CPU processing power, and battery power, which may be weighted. The cost functions may be dynamically assessed, enabling dynamic reapportioning of the tasks, which may be apportioned based on latency, quality of service (QoS), priority and/or user preferences associated with the local and/or remote execution. The apportioning of the processing of the tasks may be based on the assessed cost functions, and a priority and/or a QoS associated with the task. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022119 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A PERSISTENT REQUEST GENERATED BY A WIRELESS DEVICE, EXECUTED REMOTELY AND OUTPUT TO CONFIGURABLE LOCAL RESOURCES - Methods and systems for a persistent request generated by a wireless device, executed remotely and output to configurable local resources are disclosed and may include generating via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) a persistent request for a user that may be communicated to remote devices for execution and storage of results. The stored results may be received from local resources local which may be configured by the remote devices based on user preferences to deliver the stored results to the user. The stored results may be received by the user via the HWCD or another wireless communication device, and the identity of the user may be authenticated prior to receiving the stored results. The remote devices may discover the local resources based on the detection of the user logging into the network. User preferences may be stored in networked devices or may be stored in the HWCD. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022120 | Method And System For Enabling Rendering Of Electronic Media Content Via A Secure Ad Hoc Network Configuration Utilizing A Handheld Wireless Communication Device - An ad hoc network enabled to handle secure data may be created for a specified user via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) such that rightful access to protected data stored on one or more networked devices may be extended to one or more distributed rendering devices. The HWCD and/or the user may be authenticated. The HWCD may enable configuration of one or more dynamic connections on the ad hoc network as needed until communication of data is complete. Bandwidth and throughput of one or more communication links may be adjusted according to bandwidth availability. The data may be buffered via the HWCD and/or one or more of the distributed rendering devices. Processing data tasks may be assigned to one or more networked resources on the ad hoc network. The data may undergo format conversion and be consumed on the one or more distributed rendering devices and/or the HWCD. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022122 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION OUTSIDE A MESH BY INCLUDING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION IN ROUTER CONFIGURATION MESSAGES - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and the device user. WMC devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form an ad hoc wireless network wherein each WMC device within the network may function as a router for other devices. Utilizing such routing capability within an ad hoc wireless network may allow WMC devices that are out of their wireless coverage area to use other WMC devices within such ad hoc wireless network to route any impending communication through such other WMC devices wherein these devices may have wireless connectivity to their coverage networks. WMC devices that are may have external connectivity may be enable to be selective in routing information and/or data from other WMC devices in the ad hoc network. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022129 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE AND AGGREGATION OF MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for the aggregation of multimedia information storage via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. Information about storage resources accessible to a broadband access gateway may be collected and used in selecting storage capacity used for storing multimedia information such as, for example, streaming video, broadcast video, digitized video, digitized audio, text, and digitized images. The gateway may manage storage and retrieval of the multimedia information based upon user defined criteria and characteristics of the available storage resources. Multimedia information may be parsed for storage across multiple storage resources, and the location and nature of the storage resources used for storage of multimedia information items may be unknown to the user. Storage services accessible via a broadband connection may also be used as storage resources. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022169 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A QUEUING SYSTEM INSIDE A MESH NETWORK - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in operating proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices in a mesh network may form a queuing system wherein each WMC device may store data forwarded to and/or from other WMC devices in the mesh network. Each WMC device in the mesh network may have different queuing capability based on a plurality of factors that may comprise internal factors such as processing, storage, power, and/or connectivity. The mesh network may comprise an internal addressing scheme that may enable utilization of the queuing system whether or not WMC devices in the mesh network are communicatively coupled to external networks. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023393 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO EXECUTE A FUNCTION OR RECEIVE A SERVICE IN ONE OR MORE REMOTE TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DEVICES BASED ON USER PREFERENCE DATA - A system and method is provided for a wireless mobile communication device (WMCD) to communicate a signal that may include user preference data to execute a function and/or receive a service in one or more identified remote transmitting/receiving (TX/RX) devices. The signal may be encrypted, and may be used to poll the availability and identity of the one or more remote TX/RX devices. The user preference data may be formatted in a standardized universal language with commands understandable by most remote TX/RX devices for rendering functions or services. If the one or more remote TX/RX devices receive competing and/or conflicting user preference data from a plurality of WMCDs, each of the remote TX/RX devices may arbitrate which function or service to perform according to privileges of each of the user preference data of the respective WMCDs or based on an arbitration decision in the one or more remote TX/RX devices. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023422 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING INFORMATION BASED ON DETECTED BIOMETRIC EVENT DATA - A system and method is provided for processing and storing captured data in a wireless communication device based on detected biometric event data. The captured data may be acquired through a data acquisition system with devices or sensors in an integrated or distributed configuration. The captured data may include multimedia data of an event with time, date and/or location stamping, and captured physiological and behavioral biometric event data in response to the event. The captured data may be dynamically stored in a data binding format or as raw data in a local host device or communicated externally to be stored in a remote host or storage. At least one user preference may be specified for linking a biometric event data to the mapped, analyzed, categorized and stored captured data in a database. Captured data may be retrieved by matching biometric event data to at least one user preference from the database. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023423 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING SECURE NETWORK LINKS UTILIZING A USER'S BIOMETRIC IDENTITY ON NETWORK ELEMENTS - An ad hoc network may be established between a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) and one or more network resources utilizing biometric identity information. The biometric identity information may be associated with a user of the HWCD and utilized to select one or more network resources thus enabling secure communication between the HWCD and the one or more network resources. The HWCD may acquire the user's biometric identity information from the user and validate it utilizing stored biometric identity information. The one or more network resources may acquire the HWCD user's biometric identity information from the user and sign the biometric identity information with a private key. The HWCD may receive signed biometric identity information and associated public keys from each of the one or more network resources and validate the signed biometric identity information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023428 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING A PERSONALIZED JOURNAL BASED ON COLLECTING LINKS TO INFORMATION AND ANNOTATING THOSE LINKS FOR LATER RETRIEVAL - A system and method is provided for handling data in wireless communication devices where data may be captured and linked to a personal journal via indexing and mapping of context data tags abstracted from captured data. The captured data may be retrieved by matching a query to one or more context data tags indexed and mapped to the personal journal. A user preference utilizing one or more of the context data tags linked to the personal journal may facilitate captured data retrieval. The captured data may include multimedia data of an event pre-tagged with indexed information such as user ID, time, date, location and environmental condition or optionally one or more user's biometric data in response to the event. The pre-tagged captured data may be stored in the local host device or transferred to a remote host or storage for later retrieval or post processing. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023432 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TAGGING DATA WITH CONTEXT DATA TAGS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may be utilized to generate and/or maintain multimedia data files. Context data tags may be created to tag the generated multimedia data files, enabling identification of multimedia data files without directly accessing the contents of the multimedia data files. Context data tags may comprise such attributes as time/date stamps, location, subject, environment, scheduling, and/or biometric information. The WMC device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and/or to a specific device user. The user preference information may be utilized to specify attributes that may be utilized in creating context data tags for multimedia data files. The user preference information may be maintained in the WMC device and/or externally. Tagging operation may be performed dynamically, and a remote device may be utilized to perform tagging operations and/or to maintain the user preference information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023433 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING AND MODIFYING USER PREFERENCE INFORMATION TO CREATE CONTEXT DATA TAGS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may be utilized to generate and/or maintain multimedia data files. Context data tags may be utilized to tag the generated multimedia data files to enable convenient identification of multimedia data files. Context data tags may comprise time/date stamps, subject, and/or location attribute. User preference information that is unique to the WMC device and/or a specific device user may be utilized to create context data tags for multimedia data files. The user preference information may be modified and/or updated. Modifications and/or updates of user preference information may be based on post-processing operations, biometric information, and/or self-learning techniques that may comprise operations performed on the multimedia data files. Post-processing operations may be performed on multimedia data files in the WMC device and/or a remote device. Tagged multimedia data files may be re-tagged based on modification to user preference information and/or post-processing operations. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023452 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMICALLY SPLITTING JOBS ACROSS MULTIPLE AGNOSTIC PROCESSORS IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - Dynamically splitting jobs in wireless system between agnostic processor may comprise evaluating a job that a wireless mobile communication device may be requested to perform. The wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may evaluate a requested job to determine if one or more tasks may be sent to a remote device. The WMC device may consider such factors as information pertaining to the WMC device itself, information relating to the connection between the devices, and/or information pertaining to the remote device. This information may comprise such data as power availability in the wireless mobile communication device, processing load in the WMC device, processing and/or storage capabilities of the remote device, and characteristics of the connectivity between the two devices. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023454 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING PLURALITY OF PHYSICAL LAYERS TO RETAIN QUALITY OF SERVICE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may be determine a quality of service (QOS) required to communicate data. The WMC device may utilize a plurality of physical layers available in the WMC device to retain the QOS throughout the data communication. The physical layers may comprise a plurality of wireless technologies and/or a plurality of transmission power levels within each wireless technology. Selection of physical layers that may be utilized may comprise determination of available QOS through the physical layers, available power in the WMC device, and/or power requirement for communicating data via the physical layers. Data encoding may also be utilized to alter size of communicated data while retaining the required QOS. Data encoding may comprise utilizing encoding schemes, data compression, and/or redundancy bits. A set of deadlines may be utilized to enable switching between available physical layers to ensure maintaining and/or achieving required QOS. | 01-22-2009 |
20090023457 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING POSITIONAL INFORMATION OF TAGGED DATA WHEN PROCESSING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS DEVICES - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may be utilized to tag data generated and/or maintained in the WMC device with positional information. Positional information may comprise location and/or directional attributes. Positional attributes may be derived from operations, application, and/or accessory devices. Positional information of tagged data may be utilized to subsequently control the WMC device wherein operations may be performed and/or predicted in said WMC device based on match between current positional information of the WMC device and positional information of tagged data. User preference information and/or biometric data may be utilizing in tagging data with positional information and/or in utilizing positional data for controlling the WMC device. A remote device may be utilized for performing tagging operations, and/or storage of user preference information. | 01-22-2009 |
20090024641 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING CONTEXT DATA TAGS TO CATALOG DATA IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and the device user. The WMC device may modify and/or update the user preference information based on device use and information ascertained from applications running on the WMC device itself; for example scheduling applications. The user preference information may be utilized to create context data tags for generated data on the WMC device. Context data tags may comprise such information as time/date stamping, subject information, and/or location information. The context data tags may be utilized to tag the generated data, enabling continuous and improved cataloging. Improved cataloging may enable improved searchability of tagged data. Tagged data alternatively and/or additionally may be transferred and stored in a remote device for improved and secure back-up storage. The remote device may utilize context data tags for cataloging and storing received data. | 01-22-2009 |
20090024687 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FORMATTING RETURNED RESULT FROM REMOTE PROCESSING RESOURCE IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - A result may be formatted after a task is performed in a remote processing resource in a wireless system. A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may determine a task to be performed at a remote processing resource as part of a job the WMC device is requested to perform. Once the task is performed at the remote processing resource, formatted result is generated. The formatting of the result is based on different factors that may comprise, but not limited to, display limitations at the WMC device, power limitations at the WMC device, processing load/capability at the remote processing resource, and the connectivity limitation between the WMC device and the remote processing resource. Result formatting in such situations as internet searches may comprise generating a virtual webpage at the remote processing resource, and sending a link to this virtual webpage to the WMC device. | 01-22-2009 |
20090025081 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES TO ACCOMPLISH RENDERING OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT ON DISSIMILAR FORMAT DEVICES BASED ON USER BIOMETRIC DATA - A system and method is provided for communication of information in a mobile communication device (WMCD) configured to network connection may include discovering via a wireless mobile communication device, available communication resources based on acquired biometric data for a user of the WMCD, and communicating multimedia information between the WMCD and one or more of the discovered available resources. The acquired biometric data may include physical and behavioral biometric data to be authenticated and validated by a pattern recognition database. A connection between the WMCD and one or more discovered available resources may be established through linking the acquired biometric data to resources in available local or remote network. The established connection may enable the WMCD to consume or redirect media from the available resources and may be dynamically adjusted and updated based on dynamic sensing of the acquired biometric data in the available network or available resources. | 01-22-2009 |
20090042614 | MULTI-TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM WITH MIMO AND BEAM-FORMING CAPABILITY - A system and method for communicating with a second communication system utilizing a plurality of antennas. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise determining whether communicating with the second communication system utilizing a plurality of antennas in a first configuration, which comprises a beam-forming configuration, is preferable to utilizing a plurality of antennas in a second configuration, which comprises a MIMO or MISO configuration. If it is determined that the first configuration is preferable to the second configuration, the communication system may be configured to communicate with the second communication system by utilizing at least a portion of the plurality of antennas in the first configuration. If it is determined that the second configuration is preferable to the first configuration, then the communication system may be configured to communicate with the second communication system by utilizing at least a portion of the plurality of antennas in the second configuration. | 02-12-2009 |
20090064232 | PORTABLE MEDIA PROCESSING UNIT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for communication is disclosed and may include storing media and meta-data associated with the stored media. The storing may occur at a first location associated with a first communication device. A channel guide including representations of the stored media may be presented, based on the meta-data associated with the stored media, on a television in a second location. The presenting may occur when the first communication device is communicatively coupled to a second communication device at the second location. In response to receiving a selection via the presented channel guide, at least one media file corresponding to the received selection may be displayed based on the meta-data associated with stored media, on the television and/or a media player in the second location. The first communication device may be a media processing unit. | 03-05-2009 |
20090077207 | MULTI-MODE CONTROLLER - Techniques for controlling and managing network access are used to enable a wireless communication device to selectively communicate with several wireless networks. A portable communication device constructed according to the invention can communicate with different networks as the device is moved through the areas of coverage supported by the different networks. As a result, the device can take advantage of services provided by a particular network when the device is within the area of coverage provided by that network. Thus, the device can selectively switch to networks that provide, for example, high speed Internet access, different quality of service, low cost service and/or different services (e.g., voice, data, multimedia, etc.). A multi-mode controller in the device may be used to alternately poll different networks to determine whether the device is within the area of coverage of a network and to selectively establish communications with those networks. | 03-19-2009 |
20090079622 | SHARING OF GPS INFORMATION BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES - Mobile radio devices with Global Positioning System (GPS) receivers are able to share GPS information through a wireless communication connection. When one mobile radio device acquires GPS information associated with positioning of that mobile radio device, the mobile radio device can establish a communication connection with another mobile radio device via a wireless link to share that acquired GPS information with the other mobile radio device. | 03-26-2009 |
20090081965 | CONFIGURABLE ANTENNA STRUCTURE AND APPLICATIONS THEREOF - A configurable antenna structure includes a plurality of switches, a plurality of antenna components, and a configuration module. The configuration module is operable to configure the plurality of switches and the plurality of antenna components into a first antenna for receiving a MFBMS signal. The configuration module continues processing by identify a signal component of interest of a plurality of signal components of interest within the MFBMS signal. The configuration module continues processing by configuring the plurality of switches and the plurality of antenna components into a second antenna. | 03-26-2009 |
20090083836 | PREVENTING A NON-HEAD END BASED SERVICE PROVIDER FROM SENDING MEDIA TO A MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM - Systems and methods that prevent unauthorized access in a communications network are provided. In one embodiment, a system that prevents unauthorized access to a network device may include, for example, a network device and a headend. The headend may be coupled to a communications network. The network device may be deployed in a home environment and may be communicatively coupled to the communications network via the headend. The headend may be adapted, for example, to determine whether a request to access the network device is authorized. | 03-26-2009 |
20090104940 | MODULAR EAR-PIECE/MICROPHONE (HEADSET) OPERABLE TO SERVICE VOICE ACTIVATED COMMANDS - The present invention provides a modular headset operable to support both voice communications and voice activated commands. This may involve the use of multiple voice CODECs to process voice communications and voice activated commands. The modular headset includes both a microphone and wireless earpiece. The earpiece may further include an interface, a processing circuit, a speaker, a user interface, a pairing circuit, and a registration circuit. The interface allows the earpiece to communicate with the base unit that couples the modular headset to a servicing network. This coupling to the servicing network and base unit only occurs when the headset is successfully registered to the base unit. The pairing circuit and registration circuit allow the exchange of pairing or registration information between various components. The pairing circuit allows the wireless earpiece and microphone to exchange pairing information which is then compared to determine whether or not a successful pairing can be achieved. Analog to digital converts (ADCs), which may be located within either the microphone or earpiece are operable to process the transduced voice communications in accordance with either a voice CODEC or voice recognition CODEC depending on the selected mode of operation. | 04-23-2009 |
20090124202 | Modular wireless multimedia device - A modular wireless headset includes wearable earpiece(s) and wearable microphone(s), where the earpiece and microphone may be physically separate devices. The wearable earpiece renders inbound radio frequencies received from a host device audible. The wearable earpiece may include a receiver module, data recovery module, and speaker module. The receiver module may convert inbound RF signals into low intermediate frequency (IF) signals. The data recovery module recovers audio signals from the low IF signals. The speaker module renders the audio signals audible. The wearable microphone converts received audio signals into outbound RF signals, where the outbound RF signals are transmitted to the host device. The wearable microphone includes an audio input module and a transmitter module. The audio input module is operably coupled to convert received analog audio signals into digital audio signals. The transmitter module is operably coupled to convert the digital audio signals into the outbound RF signals. | 05-14-2009 |
20090137256 | Using Signal-Generated Location Information to Identify and List Available Devices - A wireless detecting device may be operable to receive one or more signals from a corresponding one or more wireless devices within range of the wireless detecting device. A list of the corresponding one or more wireless devices within range of the wireless detecting device may be displayed on the wireless detecting device. Based on the received one or more signals from the corresponding one or more wireless devices, distance range and/or geographic location of the one or more wireless devices, relative to the wireless detecting device may be indicated on the wireless detecting device. The wireless detecting device may comprise one or more processors that may be operable to calculate and/or otherwise determine distance range and/or geographic location of the one or more wireless devices, as well as the location of the wireless detecting device. | 05-28-2009 |
20090138928 | MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM BASED ON SATELLITE SET TOP BOX PLATFORM WITH TELEPHONY DOWNSTREAM AND UPSTREAM DATA PATHS - Systems and methods that provide satellite-based media processing are described. In one embodiment, a system that exchanges media may include, for example, a communications device that may be coupled to a network and to an antenna. The communications device may provide two-way communications with the network and may provide one-way communications with the antenna. The communications may receive media content from the antenna and/or the network. The communications device may send the media content to the network | 05-28-2009 |
20090138930 | Media Search Engine For A Personal Media Network - A system providing search functionality supporting the exchange and consumption of media is disclosed. The searching of media on storage belonging to any of a pre-defined group of users of a personal media network is provided. In addition, media stored on designated servers may also be included in a search. The media stored may include audio, still images, video, and data. A user may search the stored media using a number of criteria including the time period of the media, the type of device, and the type of media. The system also provides support for the search of one or more media peripherals, which may be searched when the media peripherals are communicatively coupled to the system. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141695 | METHOD OF CREATING INCENTIVES FOR USING WIRELESS HOTSPOT LOCATIONS - A system and method of distributing incentives for wireless hotspots is provided. The method includes providing an access point to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location, evaluating use statistics of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portable devices, and providing an inducement to a user of the wireless hotspot based on the evaluated use statistics. The system includes a first provider for providing an access point to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location, an evaluator for evaluating use statistics of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portables devices, and a second provider for providing an inducement to a user of the wireless hotspot based on the evaluated use statistics | 06-04-2009 |
20090150723 | COMPUTER CHIP SET HAVING ON BOARD WIRELESS INTERFACES TO SUPPORT TEST OPERATIONS - A method and apparatus are provided for an embedded wireless interface that is embedded in, for example, one of an input and output controller device for controlling input and output communications with off-board devices, within a memory controller device and a processor motherboard. The embedded wireless interface may be utilized as a wireless test access point to provide signal stimulations for test purposes or to monitor communications over a specified wired communication link. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154698 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR SCRAMBLING VIDEO STREAMS WITH DEPENDENT PORTIONS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video signal into a contiguous video stream having an independent portion and a dependent portion that requires the independent portion for decoding. A scrambling module scrambles the contiguous video stream to produce a scrambled video stream by scrambling the independent video portion and leaving the dependent portion unscrambled. | 06-18-2009 |
20090157808 | PERSONAL ACCESS AND CONTROL OF MEDIA PERIPHERALS ON A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Methods are disclosed for indirectly monitoring and controlling at least one media peripheral device in a media exchange network by accessing a media management system (MMS) via a first media peripheral (MP) device (e.g., a TV screen) using a user control device (e.g., a remote control). An operation corresponding to a second media peripheral (MP) device (e.g., a digital camera) may be selected via the MMS using the first MP device and the user control device. The operation is then carried out (i.e., performed) by the second MP device. A status of the second MP device may be selected via the MMS using the first MP device and the user control device. The selected status is then displayed on the first MP device. | 06-18-2009 |
20090158365 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH USER CUSTOMIZED GRAPHICS FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing device includes a user interface module that receives at least one user preference. A decoder module produces a decoded video signal from a basic video layer stream and at least one graphics layer streams based on the at least one user preference. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161755 | DEVICE ADAPTIVE VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that receives a device parameter from a remote device and that transmits a video signal to the remote device, wherein the video signal is transmitted as at least one separate video layer stream chosen from, an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A control module chooses the at least one separate video layer stream based on the device parameter. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161760 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into a independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream based on a motion vector data or grayscale and color data. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161794 | CHANNEL ADAPTIVE VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that transmits a video signal to a remote device over at least one RF communications channel wherein the video signal is transmitted as at least one separate video layer stream chosen from, an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A control module determines at least one channel characteristic of the at least one RF channel and chooses the at least one separate video layer stream based on the at least one channel characteristic of the at least one RF channel. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168896 | MOBILE VIDEO DEVICE FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A mobile video device includes a transceiver module that receives an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A decoder module produces a decoded video signal from at least one separate video stream chosen, based on the device parameter, from the independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170459 | POWER MANAGEMENT OF RADIO TRANSCEIVER ELEMENTS - A radio receiver includes a power control module for selectively powering down and powering up radio receiver elements in between known communication periods according to one aspect of the present invention. According to a second aspect of the invention, the radio receiver operates in a low power mode of operation and periodically “sniffs” to determine whether an access point has messages or communication signals to transmit to it. | 07-02-2009 |
20090175329 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR SCRAMBLING LAYERED VIDEO STREAMS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into an independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream that requires the independent video layer for decoding. A scrambling module scrambles the independent video layer stream to produce a scrambled independent video layer stream and leaves the first dependent video layer stream unscrambled. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175358 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM AND TRANSCODER FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video transcoder that receives a independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream that requires the independent video layer for decoding, the video transcoder generating a transcoded video signal based at least one of the independent video stream and the dependent video layer stream. | 07-09-2009 |
20090190532 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE PROVIDING N-WAY COMMUNICATION THROUGH A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system and method, in a mobile communication device, providing N-way communication through a plurality of communication services. Various aspects of the present invention provide a mobile communication device comprising a user interface and at least one communication interface module adapted to perform a first communication with a first communication device through a first communication service and perform a second communication with a second communication device through a second communication service. At least one module may be adapted to receive outgoing information from the user interface and to receive first information from the first communication device through the first communication service. The at least one module may also combine at least the received outgoing information and the received first information and transmit such combined information to the second communication device through the second communication service. | 07-30-2009 |
20090191865 | MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK SUPPORTING REMOTE PERIPHERAL ACCESS - Systems and methods that provide remote access are described In one embodiment, a system may include, for example, a plurality of communication devices and a media device. The plurality of communication devices may be operatively coupled to a network and may include, for example, a native communication device The media device may be operatively coupled to the native communication device and the network. The media device may be associated with the native communication device and the network and may be capable of exchanging media content with the plurality of communication devices and the network. A profile of the media device may be stored in at least one of the media device and the native communication device. The profile may include, for example, information related to managing the media content when the media device is roaming. | 07-30-2009 |
20090193143 | MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK SUPPORTING REMOTE PERIPHERAL ACCESS - Systems and methods that provide remote access are described. In one embodiment, a system may include, for example, a plurality of communication devices and a media device. The plurality of communication devices may be operatively coupled to a network and may include, for example, a native communication device The media device may be operatively coupled to the native communication device and the network. The media device may be associated with the native communication device and the network and may be capable of exchanging media content with the plurality of communication devices and the network. A profile of the media device may be stored in at least one of the media device and the native communication device. The profile may include, for example, information related to managing the media content when the media device is roaming. | 07-30-2009 |
20090203379 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATION-BASED PREARRANGED HAND-OFF - Methods and systems for location-based prearranged hand-off are disclosed and may include pre-arranging hand-off of communication services with a mobile communication device (MCD) based on present and future locations of the MCD and the availability of wireless services in the locations. The MCD may include location-determining capability which may include one or more of: a global navigation satellite system, triangulation, and ultra-wideband positioning. A travel route of the MCD may be anticipated utilizing the locations. The travel route may traverse one or more wireless coverage areas and the hand-off of communication services with the MCD may be configured when the MCD is expected to enter a wireless coverage area with a desired network resource allocation, which may include one or more of: bandwidth, data transfer rate, cost, power requirements, channel conditions, quality of service, and secure communications capability. Configurable MCD attributes may include antennas, beam forming, codes, and modulation. | 08-13-2009 |
20090203388 | ANTICIPATORY LOCATION-BASED MOBILE COMMUNICATION MEDIA TRANSFER - Methods and systems for anticipatory location-based mobile communication media transfer are disclosed and may include pre-planning communication of information with a mobile communication device (MCD) based on present and future locations of the MCD and the availability of wireless services. The MCD may include location-determining capability which may include one or more of: a global navigation satellite system, triangulation, and ultra-wideband positioning. A travel route of the MCD may be anticipated utilizing the locations. The travel route may traverse one or more wireless coverage areas and the communication of information with the MCD may be configured when the travel route enters a wireless coverage area with a desired wireless capability, which may include one or more of: bandwidth, data transfer rate, cost, power requirements, channel conditions, quality of service, and secure communications capability. The information may include multimedia data. The MCD may include a plurality of wireless protocol capabilities. | 08-13-2009 |
20090209241 | ENHANCED CALLER ID INFORMATION BASED ON ACCESS DEVICE INFORMATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for providing enhanced information to a user is described. A broadband access gateway communicatively coupled to a plurality of access devices may collect information about multimedia content available on the access devices and/or information exchanged with access devices. The gateway may search the collect information upon receiving information identifying a called or calling party, to find information that may be associated with the called or calling party. Selected items of the information associated with the called or calling party may then be delivered to the access device of the called or calling party. Information accessible to the gateway via a broadband connection may also be made available to the user of the access device. | 08-20-2009 |
20090215388 | REGISTERING ACCESS DEVICE MULTIMEDIA CONTENT VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method of registering or exchanging information about the availability of multimedia information and services is disclosed. Access devices in a wireless local area network (WLAN) and/or personal area network (PAN) may register, with a wireless broadband access gateway, selected information about multimedia information and services that they have and may share. Information about the available multimedia information and services may be shared by the wireless broadband access gateway with other access devices within the coverage area of the WLAN or PAN. Access devices may then access the multimedia information and services of other access devices via the wireless broadband access gateway, based upon information identifying and authenticating the recipient. A broadband connection permits the gateway to pass multimedia information and service activity to and from the access devices within the coverage area of the WLAN or PAN. | 08-27-2009 |
20090217338 | RECEPTION VERIFICATION/NON-RECEPTION VERIFICATION OF BASE/ENHANCEMENT VIDEO LAYERS - Operating a source device to transport video data to a destination device. The source device and destination device establish both a reception verified communication link and a non-reception verified communication link. The source device encodes the video data into a plurality of video layer streams including a base video layer stream and at least one other video layer stream. The source device transmits he base video layer stream to the destination device via the reception verified communication link. The source device transmits the at least one other video layer stream to the destination device via the non-reception verified communication link. The source device may also encode audio data and transmit the encoded audio data to the destination device. The destination device receives and decodes the audio/video streams and may present audio data produced thereby to a user. | 08-27-2009 |
20090219880 | AUTOMATIC QUALITY OF SERVICE BASED RESOURCE ALLOCATION - A system and method for providing quality-of-service based network resource allocation and utilization in a dynamic network environment. For example, a wireless communication network may comprise a first system and a second system. The first system may provide a current service to a user at a current quality level. The first system and second system may establish a wireless communication link. At least one of the first and second systems may determine whether utilizing one or more resources of the second system will provide the current service to the user at a higher level of quality than the current quality level. One or more resources of the second system may be allocated for providing the current service to a user at a higher quality level. The allocated resources may be utilized to provide the current service to the user at a higher quality level than the current quality level. | 09-03-2009 |
20090247173 | CHANNEL FREQUENCY REUSE FOR NARROW BEAM VIDEO STREAMING BASED UPON MOBILE TERMINAL LOCATION INFORMATION - Transmitting streamed video to at least one wireless terminal by a wireless network having a channel frequency reuse pattern. The wireless network receives a request for the streamed video from the at least one wireless terminal and receives position information from the at least one wireless terminal requesting the streamed video. The wireless network selects a transceiving device to service transmission of the streamed video to the at least one wireless terminal. The transceiving device is allocated a first channel frequency set of the channel frequency reuse pattern. The wireless network or a component thereof selects a channel from a second channel frequency set that is different from the first channel frequency set. The transceiving device then, using a directional antenna, transmits the streamed video to the at least one wireless terminal in a direction based upon the position information using the selected channel. | 10-01-2009 |
20090249405 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH EDGE DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING VIDEO STREAMS BASED ON DEVICE PARAMETERS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that receives a device parameter from a remote device and that transmits a video signal to the remote device. An edge device receives a video stream from a video source and that generates the video signal by adjusting the video stream in accordance with the device parameter. | 10-01-2009 |
20090249406 | MOBILE VIDEO DEVICE WITH ENHANCED VIDEO NAVIGATION - A mobile video device includes a receiver that receives a plurality of video signals from a network. A a video playback module includes a memory that stores selected ones of the plurality of video signals as a plurality of stored video files, a processing module that generates navigation data for the plurality of stored video files, and a user interface module that selects at least one of the stored video files for playback based on the navigation data and based on interface data generated in response to the action of a user. | 10-01-2009 |
20090249413 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM BASED ON LOCATION DATA AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that receives location data from a remote device and that transmits a video signal to the remote device. A network module receives a video stream from a video source and that generates the video signal based on the location data. | 10-01-2009 |
20090249422 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH AUTHENTICATION BASED ON A GLOBAL CLOCK AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a network module that receives network timing data and that transmits a video signal to a remote device that includes authentication data that is based on the network timing data. A remote device receives the video signal and that authenticates the play of the video signal based on local timing data. | 10-01-2009 |
20090249424 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH TIMING BASED ON A GLOBAL CLOCK AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a network module that receives network global positioning system (GPS) signals and that transmits a video signal to a remote device that includes time stamps that are based on the network GPS data. A remote device receives the video signal and that plays the video signal based on local timing generated from local GPS signals. | 10-01-2009 |
20090258706 | GAME DEVICE WITH WIRELESS POSITION MEASUREMENT AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A game device includes a first transceiver that receives gaming position data from at least one gaming object. A wireless measurement module generates device position data corresponding to the game device. A processor executes a game application that generates display signals for display on a display device, wherein the game application is based on the gaming position data and the device position data. | 10-15-2009 |
20090280821 | DYNAMIC MIMO RESOURCE ALLOCATION DURING A SINGLE COMMUNICATION - A system and method for providing dynamic allocation of MIMO communication resources during a single communication. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise determining a first set of MIMO communication resources to utilize for communicating a first portion of a unit of information. The first set of MIMO communication resources may be allocated for communicating the first portion of the unit of information. A second set of MIMO communication resources may be determined to utilize for communicating a second portion of the unit of information, where the second set of MIMO communication resources is different from the first set of MIMO communication resources. The second set of MIMO communication resources may be allocated for communicating the second portion of the unit of information. The first and second portions of the unit of information may, for example, be communicated consecutively or concurrently. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280832 | Cell phone relative position indication on displayed map using GPS coordinates - A wireless terminal tracks a tracked wireless terminal and displays tracking information to a user. The tracking wireless terminal sends a tracking request for the tracked wireless terminal via a supporting wireless network infrastructure. When the tracking request is valid, the tracking wireless terminal receives a tracking response for the tracked wireless terminal. Based upon the tracking response, the tracking wireless terminal accesses a map segment corresponding to received location coordinates. The tracking wireless terminal determines a relative position of the location coordinates of the tracked wireless terminal with respect to the map segment. With this determination made, operation concludes with the tracking wireless terminal displaying the map segment and an icon on the map segment that represents the tracked wireless terminal. The icon representing the tracked wireless terminal is displayed at the relative position of the location coordinates of the tracked wireless terminal. | 11-12-2009 |
20090282098 | Personal Inter-Home Media Exchange Network - A system and method support the exchange of media between friends, family members, and 3 | 11-12-2009 |
20090284652 | Video processing system with simultaneous multiple outputs each with unique formats - A video processing system receives a plurality of video inputs and specifically tailors them to meet the audio/video format requirements of a plurality of recipient video devices. The video processing system may be incorporated into a set top box, personal video recorder, video player, television, or video equipment. The video processing system in the set top box allows multiple users to receive video programs or television broadcasts meeting the audio/video format requirements of the recipient devices of the users. The video processing system allows user to define the audio/video formats of the recipient devices. Alternatively, the video processing system queries the recipient devices and obtains the audio/video format requirements of the video devices. The video processing system delivers multiple audio/video outputs, reformatted from a plurality of audio/video sources on the basis of user input, wirelessly in the operational region or by a wired means to a number of video devices. The processing itself involves transcoding the analog or digital input signals to produce analog and digital output video formats as needed. | 11-19-2009 |
20090289889 | VIDEO DISPLAY DEVICE WITH CONTROLLABLE BACKLIGHT AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video display device includes a video post processing module that processes a video signal to generate a processed video signal and a backlight control signal. A video display produces a video image, based on the processed video signal. The video display includes at least one controllable backlight that is controlled based on the backlight control signal. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290644 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING FOR FAST CHANNEL CHANGE AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into a independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream based on a motion vector data or grayscale and color data. | 11-26-2009 |
20090293082 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH KEY TABLE AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video decoder that decodes a first video signal based on at least one first conditional access code. A video control module maintains a key table that includes the at the at least one first conditional access code and at least one second conditional access code for use in conjunction with a second video signal. | 11-26-2009 |
20090293083 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH CONDITIONAL ACCESS MODULE AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video device that generates a request corresponding to video content. A conditional access module generates a video signal for transmission to the video device during a first time period, and terminates transmission of the video signal when the request is not authenticated during the first time period. In a further embodiment, the conditional access module generates a video signal for unscrambled transmission to the video device during a first time period, terminates the unscrambled transmission of the video signal at the expiration of the first time period, and continues with scrambled transmission of the video signal after the first time period. | 11-26-2009 |
20090293090 | MOBILE VIDEO DEVICE HAVING UNICAST AND MULTICAST MODES AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A mobile video device includes a transceiver module that receives navigation data corresponding to a plurality of video programs including at least one unicast video program and at least one multicast video program, that transmits selection data and that receives a video signal in response thereto. An interface module receives interface data in response to actions of a user. A video display device generates a selection display based on selection display data in a video selection mode and that generates a video display in a video display mode based on the video signal. A video application module generates the selection display data based on navigation data, that generates selection data based on user interface data. | 11-26-2009 |
20090293095 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM HAVING UNICAST AND MULTICAST MODES AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a video server module that selectively operates in a unicast mode and a multicast mode, wherein the video server module generates a video signal that includes a unicast video signal when the video server module is in the unicast mode and that includes a multicast video signal when the video server module is in the multicast mode. A wireless access device transmits the video signal to at least one mobile video device. | 11-26-2009 |
20090296604 | OPTIMIZING NETWORK CONFIGURATION FROM ESTABLISHED USAGE PATTERNS OF ACCESS POINTS - A wireless network configuration device can include a first communication port configured to access a plurality of nodes positioned in a geographic area, a first storage unit configured to store statistical information from the plurality of nodes with respect to communication between the plurality of nodes and the at least one wireless devices. In addition, the wireless network configuration device can include a processor configured to determine an optimized configuration with respect to the plurality of nodes based on the statistical information, and a second communication port configured to provide data with respect to the optimized configuration to the plurality of nodes, wherein the plurality of nodes are adjusted based on the data. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296827 | MODIFICATION OF DELIVERY OF VIDEO STREAM TO WIRELESS DEVICE BASED UPON POSITION/MOTION OF WIRELESS DEVICE - Processing video data for delivery to a remote wireless includes receiving video data from a video source and receiving position and motion information regarding the remote wireless device. Operation also includes, based upon the position and motion information regarding the remote wireless device, determining an anticipated Quality of Service (QoS) available for servicing of transmissions to the remote wireless device and determining video processing parameters based upon the video data and the anticipated QoS. Operation further includes processing the video data based upon the video processing parameters to produce an output video stream and transmitting the output video stream for delivery to the remote wireless device. Operation may also/alternatively include altering wireless transmission parameters of a transport stream servicing delivery of the video data to alter the anticipated QoS. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296828 | USING PROGRAM CLOCK REFERENCES TO ASSIST IN TRANSPORT OF VIDEO STREAM TO WIRELESS DEVICE - Processing a video stream using upon Program Clock References (PCRs) contained therein in preparation for transmission to a wireless device. Operation includes receiving video frames of the video stream, buffering the video frames, and extracting PCRs from at least some of the video frames of the video stream. Operation further includes, based upon at least the values of the PCRs, determining transmission parameters, and transmitting video frames of the video stream to the wireless device according to the transmission parameters. Operation may further include determining a round trip delay of transmissions to the wireless device and acknowledgements from the wireless device, adjusting PCRs of at least some video frames of the video stream based upon the round trip delay, and transmitting the video frames of the video stream to the wireless device. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300686 | EDGE DEVICE RECEPTION VERIFICATION/NON-RECEPTION VERIFICATION LINKS TO DIFFERING DEVICES - A video processing system and method of operation transports a video stream between a video source and a remote wireless device and includes a communication interface and processing circuitry. The processing circuitry couples to the communication interface, establishes a reception verified communication link with the remote wireless device via the communication interface, and establishes a non-reception verified communication link with the video source via the communication interface. The processing circuitry further receives the video stream (and an audio stream) from the video source via the communication interface using the non-reception verified communication link and transmits the video stream (and audio stream) to the remote wireless device via the communication interface using the reception verified communication link. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300687 | EDGE DEVICE ESTABLISHING AND ADJUSTING WIRELESS LINK PARAMETERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH QOS-DESIRED VIDEO DATA RATE - A video processing device receives a request to forward a video stream from a video source to a remote wireless device and, based upon characteristics of the video stream, determines data throughput requirement sufficient to transport the video stream. The video processing device establishes a wireless communication link with the remote wireless device via a servicing wireless network with wireless link parameters that support the data throughput requirement. The video processing device may be required to establish/alter the wireless communication link with the remote wireless device via differing wireless link parameters that support a differing data throughput that is less than the data throughput requirement and process the video stream to alter its characteristics to meet the differing data throughput. In either case, the video processing device transmits the video stream to the remote wireless device via at least the differing wireless communication link. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300688 | MAP INDICATING QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR DELIVERY OF VIDEO DATA TO WIRELESS DEVICE - Providing Quality of Service (QoS) information regarding video content delivery to a requesting wireless device. QoS/position information is first collected by, for each wireless device of a plurality of serviced wireless devices operating within a service area, receiving position information regarding a wireless device during delivery of video content and determining QoS provided during delivery of the video content, the QoS provided during delivery of the video content delivery varying over time and respective to the position information. The collected QoS/position information is then consolidated and a QoS map for the service area is produced based upon the consolidated collected QoS/position information. Finally, the QoS map for the service area is downloaded to the requesting wireless device. The QoS map may be tailored for the requesting wireless device based upon a current position/mobility of the requesting wireless device. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300698 | EDGE DEVICE THAT ENABLES EFFICIENT DELIVERY OF VIDEO TO HANDHELD DEVICE - A video processing system includes a communications interface and video processing circuitry. The communications interface receives video data from a video source, receives at least one operating parameter regarding a remote wireless device, and transmits an output video stream to the remote wireless device. The video processing circuitry couples to the communications interface, receives the video data and the at least one operating parameter, determines video processing parameters based upon the video data and the at least one operating parameter, processes the video data based upon the video processing parameters to produce the output video stream, and provides the output video stream to the communications interface for transmission to the remote wireless device. The video data (incoming video stream) may be processed by altering a frame rate, PCRs, pixel resolution, color resolution, color content, and/or region of interest content of the incoming video data to produce the output video stream. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300701 | AREA OF INTEREST PROCESSING OF VIDEO DELIVERED TO HANDHELD DEVICE - Processing a video stream intended for a remote wireless device by a video processing system based upon identified area of interest information to produce an output video stream having lesser required data throughput. Operation commences with receiving the video stream and buffering the video stream. Then the video processing system identifies an area of interest corresponding to at least one video frame of the video stream. The video processing system the processes the video frames of the video stream based upon the identified area of interest to produce an output video stream. The video processing system then transmits the output video stream for delivery to the remote wireless device. Processing video frames of the video stream may include altering pixel resolution, color resolution, and/or cropping video information of the video frames outside of the area of interest. | 12-03-2009 |
20090300729 | PURCHASING PERIPHERAL SUPPORT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system providing support for user transactions in a media exchange network is disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may comprise a television display, storage, and a set top box, and may provide an interface device for receiving from a user associated authorization device, information for authorizing user transactions via a communication network. A user transaction may comprise the exchange, purchase, storage, or consumption of media such as, for example, audio, still images, video, and data. The communication network may comprise, for example, a cable infrastructure, a digital subscriber line infrastructure, a wireless infrastructure, and may be the Internet. The system may provide for the completion of the user transaction without divulging the identity of the user to a vendor. | 12-03-2009 |
20090318085 | Earpiece/microphone (headset) servicing multiple incoming audio streams - The present invention provides a modular wireless headset with which to service multiple incoming audio streams. This modular wireless headset includes a wireless microphone and wireless earpiece. The wireless earpiece may exchange radio frequency (RF) signals with a base unit and render content contained within the exchanged RF signals to a user. This wireless earpiece further includes a wireless interface, a processor, a speaker, a user interface, and an authentication module. The wireless interface allows the earpiece to wirelessly communicate with the base unit. The processor recovers communications exchanged with the base unit that the speaker then renders audible. A user interface coupled to the processor may alert the user to any additional incoming audio communications. Having received the alert, the user may select between the communications. The authentication module allows the wireless earpiece and microphone to pair (forming the modular wireless headset) and register the headset with the base unit. | 12-24-2009 |
20090320111 | SECURE LEGACY MEDIA PERIPHERAL ASSOCIATION WITH AUTHENTICATION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Aspects for secure access and communication of information in a distributed media network may include detecting when a legacy media peripheral is connected to a PC and/or a media processing system on the distributed media network. One or more identifiers associated with the legacy media peripheral may be established and utilized to facilitate communication of the legacy media peripheral over the distributed media network. At least one legacy media peripheral identifier and at least one identifier of a user utilizing the legacy media peripheral may be requested. The legacy media peripheral identifier may be a serial number of the legacy media peripheral, while the user identifier may be a user password and/or a user name. Media peripheral association software may be executed on the PC and/or the media processing system and utilized for media peripheral association and authentication in accordance with various embodiments of the invention. | 12-24-2009 |
20090323117 | PRINTER RESOURCE SHARING IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Systems and methods of printer resource sharing in a communication network are provided. In one embodiment, the system may comprise, for example, at least one communication device, a communication network, print server software, and at least one personal printer resource. The communication device may be deployed at a location. The communication network may be communicatively coupled to that communication device. The print server software may receive from the communication device via the communication network a request for printing of information content. The print server software may respond by coordinating the printing of the information content. The at least one personal printer resource may be communicatively coupled to the at least one communication device. The print server software may reside outside of the at least one personal printer resource, and the at least one personal printer resource may be accessed for printing by the communication device via the communication network. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323587 | Method and System for Dual Mode Operation in Wireless Networks - Aspects of a method and system for dual mode operation in wireless networks are presented. Aspects of the system include a communicating device that selects an RF channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device may process signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 12-31-2009 |
20090325650 | Handover of call serviced by modular ear-piece/microphone between servicing base portions - Handover of call serviced by modular ear-piece/microphone between servicing base portions is presented. A wireless headset includes wireless interface(s), earpiece, a microphone, processing module, and a user interface. The wireless interface(s) wirelessly couples the wireless headset to a base unit via a wireless personal area network (WPAN). The earpiece renders inbound portions of the service calls audible while the microphone is operable to produce the outbound portion of the call. Both the earpiece and microphone are communicatively coupled to the wireless interface(s). The processing module also coupled to the wireless interface(s) allows the wireless headset to initiate call functions between the wireless headset and a servicing network made available through the base unit, service a call and call control functions, and anchor the call to the wireless headset. The user interface in conjunction with the processing module allows the wireless headset to initiate commands and/or call control functions based upon user input. | 12-31-2009 |
20100009632 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BLUETOOTH 802.11 ALTERNATE MAC/PHY (AMP) TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL (TPC) - Aspects of a method and system for Bluetooth 802.11 alternate MAC/PHY (AMP) transmit power control (TPC) may include one or more processors, receiver circuits and/or transmitter circuits that are operable to determine a maximum input level based on signals received via a Bluetooth basic rate (BR) connection and/or via a Bluetooth extended data rate (EDR) connection. The processors and/or circuits may be operable to determine a transmitted signal power level based on the determined maximum input level. The processors and/or circuits may be operable to transmit subsequent signals via a distinct Bluetooth connection based on the determined transmitted signal power level. The data rate for signal transmission via the distinct Bluetooth connection may exceed the data rate for signal transmission via the BR connection and the data rate for signal transmission via the EDR connection. | 01-14-2010 |
20100040025 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a hand off has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs. | 02-18-2010 |
20100048172 | POSITION-BASED CONTROL OF ACCESS TO ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A system and method for determining, based at least in part on communication device position, whether access to an alternative communication network is authorized. Various aspects of the present invention may, for example and without limitation, comprise determining a position of a mobile communication device serviced by a communication network; determining, based at least in part on the determined position of the mobile communication device, whether the mobile communication device is authorized to access an alternative communication network; and communicating information regarding said determined authorization. | 02-25-2010 |
20100049981 | SECURE MEDIA PERIPHERAL ASSOCIATION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for establishing secure access to a media peripheral in a home via a node in a communication network may include acquiring by the node, security data associated with the media peripheral. The method may include searching by the node, for a previously acquired security data associated with a location of previous operation of the media peripheral. The method may further include communicating between the node and the media peripheral, information associated with the media peripheral, while the media peripheral is located in the home, when the previously acquired security data is not found. The node may utilize the acquired security data associated with the media peripheral and the previously acquired security data to facilitate secure communication between the media peripheral in the home and the communication network, when the previously acquired security data is found. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054707 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADVERTISEMENT INSERTION AND PLAYBACK FOR STB WITH PVR FUNCTIONALITY - A personal video recorder (PVR) enabled set-top box (STB) may be operable to store an advertisement and associated playback control information received from a media provider into a storage device in the PVR enabled STB, schedule the stored advertisement for viewing based on the associated playback control information. The PVR enabled STB may be operable to insert the stored advertisement into media content for one or more times based on the scheduling. The PVR enabled STB may be operable to cause display of the stored advertisement and the media content in different transport formats. At a forward/reverse playback position during a PVR playback, the PVR enabled STB may be operable to cause display of the stored advertisement when a play count associated with the stored advertisement is less than a count threshold at the forward/reverse playback position. | 03-04-2010 |
20100064315 | TELEVISION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMPUTER NETWORK-BASED VIDEO - A television system and method for providing computer network-based video. Various aspects may, for example, comprise a television system and method for providing both standard television video combined with computer network-based video, serially and/or concurrently. Various aspects may also comprise a user interface system and method for interacting with a user regarding the presentation and/or control of computer network-based video. | 03-11-2010 |
20100080413 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VIDEO TRANSMISSION AND PROCESSING WITH CUSTOMIZED WATERMARKING DELIVERY - Methods and systems for video transmission and processing with customized watermarking delivery are disclosed and may include watermarking data at a communication device utilizing received global positioning (GPS) data and communicating the watermarked video data to a receiving communication device. The receiving communication device may verify the watermarked data, and may determine whether to render the received watermarked data based on the verification. The communication device may include an edge device, and may receive a feedback signal communicated from the receiving communication device. The watermarking of subsequently processed data may be adjusted based on the received feedback signal, which may include GPS data and/or device parameters corresponding to the receiving communication device. The watermarked video data communicated to the receiving communication device may be adjusted based on one or more device parameters corresponding to the receiving communication device and/or GPS information. | 04-01-2010 |
20100088516 | Systems and Methods For Providing Security to Different Functions - Methods and systems are provided that use smartcards, such as subscriber identity module (SIM) cards to provide secure functions for a mobile client. One embodiment of the invention provides a mobile communication network system that includes a mobile network, a mobile terminal, a server coupled to the mobile terminal via the mobile network, and a subscriber identity module (SIM) card coupled to the mobile terminal. The SIM card includes a first key and a second key. The first key is used to authenticate an intended user of the mobile terminal to the mobile network. Upon successful authentication of the intended user to the mobile network, the mobile terminal downloads a function offered from the server through the mobile network. The second key is then used by the mobile terminal to authenticate the intended user to the downloaded function so that the intended user can utilize the function. | 04-08-2010 |
20100105391 | CALL RE-ROUTING UPON CELL PHONE DOCKING - A method and apparatus are provided for call setup in a communication network that comprises at least one mobile station to facilitate the hand-off of a wireless headset from a mobile station that has been docked to a landline base unit that includes a radio front end operable to communicate with the wireless headset. Generally, the embodiments of the invention include establishing a first voice path through at least one switching element between a calling party and a called party in a communication network where at least one of the called and calling parties is communicating with the mobile station or, more generally, with a wireless telephone. Thereafter, a first wireless headset communication link is established between the wireless telephone and the wireless headset unit. | 04-29-2010 |
20100106409 | DOWNLOADING MAP SEGMENT(S) TO A CELL PHONE BASED UPON ITS GPS COORDINATES AND MOBILITY - A wireless terminal displays its location and navigation information (map segment) on its display. The wireless terminal accesses a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver of the wireless terminal to determine its location coordinates. The wireless terminal determines a maximum data size for navigation information to be downloaded. The wireless terminal sends a navigation information download request to a map server via a supporting wireless network infrastructure that includes the location coordinates and the maximum data size. The wireless terminal receives navigation information that has a data size no greater than the maximum data size and displays the navigation information on the display. The wireless terminal may display a map segment and an icon representing the wireless terminal at a location corresponding to the location coordinates of the wireless terminal with respect to the map segment. The wireless terminal may download a premises map from a premises map server. | 04-29-2010 |
20100110910 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. An environmental monitoring receiver processes received RF signals over a broadband spectrum and that generates environmental data in response thereto. A processing module processes the environmental data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the environmental data. In an embodiment of the present invention, the environmental monitoring receiver can be implemented via one of the plurality of transceivers when operating in an environmental monitoring mode. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110941 | MANAGEMENT UNIT NETWORK FOR COLLABORATIVELY MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the multiservice communication devices. At least one of the multiservice communication devices includes a collaboration module. A network interface receives network resource data from a plurality of networks. A management processing unit processes the inbound control data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto to collaboratively establish at least one device setting of at least one of the multiservice communication devices via the collaboration module. The wireless control channel may be separate from the communication between the multiservice communication devices and the networks or embedded in network communications. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110977 | MANAGEMENT UNIT NETWORK FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit network manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a plurality of local management units, each of the plurality of local management units engaging in bidirectional data communication with at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A first regional management unit processes the inbound data to produce the outbound data and for sending the outbound data to the at least one of the plurality of local management units and on to the multiservice communication devices. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110997 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH COGNITIVE RADIO TRANSCEIVER - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive network data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols, wherein the plurality of transceivers includes at least one cognitive radio transceiver that is configured based on cognitive transceiver configuration data received from a management unit in communication with the multiservice communication device via a control channel. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110998 | SERVICE AGGREGATOR FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES TO A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A service aggregator allocates network resources to a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The service aggregator includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices, wherein the wireless control channel is separate from the communication between the plurality of multiservice communication devices and the plurality of networks. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit processes the inbound control data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto, wherein the inbound control data includes at least one transaction request and the service aggregator allocates at least one resource of at least one of the plurality of networks based on the inbound control data and the network resource data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111033 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. A control channel transceiver transceives control channel data with a remote management unit including local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111034 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR FACILITATING INTER-NETWORK HAND-OFF FOR A MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A management unit allocates network resources to a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices, wherein the wireless control channel is separate from the communication between the plurality of multiservice communication devices and the plurality of networks. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit generates the outbound control data in response thereto, wherein the management processing unit facilities the handoff of a real-time service accessed by the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a first network of the plurality of networks to a second network of the plurality of networks. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111051 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit processes the inbound control data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111052 | MANAGEMENT UNIT WITH LOCAL AGENT - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via either a logical or physical control channel. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit includes a local agent that gathers environmental data, wherein the management processing unit processes the inbound control data, the environmental data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 05-06-2010 |
20100113088 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH LOGICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive network data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols, wherein at least one of the plurality of transceivers further transceives control channel data with a remote management unit contemporaneously with the network data via a logical control channel carried using the corresponding one of the plurality of network protocols, wherein the control channel data includes local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100124214 | Position based WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) management - Position based WPAN (Wireless Personal Area Network) management. Based on either the relative position or the specific location of devices within a WPAN, communication between the various devices is managed by grouping the devices into two or more groups. In addition, the communication between theses various devices may be governed by profiles assigned to the groups (or even the actual individual devices) that are assigned based on their locations within the WPAN. The relative locations of the devices may be made using ranging that is performed by transmitting UWB (Ultra Wide Band) pulses between the various devices within the WPAN. Alternatively, each device may include GPS (Global Positioning System) functionality and information corresponding to the specific locations of the devices may be communicated between the devices, and that information may be used to group devices user and/or assign profiles to govern the communication to and from the devices. | 05-20-2010 |
20100127924 | ACCESSING NAVIGATION INFORMATION VIA A GLOBAL POSITIONING GROUP SUPPORT SERVER - A client device transmits a GNSS address to gain navigation information such as map data from a global positioning group support server. The global positioning group support server may provide navigation information of global positioning groups in the vicinity of the client device based on the received GNSS address. The GNSS address of the client device may be an inherent GNSS address or a GNSS address of a neighboring client device. Client devices are registered and divided into global positioning groups at a global positioning group support server based on corresponding GNSS addresses. A particular client device may be added or removed to or from a given global positioning group. Uni- and bi-directional association tracking within a determined time window is enabled based on corresponding GNSS addresses. Phantom GNSS moving is enabled via the association tracking. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128582 | Retrieving Substitute Data To Replace Damaged Media Data For Playback In A Media Player - A media player is utilized to determine presence of defects in storage devices, and to retrieve replacement data from media management servers. The retrieval of the replacement data is performed during playback and/or use of the storage devices. The replacement data is only utilized during real time playback of the storage devices. The replacement data can also be stored within the data storage player, into the storage devices, and/or into external storage devices accessible during playback operations. Addressing information is created and/or modified to enable use of stored replacement data. A new copy of the data can be created in the same or in new storage device. The media management server performs access authentication operations during replacement data retrieval. The media management server is accessed via user-based webpage-like interfaces and/or dedicated APIs. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128595 | Utilizing A Replacement Pathway For Lost Packet Delivery During Media Reception In A Set-Top Box (STB) - A replacement pathway in an STB is utilized to determine loss of packets and delivery error during reception of media broadcasts, and to retrieve replacement data from one or more replacement media servers. The retrieval of the replacement data is performed during playback of the received media broadcasts. The communication of media broadcast incorporates delays to accommodate the retrieval of replacement data. Alternatively, received broadcast media streams are buffered to enable retrieval of replacement data and to provide seamless presentation of media content in the media broadcasts. The replacement media server performs access authentication operations during replacement data retrieval. The replacement media server is accessed via markup language, for example, HTML and/or XML, based interfaces and/or dedicated APIs. The replacement media server may deny replacement data based on plurality of service criteria such as acceptance and denial criteria, which may comprise allowable bandwidth and/or error rates. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128601 | CLIENT QoS BASED CONNECTION SESSION JOGGING - Aspects of a method and system for a client QoS based connection session jogging are provided. While receiving a service over a particular delivery route, a user of a user device is provided with the capability to request an alternate route to continue to deliver the service via a user interface operation. The user device generates a connection handover (HO) request and transmits the request to a network management (NM) server. The NM server determines the alternate route and continues the service over the determined alternate route. The NM server supports both unsolicited and solicited connection HO request. A connection session profile associated with the particular delivery route is updated based on the determined alternate route information. The service is continued over the alternate route with the updated connection session profile. A connection HO request indicates a desired QoS from the user of the user device for the received service. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128682 | Switch Fabric With Wireless Intra-Connectivity - A plurality of wireless interfaces and/or internal radios is utilized within a network switching device to enable wireless intra-connectivity within its switch fabric. The wireless intra-connectivity services switching operations in the network switching device, to prevent and/or reduce blocking in the network switching device. The wireless intra-connectivity is also used to enable management and control operations in the network switching device. Operations of the internal radios and/or wireless interfaces are managed to mitigate and/or limit interference among the internal radios and to optimize throughput available via the wireless intra-connectivity. Arbitration, channelization, time multiplexing, and/or directionality techniques, for example, are utilized in the internal radios. External radios are operable to enable cascading plurality of network switching devices. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130167 | Communication Method And Infrastructure Supporting Device Security And Tracking Of Mobile And Portable Multimedia Devices - From a laptop and a client server interface, a subscriber securely initiates tracking and/or disabling of a communication device by a server. The subscriber receives location and/or usage reports for the communication device. The subscriber is provided with the capability to modify a profile, device status and/or transfer ownership of the device via a client server interface. Based on the profile, detection of a particular event triggers tracking and/or disabling of the device by the server. The communication device registers with the server utilizing its unique device ID and/or the subscriber identity information when accessing the internet. The server is enabled to communicate a status and/or a request for tracking information, to the communication device. The server is also enabled to receive tracking and/or location information and communicates it to the subscriber's laptop. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130178 | Enabling Remote And Anonymous Control Of Mobile And Portable Multimedia Devices For Security, Tracking And Recovery - Aspects of the invention comprise a remote tracking and control server operable to transparently activate control of resources and to monitor operations on a target handheld communication device utilizing code installed on the handheld device. The resources may comprise a camera, microphone, GPS receiver, input device, display, speaker, wireless and/or wire-line transmitter and/or receiver. The monitoring and/or controlling activity is protected from interruption. The handheld device may be accessed by a securely stored unique identifier. Access to the controlling function and/or the resources by a user of the handheld device may be restricted. Monitored information is stored on the handheld device and communicated to the tracking server. The control server may receive monitored information from the handheld device whenever the device is coupled to a communication network. Monitoring may be initiated based on detected motion, sound, user input, video and/or touch. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131194 | MAP DATA MANAGEMENT USING ROAD GHOSTING CHARACTERISTICS - Aspects of a method and system for map data management using road ghosting characteristics are provided. A mobile device transmits a map request to a mapping service server for a map view. Upon the receipt of the map request from the mobile device, the mapping service server creates a ghost map based on road ghost characteristic information gathered from mobile devices associated with the mapping service server. The road ghost characteristic information is overlaid on geographical locations to identify ghost pathways and road supplemental information. The characteristics associated with the identified ghost pathways and road supplemental information is merged into metadata. The ghost map is generated by correlating the metadata with geographic locations of interests of said mobile device. The ghost map is delivered to the mobile and presented via the user interface to users of the mobile device, accordingly. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131586 | ACTIVITY OVERLAID MAPPING SERVICES - Aspects of a method and system for activity overlaid mapping services are provided. A subscriber transmits a map request to a mapping service server connected to a data communication network. Upon the receipt of the map request from the subscriber, the mapping service server create enhanced map based on subscriber activity information collected from a plurality of subscribers associated with the mapping service server. The enhanced map is generated by correlating the collected subscriber activity information of the plurality of subscribers to geographic locations of interest indicated by the map request. The created enhanced map is delivered to the subscriber device. Upon the receiving the enhanced map, the subscriber device presents location information associated with the received enhanced map to users via a user interface in a preferred format. A level of subscriber activity information sharing is determined by each subscriber. | 05-27-2010 |
20100131672 | MULTIPLE PATHWAY SESSION SETUP TO SUPPORT QoS SERVICES - A request from a user device is received for a service by a network management server via a communication network. The network management server determines multiple routes for delivering content associated with the requested service based on a provisioning profile for the user device. Content associated with the requested service is then delivered via the determined multiple routes. The provisioning profile is updated and includes preferred service types, desired QoS for one or more services, client account information, and/or client credit verification information. The network management server manages the delivery of the content associated with the requested service via the determined multiple routes. The content includes packets that are the same, which are communicated or delivered simultaneously via the determined multiple routes. The network management server allocates one or more of the determined multiple routes for delivering the content based on priorities associated with the routes. | 05-27-2010 |
20100132003 | Providing Wireless Pathway Adapter Support Via Set-Top Boxes - Internal or external pathway adapters are utilized to enable playing personal media streams via STBs. The personal media streams are forwarded from local and/or remote sources. The personal media sources communicate directly and/or indirectly with the pathway adapters. The pathway adapters support a plurality of wireless and/or wired interfaces. The pathway adapters channelize the received personal media streams to simulate TV channels in TV broadcasts receivable via the STBs. The channelized personal media streams are feed directly and separately into the STB and/or combined with TV broadcast feeds. Management server functionality in the pathway adapters enables interactions with the pathway adapter, to request pathway services and/or to establish routing paths for personal media streams to the pathway adapter, wherein these interactions, are based on webpage-based interfaces and/or dedicated APIs. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135200 | PROVIDING USER-SPOT (U-SPOT) SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication device may be utilized to establish a localized user network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is then operable to determine services that may be provided in the user network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within the user network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Mobile communication devices are also operable to provide, directly or via local and/or remote resources, additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in user networks is incentivized to the mobile communication devices and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the mobile communication devices. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in U-Spot networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135266 | PROVIDING PRIVATE ACCESS POINT SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A private access point may be utilized to establish a local network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the private access point. The private access point is then operable to determine services that may be provided in its local network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within its local network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Private access points are also operable to utilize local and/or remote resources to provide additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in private access point networks is incentivized to the private access points and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the private access points. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in private access point networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 06-03-2010 |
20100142508 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND MULTIPLE STANDARD DEVICE WITH REDUCED BLOCKER - A device includes a transcevier and a processing module. The transceiver is operable to receive a wireless communication request from a requesting wireless communication device and to convert the wireless communication request into a baseband or near baseband request signal. The processing module is operable to determine multiple frequency band multiple standard (MFBMS) capabilities of the requesting and the target wireless communication devices based on the baseband or near baseband request signal. When the devices have at least two frequency band standards in common, the processing module allocates a communication resource of one of the two frequency band standards for a first communication path from the requesting wireless communication device to the target wireless communication device and allocates a communication resource of another one of the two frequency band standards for a second communication path from the target wireless communication device to the requesting wireless communication device. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144285 | EXTENDED ANTENNA MODULE AND APPLICATIONS THEREOF - An extended antenna module includes an antenna section and an extended wireless interface. The antenna section is operable to receive an inbound radio frequency (RF) signal when an antenna select signal is in a first state and/or transmit an outbound RF signal when the antenna select signal is in the first state. The extended wireless interface is operable to wirelessly receive the outbound RF signal from a unit wireless interface when the antenna select signal is in the first state and wirelessly transmit the inbound RF signal to the unit wireless interface when the antenna select signal is in the first state. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144288 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND MULTIPLE STANDARD TRANSCEIVER - A transceiver includes a receiver section and a transmitter section. The receiver section converts an inbound Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal into a down converted signal, wherein the inbound MFBMS signal includes a desired signal component and an undesired signal component. In addition, the receiver section determines spectral positioning of the undesired signal component with respect to the desired signal component and adjusts at least one of the MFBMS signal and the down converted signal based on the spectral positioning to substantially reduce adverse affects of the undesired signal component on the desired signal component to produce an adjusted signal. The transmitter section converts an outbound symbol stream into an outbound MFBMS signal. | 06-10-2010 |
20100146266 | HOME NETWORK ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES - A premises based multimedia communication system includes a source device that produces multimedia content, a rendering device that presents the multimedia content, and a premises communication network coupling the source device to the rendering device. The system certifies transfer of the multimedia content from the source device to the rendering device via the at least one premises communication network using link layer encryption operations. After certification, the system at least partially disables the link layer encryption operations for the transfer of the multimedia content from the source device to the rendering device via the at least one premises communication network. With the link layer operations are at least partially disabled, the system at least partially enables content layer encryption operations for the transfer of the multimedia content from the source device to the rendering device via the at least one premises communication network. | 06-10-2010 |
20100146580 | MEDIA CONTENT REDUNDANT TRANSMISSION - A premises based multimedia communication system includes a source device that produces multimedia content, a rendering device that presents the multimedia content, and a premises communication network coupling the source device to the rendering device. The source device receives data packets carrying the multimedia content from the remote content source via at least one remote delivery communication network and transmits at least two copies of the data packets carrying video frames of the multimedia content to the rendering device via the at least one premises communication network. The rendering device decodes video frames carried by first copies of the data packets. Upon an unsuccessful decoding of the video frames carried by the first copies of the data packets, the rendering device decoding video frames carried by second copies of the data packets and upon a successful decoding of the video frames carried by the first copies of the data packets, the rendering device discards video frames carried by second copies of the data packets. | 06-10-2010 |
20100151904 | Television Channel Selection Canvas - A channel selection canvas for display on a video display device is disclosed. The video display device can be a television, a laptop computer, or personal digital assistant device. The channel selection canvas allows a user to preview and choose video signals to be watched. The channel selection canvas displays a set of television channel video thumbnails, which can be full motion video, slow motion video or sampled video snapshots. A channel selection canvas can also display video thumbnails for security cameras, baby monitors, video phones and the like. A channel selection canvas generator that generates channel selection canvases is also disclosed. The channel selection canvas generator can reside within a television, set top box or similar video processing device. | 06-17-2010 |
20100156659 | ACCESS, MONITORING, AND CONTROL OF APPLIANCES VIA A MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM - A device and method for accessing, monitoring, and controlling home appliances in a media exchange network by establishing a communication link between a communication initiation device and at least one home appliance and communicating at least one command from the communication initiation device to the at least one home appliance via the communication link. The at least one home appliance then generates at least one response to the at least one command. The commands may include turning the home appliance(s) on and off, parameter adjustment commands, access commands, monitoring commands, mode change commands, and programming commands. Appliance responses may include powering on, powering off, changing a mode of operation, sending a status to the communication initiation device, adjusting an operational parameter, and changing a programmed operational step. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157968 | HANDLING OF MULTIMEDIA CALL SESSIONS AND ATTACHMENTS USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of multimedia information using simulcasting using a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information during exchanges between access devices over a wireless wide area network. The wireless wide area network may intercept multimedia information, and may, for example, determine that the access device of the recipient is incompatible with the multimedia information. The wide area network may then redirect the multimedia information to a broadband access gateway that may cause the storage of the received multimedia information. In another representative embodiment of the present invention, the wide area network may adapt intercepted multimedia information to be compatible with the access device of the recipient, and may also redirect the original intercepted multimedia information to a broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may then cause the original intercepted multimedia information to be stored for later access. A recipient of the multimedia attachment or information may be notified of the redirection of the multimedia attachment or information, and may retrieve the stored multimedia information using a wired or wireless access device. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161792 | Alternate media identification/selection based upon rendered media meta-data - A technique to identify and characterize meta-data associated with an original content that is being transferred from a source to a renderer in a home network, in which the original content is to be rendered by the renderer. Instead of making available for rendering the original content, an alternate content for delivery to the renderer is located, wherein the alternate content is identified by associating the alternate content to the original content via characterization of the meta-data. Then, the alternate content is rendered instead of the original content or rendered in addition to the original content. | 06-24-2010 |
20100161822 | Rendering device selection in a home network - A technique to remotely identify a source of a transaction for transferring content on a home network and to identify a plurality of renderers for rendering the content when transferred. Where multiple pathways are present to transfer the content, remote identification of one or more pathways are also determined to transfer the content. Then, a rendering parameter is determined for each renderer for rendering the content and based on one or more criteria, a renderer is selected for rendering the content, along with the pathway for delivering the content. | 06-24-2010 |
20100162320 | LAPTOP BASED TELEVISION REMOTE CONTROL - A laptop that interacts with a television system. At least one module may be adapted to receive a user input identifying a video selection. The at least one module may also be adapted to display video information corresponding to the video selection. The at least one module may further be adapted to transmit a control signal adapted to cause the display of video information corresponding to the video selection on the television system. The laptop may, for example, be adapted to receive television system setting information and provide for user control of various television system settings. Also for example, the laptop may be adapted to receive media guide information, present such information to a user, provide for user selection of a media element, and transmit a control signal adapted to cause delivery of the selected media element from a multimedia source to the television system. | 06-24-2010 |
20100162328 | Remote control device transaction setup in a home network - A technique of using a remote control device to identify a source for transferring content on a home network, a renderer for rendering the content and a pathway within a home network to couple the source to the renderer to transfer the content. The remote control device then transmits control information to the source to set a control parameter value within the source to send the content and transmits control information to the renderer to set a control parameter value within the renderer to receive the content. The commands from the remote configure parameter values associated with a media layer in the source and/or the renderer to initiate a hand-shake to effect the content transfer, so that the source and the renderer need not initiate the hand-shake between themselves. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165402 | Servicing of wireless terminal print job by unsupported printer - A wireless terminal having processing resources, a user interface including a user input device and a display, and a wireless interface causes a file to be printed to a destination printer that is unsupported by the wireless terminal. The processing resources communicatively couple to the wireless interface and to the user interface and are operable to receive a file via a servicing wireless network and the wireless interface, receive a request via the user interface to print the file, identify a destination printer, determine that the wireless terminal does not support printing of the file at the destination printer, identify a servicing device for processing of the file for printing at the destination printer, and transmit the file to the servicing device via the wireless interface and the servicing wireless network. | 07-01-2010 |
20100172283 | SIMULCASTING OR MULTICASTING OF MULTIMEDIA CALL SESSIONS IN A LAN/WLAN/PAN VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A method and system for simulcasting multimedia information via a broadband access gateway and a wireless wide area network, is disclosed. An access device such as, for example, a mobile multimedia handset engaged in a call served by a wireless wide area network may migrate to within the coverage area of an associated broadband access gateway with a wireless interface. The wireless wide area network may simulcast call content to the broadband access gateway via a broadband network. A user in the proximity of the broadband access gateway may be notified of the simulcasting of the call, and may elect to continue the call via a WLAN/PAN-enabled wireless handset or other access device that is compatible with the wired and/or wireless interfaces of the broadband access gateway. | 07-08-2010 |
20100173580 | SHARED USER INTERFACE IN A SHARED RESOURCE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method for providing a secure user interface in a shared resource environment. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise establishing a first wireless communication link between a first system and a user interface system. A first wireless communication port may, for example, establish such a wireless communication link. A first secure communication pathway may be established between the first system and the user interface system. A first secure communication module may, for example, establish such a secure communication pathway. A second wireless communication link may be established between a second system and the user interface system. A second wireless communication port may, for example, establish such a wireless communication link. A second communication pathway between the second system and the user interface system may be established. A second communication module may, for example, establish such a communication pathway. | 07-08-2010 |
20100182991 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PRESERVING CONTENT TIMING ACROSS FEMTOCELL INTERFACES VIA TIMESTAMP INSERTION - Aspects of a method and system for preserving content timing across femtocell interfaces via timestamp insertion are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive a first time-stamped packet via a first interface and transcode the time-stamped packet. The femtocell may buffer the transcoded packet based on a time-stamp recovered from the packet and may transmit the buffered transcoded packet via a second interface. One of the first interface and the second interface may utilize the Internet Protocol. One of the first interface and the second interface may be a non-cellular interface and the other interface may be a cellular interface. The femtocell may be operable to generate a timestamp corresponding to a time instant at which a time-stamped packet arrived via the first interface or the second interface. The timestamp may be referenced to a clock within a cellular enabled communication devices communicatively coupled to the femtocell. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184405 | USER PROFILE BASED CONTENT DELIVERY BETWEEN A STANDARD HANDSET AND A FEMTOCELL DEVICE - An access device receives content from a broadband IP network to be communicated to a wireless handset over a radio access network (RAN). The access device acquires a user profile utilized in the radio network for the wireless handset. Based on the acquired user profile, the access device determines transmission parameters utilized for communicating the received content to the wireless handset using an air interface protocol over the radio access network. A security level and/or a security protocol, a transcoding mechanism, and/or transmission bit rate are determined based on the acquired user profile. A resolution, transmission bit rate, coding structure, security protocol and/or security level for transmitting the received content to the wireless handset are adjusted based on the acquired user profile. Alternately, the access device is enabled to receive content from the wireless handset using a transmission profile determined based on user profile of the wireless handset. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184411 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING DATA DISTRIBUTION VIA CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS UTILIZING AN INTEGRATED FEMTOCELL AND SET-TOP-BOX DEVICE - Aspects of a method and system for controlling data distribution via cellular communications with an integrated femtocell and set-top-box (IFSTB) device are provided. In this regard, a cellular enabled communication device may detect when it is within cellular communication range of a femtocell. Upon detection of the femtocell, the cellular enabled communication device may communicate instructions to a content source instructing the content source to deliver multimedia content to the femtocell. In instances that multimedia content is already being delivered to the cellular enabled communication device prior to the detection, the instructions from the cellular enabled communication device may instruct the content source to redirect the multimedia content to the femtocell. In this regard, the multimedia content may be delivered from the content source to the cellular enabled communication device via the femtocell. The femtocell may deliver at least a portion of the multimedia content to other communication devices. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184414 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING AND DELIVERY OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT BY AN INTEGRATED FEMTOCELL AND SET-TOP-BOX DEVICE - Aspects of a method and system for processing and delivery of multimedia content by an integrated femtocell and set-top-box device are provided. In this regard, a cellular enabled communication device may communicate its capabilities, preferences, and/or settings to an integrated femtocell and set-top-box device, wherein the integrated femtocell and set-top-box device may processes multimedia content for the cellular enabled communication device based on the capabilities, preferences, and/or settings of the cellular enabled communication device. Additionally, the cellular enabled communication device may receive the processed multimedia content from the integrated femtocell and set-top-box device by the cellular enabled communication device. The capabilities, preferences, and/or settings may comprise multimedia processing capabilities, preferences, and/or settings, communication capabilities, preferences, and/or settings, and/or power conditions, preferences, and/or settings. The integrated femtocell and set-top-box device may process the multimedia content to generate a plurality of subset datastreams. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184423 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION OF A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for installation and configuration of a femtocell are provided. In this regard, information for configuring a femtocell to operate in a specified location may be received by the femtocell and may be utilized to configure one or more parameters of the femtocell. Once the femtocell is operational the parameters may be updated and/or optimized based on one or both of characterizations of cellular signals and/or information received from a femtocell registry. In this manner the femtocell may be reconfigured utilizing the updated and/or optimized parameters. The one or more parameters may be configured based on attributes of the location in which the femtocell is to operate. The one or more parameters may be configured based on a location, number, and/or coverage area of other femtocells. The parameters may comprise one or more of: power levels, frequency of operation, and/or antenna beam pattern. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184431 | Method and System for Registering Femtocells to Provide Service - Aspects of a method and system for registering femtocells to provide service are provided. In this regard, a communication device may be operable to determine a plurality of femtocells within a vicinity of its location. The communication device may be operable to receive information communicated from one or more of the plurality of femtocells, which are managed by a femtocell management entity. One or more of the plurality of femtocells may be selected for transmitting and/or receiving cellular data based on the communicated information. The communicated information may comprise one or more of global navigation system satellite (GNSS) coordinates, an identification number, potential interference, power levels, location, associated communication devices, and/or directionality of antennas of the one or more femtocells. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184450 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING PARAMETERS OF A COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BETWEEN A FEMTOCELL AND A CELLULAR ENABLED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Aspects of a method and system for controlling parameters of a communication channel between a femtocell and a cellular enabled communication device are provided. In this regard, characteristics of a cellular communication channel established between a cellular enabled communication device and the femtocell may be communicated to a network management entity. The network management entity may determine whether to adjust one or more parameters of the cellular communication channel based on the characteristics. The femtocell and/or the cellular enabled communication device may adjust the one or more parameters based on the determination by the management entity. The characteristics may be determined by the femtocell and/or the cellular enabled communication device. The characteristics may comprise one or more of signal strength, bit error rate, packet error rate, and/or available bandwidth. The parameters may comprise one or more of data rate modulation scheme, error coding scheme, and/or transmitted power levels. | 07-22-2010 |
20100186027 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DATA PROCESSING IN A DEVICE WITH INTEGRATED SET-TOP-BOX AND FEMTOCELL FUNCTIONALITY - Aspects of a method and system for data processing in a device with integrated set-top-box and femtocell functionality are provided. Data may be received via an integrated femtocell and set-top-box device and may be synchronously processed, utilizing a common clock, to perform one or more femtocell functions and/or set-top-box functions. The common clock may be derived from global navigation satellite system signals. The integrated femtocell and set-top-box device may convert the received data from a first to a second format. The converted data may be transmitted to a cellular enabled communication device via a cellular transmitter within said integrated femtocell and set-top-box device and/or to a multimedia device via a multimedia interface within said integrated femtocell and set-top-box device. The received data may comprise multimedia content. The integrated femtocell and set-top-box device may be operable to encode, decode, transcode, encrypt, decrypt, scramble, descramble, and present the received multimedia content. | 07-22-2010 |
20100189009 | Providing link quality intelligence from physical layer to higher protocol layers - Providing link quality intelligence from physical layer to higher protocol layers. The PHY (physical layer) of devices operating within wireless communication systems assess 1 or more operational parameters corresponding to a PHY link that communicatively couples 2 or more devices. These PHYs provide this assessed intelligence to the devices' higher protocol layers so that these higher protocol layers have greater visibility of the operational parameters of the PHY link. These higher protocol layers may use this assessed intelligence to make decisions about how future communication are governed across the PHY links. For example, based on a change of the operational parameter(s), the higher protocol layers may modify the operational parameter(s) for future communications. The higher protocol layers may direct the PHY to assess a particular set of operational parameters, and the higher protocol layers may assess different operational parameters at different times. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189084 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMAL CONTROL OF DATA DELIVERY PATHS FOR A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A network controller within a femtocell may be operable to control communication of data among devices within a communication system comprising the femtocell and one or more other femtocells, end-point devices, base stations and/or access points and with devices external to the communication system. The network controller may receive and/or analyze status, measurements and/or operating constraints of one or more of the devices. Quality of service constraints, latency constraints, data type constraints and/or security constraints for communication of the data may be determined. The network controller may allocate physical and/or logical resources, may control security and/or quality of service and/or may allocate bandwidth for the communication of the data. The network controller may assign one or more of the devices comprised by the communication system to handle the communication of the data. The data may be communicated via wired, optical and/or wireless interfaces. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189085 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH RELIABILITY DELIVERY OF CONTENT TO A PLURALITY OF USERS VIA A PLURALITY OF FEMTOCELLS - A cellular enabled device may be operable to receive replicas of content that are communicated from a plurality of femtocells via transmit diversity. The content may comprise voice, video and/or data. A location of the cellular enabled device may be determined and/or communicated to each of the plurality of femtocells. Synchronization may enable the transmission of the content replicas based on the location of the cellular enabled device. Transmission times of the content replicas may be adjusted based on a location of the cellular enabled device. Transmission power and/or gain of the content replicas that are transmitted from each of the plurality of femtocells may be adjusted based on the location of the cellular enabled device. The content replicas may be received via different ones of a plurality of wireless communication standards. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195659 | Switch And/Or Router Node Advertising - A first of a plurality of intermediate routing devices is operable to advertise to and/or receive status information from remaining one(s) of the intermediate routing devices. The intermediate routing devices may store and/or analyze the advertised and/or received status information and may make routing decisions based on it. The first routing device may advertise status information for itself and/or for one or more other intermediate routing devices. Data may be routed based on type of data, service level and/or priority associated with the data. The advertised and/or received status information comprises current status information, predicted status information and/or past status information which may be based on one or more of port status, CPU utilization, memory utilization, quality of service (QoS), bandwidth utilization, bandwidth availability, traffic load, congestion, number of connections handled and capability to provide a particular level of service. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195977 | Constructing Video Frames And Synchronizing Audio Data In A Media Player From Data Received Via A Plurality Of Diverse Protocol Stack Paths - Video frames from a sequence of video frames and corresponding audio are received and processed by a media player. A first portion of the sequence depends on fewer reference frames then a second portion of the sequence. The number of reference frames per frame is limited. The first and second portions of the sequence are treated differently. The first portion is received at a lower data rate, with greater security and processed with a more robust protocol stack than the second portion. The first and second portions may be stored in a single queue and/or separate queues. The first portion of frame data is utilized to compensate for lost frames by repeating and/or interpolating video frames. The media player constructs a local video frame and synchronizes corresponding audio content with it. The received, repeated and/or interpolated video frames are assembled into display order and decoded. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197272 | Multiple Network, Shared Access Security Architecture Supporting Simultaneous Use Of Single SIM Multi-Radio Device And/Or Phone - A method and system is presented for a mobile wireless communication device that may communicate information to a first network device for enabling authentication, authorization and/or management of accounting for the mobile wireless device for use within a first network that utilizes a first wireless communication standard. A communication session may be established with a second network that utilizes a second wireless standard based on data sent to the second network related to the first authentication, authorization and/or accounting management. The wireless mobile device is operable to establish simultaneous communication sessions with the first network and the second network without communicating authentication, authorization and/or accounting information to the second network. The first and/or second network may comprise and/or share a session control server. The mobile wireless device may receive, store and/or modify additional information associated with the authentication, authorization and/or accounting management. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197281 | Single Operator, Single SIM, Single Billing Entity Supporting Simultaneous Use Of Multi-Radio Device And/Or Phone - A mobile wireless communication device may communicate information to a first network device for enabling authentication, authorization and/or management of accounting for the mobile wireless communication device for use within a first network. A SIM may enable a communication session with a second network based on data sent to the second network related to the authentication, authorization and/or accounting management for use in the first network. The mobile wireless communication device may be handed-off to the second network and/or may establish simultaneous communication sessions with the first network and the second network without communicating authentication, authorization and/or accounting information to the second network. The first and/or second network and/or another network device may comprise and/or share a session control server. The mobile wireless communication device may receive, store and/or modify additional information associated with the authentication, authorization and/or accounting management from the second network device. | 08-05-2010 |
20100199322 | Server And Client Selective Video Frame Pathways - Video frames from a sequence of video frames and corresponding audio are received and processed by a client system. A portion of the video frames depend on one or more reference frames to be reconstructed and another portion are independent. The number of allowed reference frames per frame may be limited. The dependent and independent frames are treated differently. Independent frames are received at a lower data rate, with greater security and processed with a more robust protocol stack than the dependent frames. The dependent and independent frames may be stored in a single queue and/or separate queues. Independent frame data is utilized to compensate for lost frames when repeating and/or interpolating frames. Received audio content is synchronized with corresponding received frames, repeated frames and/or interpolated frames. The received, repeated and/or interpolated frames are assembled into display order and decoded. The audio content may be shifted in tone. | 08-05-2010 |
20100201780 | UTILIZING IMAGE SEQUENCES TO PERFORM VIDEO STREAMING DURING VIDEO CONFERENCING - A communication device is operable to construct one or more image sequences that correspond to voice information, where the image sequences simulate video streaming via the communication device. The image sequences are synchronized with the voice information during active video based connection via the communication device. The image sequences are generated and/or retrieved within the communication device, and/or retrieved from an external source. At least some of the images may be generated via a secondary device that is communicatively coupled with the communication device. The generated images are stored within the secondary device and/or are stored in a dedicated video support server. The secondary device is operable to communicate the images directly during communication with the communication device and/or to communication information that enable retrieving and/or constructing the image sequences. Alternatively, the communication device is operable to generate the image sequences independently. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202320 | UTILIZING AD-HOC NETWORK PATHWAY SUPPORT VIA COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A user end-point device may determine a plurality of personal communication devices that are operable to provide ad-hoc network pathway support when communicatively coupled to the user end-point device, and negotiate with the personal communication devices for incentives for facilitating ad-hoc network communication via one or more connections between the devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the personal communication devices. The personal communication devices receive traffic intended for the user end-point device, and the received traffic is stored, buffered, and/or queued in the personal communication devices. Various types of communication are available during ad-hoc network pathway support, comprising multicast and snoop communications. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed based on incentives and/or availability of resources in the personal communication devices. The user end-point device is operable to reconstruct data from plurality of packets received directly and via the personal communication devices. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202423 | SERVICE ADVERTISEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device is operable to receive broadcast information communicated by a network access device specifying one or more advertised services provided via the network access device. The communication device then determines whether to connect via the network access device based on the received information. The network access device comprises an IEEE 802.11 access point, a user end-point device, a private access point network access device, and/or a wired network routing device. The advertisement broadcast is performed via beacon signals, other broadcast messages, and/or utilizing advertisement framing procedure, wherein service related information are set directly into beacons signal messaging, and/or communicated via advertisement subframes. The advertisement communication may comprise a multi-stage procedure, where a first stage enables obtaining service related information without attachment and/or full login into the network access device. User authentication and/or validation may be performed in subsequent stages. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202508 | NETWORK PACKET AWARE DATA ENCODING - A communication device is operable to manage communication of data streams, which comprise data encoded utilizing scheme that generate plurality of frames with logical grouping and/or inter-frame dependencies, based on determination of network payload parameters that are utilized for the data transmission. Exemplary encoding schemes comprise MPEG encoding, which generates data streams comprised I-frames, P-frames and/or B-frames. Network packets that are utilized to perform data communication are generated such that packet payloads comprise only data corresponding to a single frame and/or logical grouping within the encoded data stream. Feedback from networking subsystem in the communication device may be provided during processing of the data streams to enable use of network payload parameters during encoding operations. Frame sizes may be adjusted, for example, so that a size of each frame is multiple of a size of a payload of the network packets that are utilized in data communication. | 08-12-2010 |
20100210239 | SERVICE MOBILITY VIA A FEMTOCELL INFRASTRUCTURE - Aspects of a method and system for service mobility via a femtocell infrastructure are provided. In this regard, a mobile cellular enabled communication device may detect a femtocell operable to deliver content for one or more services to the mobile cellular enabled communication device, where the one or more services may be provided via a set-top-box communicatively coupled to the femtocell. The mobile cellular enabled communication device may communicate a user profile to the femtocell, wherein information in the profile may be utilized by the set-top-box to authenticate and/or authorize access to the services by the mobile cellular enabled communication device and thus the mobile cellular enabled communication device may receive the content from the set-top-box based on the authentication and/or authorization. The content may comprise voice, video, data, text and/or still images. The mobile cellular enabled communication device may detect the femtocell by receiving one or broadcast messages from the femtocell. | 08-19-2010 |
20100210279 | Dynamic Reconfiguration of Communication Resources in a Multi-Transceiver Configuration - A system and method that provide dynamic reconfiguration of communication resources in a multi-transceiver configuration. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise communicating a first portion of a first communication using a plurality of transceivers. A determination may be made to reallocate at least one of the plurality of transceivers for a second communication. A second portion of the first communication may be communicated using the plurality of transceivers less the reallocated transceiver(s), and the second communication may be communicated using at least the reallocated transceiver(s). Various aspects of the present invention may also comprise communicating a first communication utilizing a first transceiver and a second communication utilizing a second transceiver. A determination may be made to utilize the first and second transceivers in a MIMO configuration to communicate next information. The next information may then be communicated utilizing the first and second transceivers in a MIMO configuration. | 08-19-2010 |
20100214481 | O/S APPLICATION BASED MULTIPLE DEVICE ACCESS WINDOWING DISPLAY - A system and method for providing access to a video display for multiple devices. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise receiving, at a video display system, a first video data signal through a first data communication interface and a second video data signal through a second data communication interface. A processor module may process the first and second video data signals to generate video information of first and second display windows in a composite display. For example, the processor module may transform and translate video information to fit display windows. The processor module may, for example, generate an output video signal comprising information of the first window and information of the second window. Such a signal may, for example, be utilized to drive an output display showing the first and second windows. Various aspects may also provide method steps and apparatus for controlling aspects of the displayed windows. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215029 | MULTICASTING OR BROADCASTING VIA A PLURALITY OF FEMTOCELLS - Aspects of a method and system for servicing a plurality of users via a plurality of femtocells are provided. In this regard, a cellular enabled communication device may receive portions of a datastream from a plurality of femtocells, reconstruct the datastream from the received portions of the datastream, and process the reconstructed datastream for presentation to a user of the cellular enabled communication device. The received portions may be buffered in the cellular enabled communication device. The portions of the datastream may be associated with a plurality of CDMA channel access codes. The portions of the datastream may be received via a plurality of cellular frequencies. The portions of the datastream may be received during a plurality of TDMA timeslots. Portions of the datastream may be received from a cellular base station. Portions of the datastream may be received from a WiMAX base station. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220642 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PEER-TO-PEER CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS - Aspects of a method and system for peer-to-peer cellular communications are provided in which one or more cellular communication channels may be established between a femtocell and a plurality of communication devices. The femtocell may control routing of data between the plurality of communication devices via the one or more cellular communication channels. The femtocell may enable multicasting and/or broadcasting data from one of the communication devices to two or more remaining ones of the communication devices. The multicast and/or broadcast data may be communicated via the cellular communication channels and may be additionally communicated via an IP connection to the femtocell. Data may be communicated over the cellular communication channels in compliance with 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) standards and/or 3rd generation partnership project 2 (3GPP2) standards. The femtocell may reformat data prior to communicating it to one or more of the plurality of communication devices. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220692 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for communication are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive messages from a plurality of different sources comprising one or more other femtocells, one or more cellular enabled communication devices, and one or more non-cellular network nodes. The femtocell may select, based on the received messages, a master clock within one of the plurality of different sources as a master clock for synchronization of the plurality of different sources. A femtocell clock, a global navigational satellite signal (GNSS) clock, a cellular base station clock, or a cellular enabled communication device clock may be selected as the master clock. The femtocell may transmit and/or receive synchronization messages to and/or from the one or more cellular enabled communication devices and the one or more non-cellular network nodes. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220704 | Extended Call Handling Functionality Using Multi-Network Simulcasting - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information via a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information simultaneously exchanged by an associated access device via a wide area network. The broadband access gateway may store the received multimedia information locally, within the broadband access gateway, or may communicate the multimedia information to storage accessible from the broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220731 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING A PLURALITY OF PROVIDERS VIA A SINGLE FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for supporting a plurality of providers via a single femtocell are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may determine characteristics of one or more VLANs to which it is virtually communicatively coupled via a non-cellular connection and via a cellular connection. Based on the determined characteristics of the one or more VLANs, a cellular transmitter and/or receiver of the femtocell may be controlled to transmit and/or receive packets belonging to the one or more VLANs via the non-cellular connection and/or via the cellular connection. The characteristics of the one or more VLANs may comprise one or more of: cellular standards utilized by the one or more VLANs, cellular frequencies utilized in the one or more VLANs, access technologies utilized by the one or more VLANs, and a duplexing method utilized by the one or more VLANs. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222054 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS AND UTILIZATION OF FEMTOCELLS VIA A NETWORK BASED SERVICE - Aspects of a method and system for controlling access and utilization of femtocells via a network based service are provided. In this regard, a femtocell management entity communicatively coupled to a network and operable to manage one or more femtocells may be accessed via an end-user communication device. In this manner, the femtocell(s) may be managed via the end-user device such as one of the cellular enabled communication devices. The femtocell management entity may enable establishing one or more SLAs between the femtocell(s) and the cellular enabled communication device(s). The SLA(s) may enable the cellular enabled communication device(s) to establish one or more cellular communication channels with the femtocell(s). The SLA(s) may determine when the cellular communication channels may be established. The SLA(s) may determine how a femtocell owner/operator may be compensated for providing cellular service. The femtocell(s) may be accessed utilizing Internet Protocol. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222069 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MITIGATING INTERFERENCE AMONG FEMTOCELLS VIA INTELLIGENT CHANNEL SELECTION - Aspects of a method and system for mitigating interference among femtocells via intelligent channel selection are provided. In this regard, signals which may interfere with cellular communications between a femtocell and a cellular communication device may be detected via the femtocell. Based on the detection, the femtocell may be configured to transmit and/or receive signals on one or more frequencies and/or channels. The one or more frequencies and/or channels may be determined in the femtocell and/or in a network management entity. Detecting interfering signals and configuring the one or more femtocells may occur periodically, upon installation of a femtocell, upon power-up of a femtocell, and/or upon command from a network administrator. The results of the detection may be communicated to one or more other femtocells and/or to a network management entity. | 09-02-2010 |
20100238836 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TIMELY DELIVERY OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT VIA A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for timely delivery of multimedia content via a femtocell are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive data via an upstream path and transmit data via a downstream path. One of the upstream path and downstream path may comprise a cellular path and the other may comprise a non-cellular path. One or both of the upstream path and the downstream path may be audio video bridging (AVB) paths. Data may be stored in the femtocell based on timing characteristics of one or both of the upstream path and the downstream path. Data may be delivered to the femtocell utilizing best effort delivery and the data may be forwarded by the femtocell with guaranteed quality of service. Resources in the femtocell may be reserved and/or synchronized, utilizing AVB protocols, for communication of one or more data streams. | 09-23-2010 |
20100242261 | COMBINED SATELLITE AND BROADBAND ACCESS ANTENNAS USING COMMON INFRASTRUCTURE - A method of installing multiple over-the-air antennas is disclosed. The method includes the steps of mounting a satellite antenna to a installation surface, such that the mounting allows the satellite antenna to be aimed at a satellite, attaching a broadband access antenna to one of the installation surface and a portion of the satellite antenna, such that the attaching allows the broadband access antenna to be aimed at a broadband access source, connecting first wiring from the broadband access antenna to a first downconverter and second wiring from the satellite antenna to a second downconverter, providing outputs of the first and second downconverters to a cable in communication with at least a satellite receiver and positioning, on at least a coarse scale, the satellite antenna and the broadband access antenna such that they are approximately pointed at the satellite and the broadband access source, respectively. | 09-30-2010 |
20100245606 | PERSONAL ACCESS AND CONTROL OF MEDIA PERIPHERALS ON A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Methods are disclosed for indirectly monitoring and controlling at least one media peripheral device in a media exchange network by accessing a media management system (MMS) via a first media peripheral (MP) device (e.g., a TV screen) using a user control device (e.g., a remote control). An operation corresponding to a second media peripheral (MP) device (e.g., a digital camera) may be selected via the MMS using the first MP device and the user control device. The operation is then carried out (i.e., performed) by the second MP device. A status of the second MP device may be selected via the MMS using the first MP device and the user control device. The selected status is then displayed on the first MP device. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246386 | Method and System for Communicating Data Via a Mesh Network of Interconnected Femtocells - Aspects of a method and system for communicating data via a mesh network of interconnected femtocells are provided. In this regard, a plurality of femtocells and/or base stations may be interconnected to form a mesh network. A cellular enabled communication device may be enabled to communicate data to a first of the plurality of interconnected femtocells. The data may be routed by one or more other of the plurality of interconnected femtocells within the mesh network via one or more dynamically determined routes. The one or more dynamically determined routes may be determined based on one or more of a type of the communicated data, a quality of service (QoS) requested by the cellular enabled communication device for communicating the data and/or a cost associated with the routing of the data by the one or more other of the plurality of interconnected femtocells within the mesh network. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246482 | Method and System for Dynamic Adjustment of Power and Frequencies in a Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for dynamic adjustment of power, antenna direction and frequencies in a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of femtocells, one or more base stations, and a femtocell management entity that coordinates operation of the plurality of femtocells. One or more parameters may be communicated from one of the plurality of femtocells and/or one or more base stations to the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be enabled to utilize the one or more parameters to determine configuration information for one of the plurality of femtocells and/or for one or more remaining ones of the plurality of femtocells. One of the plurality of femtocells may be enabled to receive the determined configuration information from the femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of femtocells may be configured utilizing the received determined configuration information. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246483 | Method and System for Communication Between a Plurality of Femtocells to Mitigate Interference Between the Femtocells - Aspects of a method and system for communication between a plurality of femtocells to mitigate interference between the femtocells are provided. In this regard, a first of a plurality of femtocells in a network may receive interference information from one or more other femtocells, one or more base stations, and/or one or more communication devices in the network. The first femtocell may determine configuration information for the first femtocell and one or more other femtocells in the network based on the communicated interference information. The first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network may be configured based on the determined configuration information. The interference between the plurality of femtocells may be mitigated based on configuring the first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network based on the determined configuration information. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246985 | APPLICATION BASED ADAPTIVE ENCODING - A system and method for encoding dynamic image information for an image generated by a computer application executing on a processor. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise determining a first set of information describing a reference image. A second set of information may be determined for describing an image, wherein the second set of information comprises information indicative of movement between the image and the reference image. For example, a set of primary movement directions may be determined based at least in part on the computer application generating the image. Such set of primary movement directions may be utilized for analyzing the image relative to the reference images. The difference between the image and the reference image may, for example, be analyzed using at least one of the set of primary movement directions. A movement direction may, for example, be utilized to describe the image. | 09-30-2010 |
20100247061 | Collection and concurrent integration of supplemental information related to currently playing media - Collection and concurrent integration of supplemental information related to currently playing media. Based on certain characteristics associated with the media, additional information related thereto is identified and output along with the media itself. This provides an enhanced experience for a user, in that, this supplemental information augments the presentation of the media to the user. Such supplemental content can be any one or combination of a wide variety of types including textual information, image content, audio content, video content, etc. This supplemental content may be output automatically in conjunction with the media (e.g., when such media is being output). Alternatively, the supplemental content may be output upon the authorization of a user. The supplemental content may be output in a predetermined location (e.g., location within a video display). Alternatively, such supplemental content may be output within an unused (or infrequently used) area of such a video display. | 09-30-2010 |
20100248727 | COMMUNICATION SESSION SOFT HANDOVER - While receiving content for a service at a user device via a particular delivery route, detecting a request for delivery of subsequent content for the service via a secure alternate delivery route. The user device may concurrently receive delivery of the subsequent content via the particular delivery route and the secure alternate delivery route. The detected request may be generated based on QoS associated with the received content of the service. The detected request may be received from a communication network and may comprise identification information for the particular delivery route. The secure alternate delivery route may be determined based on the identification information for the particular delivery route. A communication session profile may be generated and/or determined based on the secure alternate delivery route. The communication session profile is utilized for the requested delivery of the further content via the secure alternate delivery route. | 09-30-2010 |
20100248762 | Method and System for Mitigating Interference Between a Plurality of Femtocells Utilizing Transmission Deferral - Aspects of a method and system for mitigating interference between a plurality of femtocells utilizing transmission deferral are provided. In this regard, prior to transmission of cellular signals by a femtocell, the femtocell may be operable to detect signals that interfere with cellular communications between the femtocell, one or more base stations, and a cellular enabled communication device that communicates with the femtocell. The femtocell may be operable to defer transmission of the cellular signals for a particular period of time based on the detected interfering signals. During transmission of cellular signals from the femtocell to a cellular enabled communication device, the femtocell may be operable to detect loss of one or more packets of data. The femtocell may be operable to defer transmission of the cellular signals for a particular period of time based on the detected loss of one or more packets of data. | 09-30-2010 |
20100250747 | ADAPTIVE MULTIPLE PATHWAY SESSION SETUP TO SUPPORT QoS SERVICES - A user device is operable to request setup of one or more serving routes to be utilized for delivering content to the user device. The user device is operable to receive the delivered content via the one or more serving routes and/or one or more auxiliary routes based on the request. The serving routes and the auxiliary routes are determined based on a provisioning profile for the user device. The provisioning profile comprises preferred service types, desired QoS for one or more services, client account information, and/or client billing and credit verification information. A connection or communication session is established dynamically based on demand, from the user device and/or a supporting network, for each of the determined one or more auxiliary routes. The user device is operable to receive the delivered content via the determined auxiliary routes in the established connection sessions. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254319 | JOINT RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A Femtocell gateway is operable to determine resource usage information among associated Femtocells in a Femtocell network. The Femtocell gateway may be enabled to allocate resources for distributing traffic among the associated Femtocells based on the determined resource usage information comprising IP usage information, radio access usage, and/or physical layer capabilities among the Femtocells. The Femtocell gateway may be enabled to identify Femtocells with excess resources assigned and Femtocells with a need for additional resources to support a particular traffic based on the determined resource usage information. The Femtocell gateway is operable to allocate and/or reallocate at least a portion of excess resources to the Femtocells with the need for the additional resource to support the particular traffic. The Femtocells that share resources with other Femtocells in the Femtocell network is rewarded with credits. The particular traffic is redirected to the Femtocells with excess resources and distributed to destinations. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254355 | Method and System for Determining a Location of a Device Using Femtocell Information - Aspects of a method and system for determining a location of a device using femtocell information are provided. In this regard, a femtocell management entity may be operable to receive global navigation system satellite (GNSS) coordinates of one or more of a plurality of femtocells and one or both of a receive signal strength indication (RSSI) and/or power levels of one or more of the plurality of femtocells, which are managed by the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be operable to determine a location of a communication device that is derived based on the received GNSS coordinates, RSSI and/or power levels of one or more of the plurality of femtocells and communicate the determined location to a communication device. One or more location based applications and/or services within the communication device may be operable to utilize the received determined location to provide mapping and/or location information. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254357 | Method and System for Remotely Communicating Information to a Plurality of Devices Within a Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for remotely communicating information to a plurality of devices within a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of communication devices operable to communicate with one or more of a plurality of femtocells via one or more wireless connections and/or via one or more wired connections. The plurality of femtocells may be managed via a femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of communication devices may be operable to receive information from the femtocell management entity via one or more of the plurality of femtocells utilizing one or both of the one or more wireless connections and/or the one or more wired connections. One of the plurality of communication devices may be configured by utilizing the received information. The received information may comprise one or more of software, service profiles, device configuration data and/or synchronization data. | 10-07-2010 |
20100261435 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL FREQUENCY BAND COMPRESSION - A wireless device includes processing circuitry and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver section. The processing circuitry determines a set of information signals for receipt that are carried by a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal having a plurality of information signal frequency bands with first frequency band separation. The RF receiver section, for each information signal of the set of information signals, down-converts the RF MFBMS signal by a respective shift frequency to produce a respective baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) information signal and band pass filter the respective BB/IF information signal. The RF receiver section combines the BB/IF information signals corresponding to the set of information signals to form a BB/IF MFBMS signal having second frequency band separation of the information signals that differs from the first frequency band separation(s). The processing circuitry extracts data from the first and second information signals of the BB/IF MFBMS signal. | 10-14-2010 |
20100261438 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL UNIVERSAL FRONT END WITH ADJUSTABLE ADC(S) - A wireless device includes processing circuitry, a receiver section, a transmitter section, and an antenna. The processing circuitry determines a set of information signals of a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal. The receiver section down-converts a portion of the RF MFBMS signal by one or more respective shift frequencies to produce a corresponding baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) information signal from which the processing circuitry extracts data. The transmitter section converts a respective BB/IF information signal received from the processing circuitry by a respective shift frequency to produce a corresponding RF information signal and a combiner that combines the RF information signals to form a RF MFBMS signal. The receiver section and the transmitter section include ADCs and/or DACs, respectively, that are adjustable based upon characteristics of the RF MFBMS signal, the BB/IF MFBMS signal, and/or based upon signals carried therein, e.g., modulation type, SNR requirements, etc. | 10-14-2010 |
20100261443 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL UNIVERSAL FRONT END WITH ADJUSTABLE ANALOG SIGNAL PATH COMPONENTS - A wireless device includes processing circuitry, a receiver section, a transmitter section, and an antenna. The processing circuitry determines a set of information signals of a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal. The receiver section down-converts a portion of the RF MFBMS signal by one or more respective shift frequencies to produce a corresponding baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) information signal from which the processing circuitry extracts data. The transmitter section converts a respective BB/IF information signal received from the processing circuitry by a respective shift frequency to produce a corresponding RF information signal and a combiner that combines the RF information signals to form a RF MFBMS signal. Each of the receiver section and the transmitter section may include analog signal path elements that are adjustable based upon characteristics of the RF MFBMS signal, the BB/IF MFBMS signal, and/or based upon signals carried therein, e.g., modulation type, SNR requirements, etc. | 10-14-2010 |
20100261500 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND MULTIPLE STANDARD INFORMATION SIGNAL MODULAR BASEBAND PROCESSING MODULE - A wireless device includes processing circuitry and Radio Frequency (RF) receiver and transmitter sections. An antenna transmits and receives a Radio Frequency (RF) Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal having a plurality of RF information signals within respective information signal frequency bands. The receiver/transmitter sections down-convert/up-convert between the RF MFBMS signal and a corresponding baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) information signal based upon at least one shift frequency. During receipt, the processing circuitry enables a set of information signal modules corresponding to the set of information signals to service receipt and extraction of data from the set of BB/IF information signals using the enabled set of information signal modules. During transmission, the processing circuitry enables a set of information signal modules corresponding to the set of information signals and produces an outgoing BB/IF MFBMS signal. The processing circuitry further determines the at least one shift frequency, which varies over time. | 10-14-2010 |
20100261501 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL FREQUENCY BAND CONVERSION - A wireless device includes processing circuitry and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver section. The processing circuitry determines a set of information signals for receipt, the set of information signals carried by a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal having a plurality of information signal frequency bands. The processing circuitry determines a shift frequency based upon the determination. the RF receiver section receives the RF MFBMS signal and down-converts the RF MFBMS signal by the shift frequency to produce a baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) MFBMS signal. The processing circuitry then extracts data from the set of information signals of the BB/IF MFBMS signal. | 10-14-2010 |
20100267417 | SINGLE CHIP MULTIMODE BASEBAND PROCESSING CIRCUITRY WITH A SHARED RADIO INTERFACE - A multimode communication integrated circuit comprising baseband processing circuitry with a shared radio interface. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise a processor module adapted to perform various processing (e.g., baseband processing) in support of multimode communications. A first radio module may be communicatively coupled to the processor module through a common communication interface. A second radio module may also be communicatively coupled to the processor module through the common communication interface. The common communication interface may, for example, be adapted to communicate information over a communication bus that is shared between the processor module and a plurality of radio modules (e.g., the first and second radio modules). | 10-21-2010 |
20100272151 | TRANSCEIVER WITH PLURAL SPACE HOPPING PHASED ARRAY ANTENNAS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless transceiver includes a plurality of phased array antennas, that transmit an outbound RF signal containing outbound data to remote transceivers and that receives an inbound RF signal containing inbound data from the remote RF transceivers, wherein the plurality of phased array antennas are each configurable based on a control signal. An antenna configuration controller generates the control signal to configure the phased array antenna to hop among a plurality of radiation patterns based on a hopping sequence. An RF transceiver section generates the outbound RF signal based on the outbound data and that generates the inbound data based on the inbound RF signal. In one configuration, a switching section selectively couples a selected one of the plurality of phased array antennas to the RF transceiver section, based on the control signal. In figuration, the RF transceiver section includes an RF section for each antenna array. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273436 | COLLABORATIVE PAIRING TRANSCEIVER WITH SPACE HOPPING PHASED ARRAY ANTENNA AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless transceiver includes at least one phased array antenna, that transmits an outbound RF signal containing outbound data to a remote transceiver and that receives an inbound RF signal containing inbound data from the at least one remote RF transceiver, wherein the at least one phased array antenna is configurable based on a control signal. An antenna configuration controller generates the control signal to configure the phased array antenna to hop among a plurality of selected radiation patterns that are collaboratively selected by the wireless transceiver and the remote transceiver via a pairing procedure. At least one RF transceiver section generates the outbound RF signal based on the outbound data and that generates the inbound data based on the inbound RF signal. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273437 | TRANSCEIVER WITH SPACE HOPPING PHASED ARRAY ANTENNA AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless transceiver includes at least one phased array antenna, that transmits an outbound RF signal containing outbound data to at least one remote transceiver and that receives an inbound RF signal containing inbound data from the at least one remote RF transceiver, wherein the at least one phased array antenna is configurable based on a control signal. An antenna configuration controller generates the control signal to configure the phased array antenna to hop among a plurality of radiation patterns based on a hopping sequence. At least one RF transceiver section generates the outbound RF signal based on the outbound data and that generates the inbound data based on the inbound RF signal. | 10-28-2010 |
20100273523 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE THAT DETECTS AND ADAPTS TO THE PRESENCE OF OTHER DEVICES AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - An adaptive communication device includes a transceiver that communicates with a first remote communication device in a millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a first protocol. The transceiver generates conflict detection signals based on signals received from a second remote communication device that communicates in accordance with a second protocol. A conflict detection module detects communication by the second communication device based on the conflict detection signals and generates a model trigger signal in response thereto. A conflict modeling module responds to the model trigger signal by generating idle prediction data based on the conflict detection signals, wherein the idle prediction data predicts an idle period in the communications by the second remote communication device. A transmission control module generates transmit control signals based on the idle prediction data, wherein the transceiver times transmissions sent to the first remote communication device based on the transmit control signals. | 10-28-2010 |
20100277510 | ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF LCD DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS BASED ON VIDEO CONTENT - Determining video content type of a video displayed on a LCD and triggering adjustment in drive power of the LCD based on the video content type. The video content type indicates relative content motion of the video. A video content type detection module is one or combination of a software and a hardware and directs the LCD to be driven relative slower or faster based upon video content. The module independently or in conjunction with another module identifies an active window from a plurality of windows corresponding to a plurality of applications running on the host device and sets the drive power of the LCD based on speed of a video displayed on the active window. The module may also adapt LCD drive power based upon user input and/or remaining battery life. | 11-04-2010 |
20100277511 | ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS OF PIXELS OF A LCD BASED ON VIDEO CONTENT - Determining pixel behavior type of a pixel or a group of pixels of a LCD and triggering adjustment in drive power of the pixel or the group of pixels based on the pixel behavior type. The pixel behavior type indicates relative motion of areas on the LCD in a video. A pixel behavior determination module is one or combination of a software and a hardware and directs one or more selected pixels of the LCD to be driven relative slower or faster based upon content of video that the selected pixels display. The module independently or in conjunction with another module identifies an active window from a plurality of windows corresponding to a plurality of applications running on the host device and sets the drive power of those pixels that correspond to the active window based on speed of a video displayed on the active window. The module may also adapt LCD drive power on a pixel by pixel basis based upon user input and/or remaining battery life. | 11-04-2010 |
20100285823 | CONTROL DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES TO COMMUNICATION DEVICES THAT USE DIFFERING PROTOCOLS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A control device includes at least one communication interface for communicating first control data with a first plurality of communication devices that utilize the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a first protocol and further for communicating second control data with a second plurality of communication devices that utilize the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a second protocol. A resource controller allocates resources of the millimeter wave frequency band to the first plurality of communication devices and the second plurality of communication devices based on the first control data and the second control data. | 11-11-2010 |
20100285824 | MULTIMODE CONTROL DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES TO COMMUNICATION DEVICES THAT USE DIFFERING PROTOCOLS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A control device includes a first communication interface for communicating first control data with a first plurality of communication devices that utilize the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a first protocol, wherein the first communication interface utilizes the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with the first protocol. A second communication interface communicates second control data with a second plurality of communication devices that utilize the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a second protocol, wherein the second communication interface utilizes the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with the second protocol. A resource controller allocates resources of the millimeter wave frequency band to the first plurality of communication devices and the second plurality of communication devices based on the first control data and the second control data. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290451 | Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance - Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance. A common backbone (either wired or wireless) is employed that provides a common CLK (clock signal) to all of the various PNCs (piconet coordinators) of various piconets that may operate within a sufficiently close region such that interference could undesirably occur. By providing a very reliable CLK signal from a common backbone to all of the PNCs of the various piconets operating within a substantially close proximity to one another, very precise synchronization may be ensured for all of the communications performed therein. The various piconets may then even operate using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)—whose performance would be substantially compromised without effective synchronization. In addition, combined TFC (time frequency code) and TDMA may also be employed to support the communications therein thereby providing even another degree of orthogonality that provided by TDMA alone. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290756 | Overlay to augment quality of currently playing media - Overlay to augment quality of currently playing media. The overlay operates to enhance the quality format of media so that it is output in a different quality format. As one example, when playing media content encoded in accordance with a standard definition television (SDTV) quality format, an appropriate overlay would operate to upgrade the quality format thereof to enhanced definition television (EDTV) quality format, high definition television (HDTV) quality format (or some other quality format). An appropriate overlay may also operate in accordance with audio content (e.g., upgrading a quality format of the audio content). With the advent of Blu-Ray discs (and other higher quality format discs), many individuals presently have libraries of media that are encoded with legacy/previous quality formats. An appropriate overlay that operates in conjunction with media encoded with a legacy/previous quality format allows the same content to be enjoyed in accordance with a newer/improved quality format. | 11-18-2010 |
20100296401 | MULTI-DIMENSIONAL RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A communication system may include a plurality of entities comprising a hybrid network controller, one or more femtocells, one or more access points and/or one or more end-point devices. The hybrid network controller may determine and/or communicate configuration parameters corresponding to space, time, frequency and/or code domains that may enable communication of data between and/or among two or more of the entities. The configuration parameters may comprise frequency, time slot, codes and/or antenna pattern assignments. The network controller may control communication between a communication device external to the communication system and one or more of the entities within the communication system. Availability of frequencies, time slots, codes and/or antenna patterns may be monitored. The network controller may assign the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices to handle the communication of the data. The hybrid network controller may communicate with the plurality of entities via wired, optical and/or wireless interfaces. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296487 | TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT IN A HYBRID FEMTOCELL/WLAN WIRELESS ENTERPRISE NETWORK - A hybrid network controller may determine and/or communicate traffic management information for enabling setup and/or handoff of call and/or communication session among femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices. Traffic management information may comprise set-up instructions, handoff instructions, transmit power, neighbor list information, signal quality thresholds, frequency assignments, transmission time, code assignments and/or antenna pattern assignments. The hybrid network controller and/or an end-point device may control handoffs between a communication device external to the communication system and the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices. Received signal strength, interference levels, SNR, signal path delay, power consumption, traffic loads, bandwidth usage and/or radio resource availability may be monitored and/or analyzed by the hybrid network controller. The hybrid network controller may assign time slots, codes, antenna patterns as well as a serving femtocell and/or AP for a set up and/or a handoff. The information may be communicated via wired, optical and/or wireless interfaces. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296497 | HYBRID NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR FEMTOCELLS AND ACCESS POINTS - A communication system may comprise a hybrid network controller, femtocells, access points and/or endpoint devices. The hybrid network controller may control communication of information between two or more specified femtocells, access points and/or endpoint devices by communicating control information. The communication of information via the femtocells, access points may be managed by the hybrid network controller. The network controller may handle network traffic associated with the communication of the information. The hybrid network controller may control one or more wired and/or wireless interfaces for handling of the network traffic. Quality of service and/or bandwidth allocation may be managed by the hybrid network controller. Resources utilized by the endpoint devices, the femtocells and/or the access points may be allocated and/or de-allocated by the network controller. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296498 | INTEGRATED FEMTOCELL AND WLAN ACCESS POINT - Aspects of a method and system for integrated femtocell and WLAN access point are provided. In this regard, an IFWAP device comprises an integrated WLAN interface and an integrated femtocell cellular interface. The IFWAP device may be operable to receive data, determine a destination of the received data, and transmit the received data to one or more end-user devices via the integrated WLAN interface and/or the integrated femtocell cellular interface based on said determined destination. In various embodiments of the invention, the IFWAP device may be operable to receive data from one or more end-user devices via the integrated WLAN interface and/or the integrated femtocell cellular interface, process the received data to re-format and/or re-packetize it into one or more corresponding IP packets, and transmit the one or more IP packets to one or more destination devices via a single network connection. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296499 | COMMUNICATIVELY COUPLING WLAN AND FEMTOCELL NETWORKS UTILIZING A FEMTOCELL-TO-WLAN NETWORK BRIDGE AND CONTROLLER - Aspects of a method and system for communicatively coupling WLAN and femtocell networks utilizing a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller are provided. In this regard, data communicated via one or more femtocells and one or more WLAN access points may be managed via a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller communicatively coupled between a femtocell controller and an access point controller. The femtocell controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more femtocells, and the access point controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more WLAN access points. The FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller, the femtocell controller, and the access point controller may interoperate to manage data communicated between a first end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the femtocells and a second end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the access points. | 11-25-2010 |
20100306589 | COMPUTER CHIP SET HAVING ON BOARD WIRELESS INTERFACES TO SUPPORT TEST OPERATIONS - A method and apparatus are provided for an embedded wireless interface that is embedded in, for example, one of an input and output controller device for controlling input and output communications with off-board devices, within a memory controller device and a processor motherboard. The embedded wireless interface may be utilized as a wireless test access point to provide signal stimulations for test purposes or to monitor communications over a specified wired communication link. | 12-02-2010 |
20100325545 | Replacing first sourced media with second sourced media based on first sourced media quality - Replacing first sourced media with second sourced media based on first sourced media quality. A media processing device is operative to monitor the quality of first media and selectively to substitute second media in its place (in full or in part) based on a change in the quality of the first media. For example, in the context of first media received via broadcast (e.g., radio, satellite, streaming over the Internet, etc.), when a quality of the first media degrades, second media is substituted there for. The second media may be retrieved from a media storage device, or alternatively, it may be provided via another broadcast that has an acceptable quality level. The measure of quality of media may be characterized in accordance with any one or more parameters (e.g., change in signal to noise ratio (SNR), a discontinuity/gap, jitter, latency, etc.). | 12-23-2010 |
20100325683 | Media broadcast emulator - Media broadcast emulator. A media processing device is operative to create a live program type experience for a user. Various types of media are combined to emulate a live media broadcast. Different portions of various media types (e.g., real-time media, stored media, etc.) may be combined to generate a program that emulates a live program. First media can be analyzed to identify characteristics thereof (e.g., meta data associated therewith: (1) music media: song title, rating, artist name, album name, year, track number, genre, author, publisher, etc., (2) disk jockey/talk radio commentary media: speaker, date of first broadcast, station affiliate, broadcast locale, etc.). Based on these identified characteristics, second media related to the first media may be combined with the first media to generate an emulation of a live media broadcast. Alternatively, it is noted that any desired playlist may also be constructed by combining user-selected and/or related media as well. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329489 | ADAPTIVE BEAMFORMING FOR AUDIO AND DATA APPLICATIONS - A system and method for performing efficient directed sound and/or data to a user utilizing position information. Various aspects may, for example, comprise determining position associated with one or more recipients of audio signals, determining one or more audio signal parameters based, at least in part, on such determined position information, and generating audio signals based on such determined audio signal parameters. For example, direction, timing, phasing and/or magnitude of such audio signals may be adapted based on a dynamic recipient positional environment. | 12-30-2010 |
20110009063 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A HIGH FREQUENCY PHY LAYER FOR HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A single communication stack may be utilized to setup a data transmission session between wireless devices. A primary physical layer corresponding to the single communication stack may be utilized by the wireless devices to perform discovery, pairing, and security setup operations when setting the data transmission session. A secondary physical layer may be utilized to perform high speed data transmission. The secondary physical layer may be integrated or managed via the single communication stack corresponding to the primary physical layer, and applications running on top of the single communication stack may utilize the secondary physical layer transparently. A portion of the transmitted data may be multiplexed onto other secondary physical layers that may be available to the wireless devices. Alternatively, transmission of data may comprise switching among available secondary physical layers. The primary physical layer may be utilized during data transmission to continually monitor and/or manage the data transmission. | 01-13-2011 |
20110013677 | CONFIGURABLE TRANSCEIVER INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A configurable radio frequency (RF) transceiver integrated circuit (IC) includes an RF input/output (IO) module, a plurality of switching modules, and a plurality of components. The RF IO module and selected components of the plurality of components are inter-connected via the at least some of the plurality of switching modules based on a configuration instruction to produce at least one of: at least a portion of a receiver and at least a portion of transmitter. | 01-20-2011 |
20110018759 | COUPLED GPS PHONE AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM - A navigation system includes a Global Positioning System (GPS) enabled wireless phone and a GPS navigation system. The GPS enabled wireless phone includes a GPS receiver, a communications interface, and processing circuitry coupled to the GPS receiver and to the communications interface. The GPS navigation system includes a GPS receiver, a communications interface operable to communicatively couple to the communications interface of the GPS enabled wireless phone, and processing circuitry coupled to the GPS receiver and to the communications interface. The processing circuitry of the GPS navigation system is operable to establish device pairing with the GPS enabled wireless phone and to exchange GPS information and other information with the GPS enabled wireless phone via the secure link. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019531 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAULT TOLERANCE AND RESILIENCE FOR VIRTUALIZED MACHINES IN A NETWORK - Hypervisor functions, which may control operations of one or more virtual machines, may be distributed across a plurality of network devices. State information may be stored for the virtual machines on network devices for fault tolerance and resilience. The virtual machines may retrieve stored state information to recover from a fault. The hypervisor may control the storage of the state information. Resources of the network devices may be allocated for fault tolerance and resilience of the virtual machines based on network device parameters, which may include storage capacity, processor usage, access time, communication bandwidth, and/or latency. The state information may include program content, cache content, memory content, and/or register content information, may be stored on a continuous, periodic, or an aperiodic basis, and may be shared among the network devices to enable the processing of data by the virtual machines when a fault occurs, and may be incrementally updated. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019552 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK AWARE VIRTUAL MACHINES - A virtual machine running on an endpoint device may encode a mark comprising routing parameters within one or more packets of a packet stream to indicate services and/or costs to be utilized in processing and/or communicating the packet stream. The virtual machine may communicate the packet stream to another network device. The routing parameters within the marks may indicate device capabilities, service class, quality measurements, latency and/or power usage. The routing parameters may comprise costs that may indicate capacity, efficiency and/or performance of power usage, bandwidth, absolute and/or relative latency, frame-drop eligibility, memory and processing. The packet stream is received and inspected to identify the marks and/or routing parameters. A virtual machine may be initialized and/or configured to process and/or communicate the packet stream based on the routing parameters. Routing may utilize based SPB, TRILL, and/or AVB. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019560 | Method And System For Power-Limited Switching And/Or Routing In A Network - Communication devices may determine routes and/or may select a route for communicating data between a first communication device and a second communication device. The selected route may require the least power consumption. The determined routes may be ranked based on an amount of power required for routing the data. The data may be routed among devices based on the ranking. Power consumption of a device may be determined based on a bandwidth associated with the device. Route selection may be based on availability of power for power sources of the communication devices. The selection of routes may be based on a current power consumption and/or a history of prior power consumption of the communication devices. The selection of a route which may require least power consumption may be optimized based on the availability of bandwidth. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019585 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCALABLE SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE - A switching fabric, within a network switching device, may comprise a plurality of dedicated interface modules to enable the switching fabric to interface with a plurality of switching support subsystems. The switching support subsystems may comprise a memory subsystem, a content address memory (CAM) subsystem, a packet processing subsystem, and a physical layer (PHY) subsystem. The switching fabric may be operable to determine capacity and/or capability of each of the plurality of switching support subsystems; and to configure each of the plurality of dedicated interface modules based on the determined capacity and/or capability of a corresponding switching support subsystem. The switching fabric also comprises an inter-switch interface module to enable coupling the network switching device to a plurality of other network switching devices, to form a multi-device switching mesh that enable sharing of resources and/or aggregation of switching capabilities of the network switching devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019626 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK RESOURCE ALLOCATION BASED ON A USAGE PATTERN - Aspects of a method and system for network resource allocation based on a usage pattern may comprise a management entity that coordinates operation of one or more endpoint devices. The management entity may be operable to receive a usage pattern associated with each of the one or more endpoint devices. The management entity may be operable to determine resource allocation information for each of the one or more endpoint devices based on the received usage pattern associated with each of the one or more endpoint devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019639 | Enterprise Level Management in a Multi-Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for enterprise level management in a multi-femtocell network are provided. In this regard, one or more endpoint devices may receive traffic management information from a hybrid network controller for enabling handoff of calls and/or communication sessions among femtocells and/or access points. The received traffic management information may comprise set-up instructions, handoff instructions, transmit power, neighbor list information, signal quality thresholds, frequency assignments, transmission time, code assignments and/or antenna pattern assignments. The endpoint device may control handoffs between a communication device external to the communication system and the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019668 | Method And System For Packet Preemption Via Packet Rescheduling - Link partners coupled via an Ethernet link comprise memory buffers and/or PHY devices and the memory buffers may be operable to buffer packets that are pending delivery via the PHY devices. Latency requirements may be determined by inspecting OSI layer 2 or higher OSI layer information. Markings within packets may be inspected for latency requirements. An order of communicating buffered packets may be determined based on latency requirements. Corresponding packet headers may be ordered based on the latency requirements. Packet delivery may be scheduled based on the latency requirements. A specified time and/or a specified quantity of buffered data, which may be statically or dynamically programmable and/or configurable, may trigger determination of latency requirements. Packets may be delivered after an indication that prior packets have been delivered. Latency requirements may depend on a device that may generate and/or render the packets. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019669 | Method And System For Dynamic Routing And/Or Switching In A Network - Communication devices may determine routes for packets based on packet marking, routing parameters and/or costs associated with routes. A route may be selected and the packets may be communicated via the selected route. The parameters may comprise service class, real time compression, packet preemption, quality measurements, tier bypass and/or power usage information. The costs may comprise capacity, efficiency and/or performance information for power usage, bandwidth, memory and/or processing. The marking may comprise traffic type, user device capabilities, service class, quality measurements, latency requirements and/or power usage information. Endpoint devices, software applications and/or service providers may insert the marking into packets. Routes may be determined and/or selected based on shortest path bridging, audio video bridging, the marking, the routing parameters and/or the costs. Parameters and/or costs may be received and/or discovered from communication devices. Packets and/or the marking may be parsed and/or inspected. Costs may be based on routing parameters. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019685 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PACKET PREEMPTION FOR LOW LATENCY - Latency requirements for Ethernet link partners comprising PHY devices and memory buffers, may be determined for packets pending transmission. Transmission may be interrupted for a first packet having greater latency than a second packet, and the second packet may be transmitted. The second packet may be interrupted for transmission of a third or more packets. Packets are inspected for marks and/or for OSI layer | 01-27-2011 |
20110021244 | TETHERED ANTENNA HAVING SERVICED DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE - An antenna system includes a wired communications interface, an antenna, and antenna system control circuitry. The wired communications interface is operable to couple to a serviced host device and includes a control interface and an antenna interface. The antenna couples to the antenna interface and has configurable antenna characteristics. The antenna system control circuitry couples to the control interface and to the antenna and is operable to communicate the configurable antenna characteristics to the host device and to configure the antenna based upon communication with the host device. In other constructs the antenna may not be configurable and the antenna characteristics communicated are fixed. The antenna system may further include Radio Frequency (RF) transmit circuitry and/or RF transmit circuitry. Such RF transmit circuitry and RF receive circuitry may be configurable or fixed in its operations. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022254 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATION ASSISTED POWER MANAGEMENT - A communication device may be operable to configure a power management profile for the communication device and/or for one or more devices communicatively coupled to the communication device based on determined location corresponding to the communication device. The power management profile may comprise one or more operational parameters for a plurality of power sources, and may be utilized to control power usage in the communication device and/or the one or more devices. The communication device may be integrated into or be coupled with a hybrid vehicle. The location determination may be performed based on GNSS functions. The power management profile may enable creating and/or modifying operation control data for chargeable power storage devices based on location related data. The operation control data for the chargeable power storage devices may pertain to consumption of power from and/or recharging of the chargeable power storage devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022492 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING SERVICES AND/OR CONTENT IN A NETWORK COMPRISING MULTIPLE SERVICE AND/OR CONTENT PROVIDERS - One or more processors and/or one or more circuits in a user device may be operable to communicate a request for desired content to content and service providers. Bids may be received, responsive to the request, for providing the desired content to the user device and/or other devices. The request may initiate a parallel bidding process between the content and service providers. Bids to provide and/or deliver the desired content may be received from content and/or service providers by the user device. A profile of the end user device may be configured for automatically generating the capability and/or requirements in the request, and may be stored in the end user device. The end user device may include a handheld wireless device. Delivery of the content may be at a desired price and/or at a desired time. The request for content may be submitted via a website. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022526 | Method and System for Content Selection, Delivery and Payment - Aspects of a method and system for content selection, delivery and payment may comprise a management entity that coordinates operation of one or more endpoint devices. The one or more endpoint devices may be operable to select one or more parameters associated with a particular content type from the management entity. The particular content type may specify a type of media content that is handled by the one or more endpoint devices. The one or more endpoint devices may be operable to receive configuration information from the management entity based on the selected one or more parameters associated with the particular content type. The one or more endpoint devices may be configured utilizing the received configuration information. The one or more endpoint devices may be operable to pay for the received configuration information. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022679 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING NATIVE ETHERNET AS A VIRTUAL MEMORY INTERCONNECT - In various embodiments of a method and system for utilizing native Ethernet as a virtual memory interconnect, a first networking device may be operable to transcode a memory read command and/or a memory write command to memory access information and encapsulate the memory access information within in one or more fields of an Ethernet frame. The memory access information may be communicated over an Ethernet link to a second networking device where it may be utilized to access memory that is associated with the memory read command and/or the memory write command. For example, the memory access information may indicate an address of the memory to be accessed, whether a read operation and/or a write operation is to be performed, whether the frame comprises data to be written to the memory, and/or whether a locally administered address space is utilized. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022692 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING AND CONTROLLING USER EXPERIENCE IN A NETWORK - Aspects of a method and system for determining and controlling user experience in a network may comprise a management entity that coordinates operation of one or more endpoint devices. One or more parameters associated with a content type may be received from the one or more endpoint devices by the management entity. The management entity may utilize the received one or more parameters associated with the content type to determine configuration information for the one or more endpoint devices. The content type may specify a type of media content that is handled by the one or more endpoint devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022713 | Method and System for Leasing of Network Services and Applications Based on a Usage Pattern - Aspects of a method and system for predictive leasing of network services and applications based on a usage pattern may comprise a management entity that coordinates operation of one or more endpoint devices. A user profile associated with the one or more endpoint devices may be received by the management entity, wherein the management entity may utilize the user profile associated with the one or more endpoint devices and a usage pattern associated with the one or more endpoint devices to determine leasing information for the one or more endpoint devices. The management entity may be operable to communicate the determined leasing information to the one or more endpoint devices. The leasing information may comprise leasing services and/or applications to the one or more endpoint devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022721 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PACKETIZING DATA FOR SERVICING TRAFFIC END-TO-END - Aspects of a method and system for packetizing data for servicing traffic end-to-end are provided. In this regard, a networking subsystem may receive, from an application, one or more values of one or more parameters associated with data generated by the application. The networking subsystem may packetize the data into one or more packets. The networking subsystem may translate the received one or more values into one or more corresponding OSI layer 2 tags. The networking subsystem may tag the one or more packets with the corresponding OSI layer 2 tags and transmit the tagged packet(s) to one or more link partners. The link partners may thus process and forward the tagged packet(s) by inspecting only OSI layer 2 information of the tagged packet(s). The one or more corresponding OSI layer 2 tags may indicate, for example, quality of service required by, and/or protocols associated with, the data. | 01-27-2011 |
20110022733 | CUSTOMIZED DATA DELIVERY AND NETWORK CONFIGURATION VIA AGGREGATION OF DEVICE ATTRIBUTES - Aspects of a method and system for customized data delivery and network configuration via aggregation of device attributes are provided. In this regard, a first network device may receive device attributes from a plurality of devices that are communicatively coupled to the first network device. The first network device may aggregate the received device attributes and communicate the aggregate attributes to a source network device. The first network device may receive customized content from the source network device, wherein the customization is based on the aggregate device attributes. The first network device may communicate the customized content to the plurality of devices. The first network device may comprise, for example, a set-top box, a wired access point, and/or wireless access point. The device attributes of a device may comprise settings, capabilities, and/or user preferences of the device. | 01-27-2011 |
20110023029 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ABSTRACTING VIRTUAL MACHINES IN A NETWORK - One or more processors and/or one or more circuits may be operable to configure one or more virtual machines and a hypervisor for controlling the one or more virtual machines. The virtual machines and the hypervisor may be distributed across a plurality of network devices. A sub-hypervisor may be configured within each of the virtual machines utilizing the hypervisor. Load information of the network devices may be communicated to the hypervisor utilizing the sub-hypervisors. The virtual machines may include threads, may be load balanced utilizing the hypervisor, dynamically configured utilizing the hypervisor based on changes in the network devices, and scaled by the distribution of the virtual machines across the network devices. Information from the processing of data may be received in the virtual machines. The network devices may include a plurality of: servers, switches, routers, racks, blades, mainframes, personal data assistants, smart phones, desktop computers, and/or laptop devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110023114 | Method and System For Traffic Management Via Virtual Machine Migration - Aspects of a method and system for traffic management via virtual machine migration include detecting an abnormal traffic pattern in traffic communicated by a first virtual machine that utilizes a first set of network resources. Responsive to the detection of the abnormal pattern, a second virtual machine that utilizes a second set of network resources may be initialized. The second virtual machine may take over functions performed by the first virtual machine and initialization of the second virtual machine is based on an analysis of the traffic. The second virtual machine may be initialized utilizing stored virtual machine sate information in instances that the abnormal traffic is a result of a malicious attack. The second virtual machine may be initialized utilizing current virtual machine state information in instances that the abnormal traffic is not a result of a malicious attack. | 01-27-2011 |
20110023125 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATING REMOTE DEVICES INTO A DOMESTIC VLAN - A gateway network device may establish secure connections to a plurality of remote network devices using tunneling protocols to distribute to the remote network devices multimedia content received from one or more content providers. The consumption of the multimedia content may originally be restricted to local network associated with the gateway network device. The secure connections may be set up using L2TP protocol, and the L2TP tunneling connections may be secured using IPSec protocol. Use of multimedia content may be restricted based on DRM policies of the content provider. DRM policies may be implemented using DTCP protocol, which may restrict use of the multimedia content based on roundtrip times and/or IP subnetting. Each content provider may use one or more VLAN identifiers during communication of the multimedia content to the gateway network device, and the gateway network device may associate an additional VLAN identifier with each secure connection. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026436 | REMOTE CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL OF LOCAL DEVICES VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for the remote configuration and control of a access devices via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. The broadband access gateway may comprise a wireless interface and a broadband network connection for exchanging information via, for example, a digital subscriber loop, a cable connection, a T1 connection, and T3 network connection. A user using any of a plurality of access devices may communicate with the broadband access gateway via the wireless interface or the broadband network connection to make remote requests of another of the access devices. Such requests may comprise, for example, accessing, recording, playing, exchanging, transmitting, receiving, converting, translating of multimedia information. The remote requests may include enabling, disabling, configuring, monitoring, administering, and scheduling of smart appliances and premise systems such as, for example, security, heating, and cooling systems. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026487 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A MESH NETWORK USING A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS (WAPs) - A first access point located in a first cell may be coupled to a second access point located in a second cell. Service may be initially provided to an access device by the first access point cell. The access device may subsequently be serviced by a second access point whenever a signal for the access device falls below a specified threshold level. The second cell may be a neighboring cell, which may be located adjacent to the first cell. A first signal may be transmitted from a first beamforming antenna coupled to the first access point, to the second access point via an uplink channel. Similarly, a second signal may be transmitted from a second beamforming antenna coupled to the second access point, to the first access point via a downlink channel. The uplink and downlink channels may be a backhaul channel. | 02-03-2011 |
20110035786 | Preventing A Non-Head End Based Service Provider from Sending Media to a Media Processing System - Systems and methods that prevent unauthorized access in a communications network are provided. In one embodiment, a system that prevents unauthorized access to a network device may include, for example, a network device and a headend. The headend may be coupled to a communications network. The network device may be deployed in a home environment and may be communicatively coupled to the communications network via the headend. The headend may be adapted, for example, to determine whether a request to access the network device is authorized. | 02-10-2011 |
20110039607 | MULTIPLE NETWORK WAKE-UP - A system and method for managing messaging in a mobile communication system (e.g., having power-save capability) in a multiple network environment. For example, the mobile communication system may operate in a power-save mode (e.g., a mode in which the mobile communication system does not communicate messages). The mobile communication system may exit the power-save mode. After exiting from the power-save mode, the mobile communication system may determine to establish communication with a second system (e.g., a message server) over a second communication path instead of a first communication path. Communication with the second system may be established over the second communication path, and message-related information may be communicated between the mobile communication system and the second system. Such message-related information may, for example, comprise message information, information regarding message availability, or information regarding the communication of message information. | 02-17-2011 |
20110040893 | Distributed Internet caching via multiple node caching management - Distributed Internet caching via multiple node caching management. Caching decisions and management are performed based on information corresponding to more than one caching node device (sometimes referred to as a distributed caching node device, distributed Internet caching node device, and/or DCN) within a communication system. The communication system may be composed of one type or multiple types of communication networks that are communicatively coupled to communicate there between, and they may be composed of any one or combination types of communication links therein [wired, wireless, optical, satellite, etc.]). In some instances, more than one of these DCNs operate cooperatively to make caching decisions and direct management of content to be stored among the more than one DCNs. In an alternative embodiment, a managing DCN is operative to make caching decisions and direct management of content within more than one DCNs of a communication system. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044164 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING OUT-OF-ORDER SEGMENTS IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM VIA DIRECT DATA PLACEMENT - A method for processing information in a wireless system including a host device, the host device including a wireless network processor, the method including receiving by the wireless network processor, at least one out-of-order frame. The wireless network processor may place data of the received at least one out-of-order frame in a memory, and may manage information relating to one or more holes resulting from the at least one out-of-order frame in a TCP receive window. The wireless network processor may set a programmable limit with respect to a number of holes allowed in the TCP receive window. The memory may include a local memory outside of the host device and/or a host memory within the host device. | 02-24-2011 |
20110046881 | PERSONAL MAPPING SYSTEM - A system and method for providing a personal mapping system, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 02-24-2011 |
20110053569 | PROVIDING FEMTOCELL ACCESS VIA PERSONAL COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A personal communication device may operate as a femtocell providing femtocell accessibility and services to a plurality of communication devices that are communicatively coupled to the personal communication device via one or more cellular connections. The personal communication device may connect to one or more broadband networks, via a plurality of wired and/or wireless interfaces, to enable the communication of packets when providing the femtocell accessibility and/or services. The personal communication device may support direct communications via the personal communication device when providing femtocell services. Signal strength may be boosted in the personal communication device when providing femtocell servicing via a signal booster that may be integrated within the personal communication device or may be externally attached to it during femtocell operations. The personal communication device may receive compensation for providing femtocell services to one or more of the plurality of communication devices. | 03-03-2011 |
20110053640 | AUXILIARY CELLULAR PHONE MODULE - An auxiliary cellular phone module assists in making a local call while a coupled master cellular phone is roaming, wherein the auxiliary cellular phone module consists of processing unit, communication interface, cellular telephony interface, user interfaces and memory. A full-fledged auxiliary cellular phone module consists of a plurality of features that includes user interfaces consisting display, full-fledged keypad, wired and/or wireless interfaces, earpiece and microphones. A simpler version may have simplified or none at all of any of the user interfaces mentioned above. A full-fledged auxiliary cellular phone module may have many additional functionalities that helps a roaming service provider to cut costs of the local calls placed while roaming, that includes audio/visual advertisements, directions as well as many other audio/visual informational data displays. Moreover, many other features that are helpful to the roaming client may also be provided within the auxiliary cellular phone module that includes local phone book facilities, prepaid credit information and other informal data displays. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055886 | MULTI-WIRELESS DEVICE CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS - A method and apparatus support delivering a video media stream to a wireless device by exchanging communication signals through a secure communications interface to establish first and second communication channels. The channels may be according to different communication protocols. A first portion of the streamed video media stream over the first communication channel is encrypted while a second portion of the video media stream over the second communication channel is not encrypted. The second portion is based on the first. In addition to encryption of only the first portion, one embodiment includes using different communication protocols for the first and second channels to further enhance secure media delivery. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055901 | WIRELESS DEVICE FOR GROUP ACCESS AND MANAGEMENT - A system and method for establishing a group of wireless devices having shared media stored thereupon associates each group member device of the group of wireless devices, communicates with at least some of the group member devices of the group of wireless devices to identify shared media and upon receiving a request transmitted by a group member device of the group of wireless devices, supports access to shared media. The shared media may be stored on a different group member device, upon a managing server computer, or a media server. Upon a successful validation, the group member device that made the request is notified to facilitate the access to the shared media. The notification includes access information. | 03-03-2011 |
20110055935 | SYSTEM FOR GROUP ACCESS TO SHARED MEDIA, RESOURCES, AND SERVICES - A system and method for establishing a group of wireless devices for sharing software and hardware resources as well as media stored thereupon associates each group member device of the group of wireless devices, communicates with at least some of the group member devices of the group of wireless devices to identify shared media and upon receiving a request transmitted by a group member device of the group of wireless devices, supports access to shared media. The shared media may be stored on a different group member device, upon a managing portal device, or a media server. Upon a successful validation, the group member device that made the request is notified to facilitate the access to the shared media. The notification includes access information. | 03-03-2011 |
20110063105 | EMERGENCY MESSAGE RELAY - A wireless device receives a first emergency message in a first communication protocol via a first wireless interface of the plurality of wireless interfaces from a transmitting wireless device, translates the first emergency message in the first communication protocol to a second emergency message in a second communication protocol, and transmits the second emergency message via a second wireless interface of the plurality of wireless interfaces to a network infrastructure. A wireless device requesting emergency service prepares one or more emergency messages based upon an emergency message direction received from a user, repeatedly transmits the at least one emergency message via one or more available wireless interfaces. Upon meeting a termination criteria, the wireless device ceases repeatedly transmitting the at least one emergency message via the at least one wireless interface. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063206 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING SCREEN POINTING INFORMATION IN A TELEVISION CONTROL DEVICE - A system and method, in a television control device, for generating screen pointing information, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063509 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION RECEIVER FOR PROVIDING USER-SELECTION OF OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television receiver (e.g., a television receiver external to a television) for providing user-selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063511 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION CONTROLLER FOR PROVIDING USER-SELECTION OF OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television controller for providing user-selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063521 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING SCREEN POINTING INFORMATION IN A TELEVISION - A system and method, in a television, for generating screen pointing information, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063522 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING TELEVISION SCREEN POINTING INFORMATION USING AN EXTERNAL RECEIVER - A system and method, in a television receiver, for generating screen pointing information, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110063523 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION CONTROLLER FOR PROVIDING USER-SELECTION OF OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television controller for providing user-selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064129 | VIDEO CAPTURE AND GENERATION AT VARIABLE FRAME RATES - A variable frame rate capture system and video encoder captures sequences of video frames at multiple frame rates depending upon the differences between the prior neighboring frames, and a video encoder encodes and time stamps the video frames to produce variable frame rate video stream. Another device receives sequences of video frames and a variable frame rate video encoder groups them, selectively discards some video frames of sequential groups depending upon the differences between the prior neighboring frames, and encodes and time stamps the video frames to produce variable frame rate video stream. Another device includes a variable rate video encoder that encodes and time stamps the video frames to produce variable frame rate video stream. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065423 | SPONSORED CELLULAR PHONE - A cellular telephone or other wireless communications device supports association with a third party sponsor other than a network operator. The device establishes default user interface settings for the user interface consistent with association with the network operator. The device then determines a desired association with one or more third party sponsors. Based upon the desired association, the device retrieve third party sponsor settings. The device then alters its user interface settings based upon the third party sponsor settings, wherein the altered user interface settings differ from the default user interface settings. The device then communicates with a third party sponsor server computer via the communications interface to exchange information relating to operation of the cellular telephone. Multiple third party sponsors could share access to the user interface. The third party sponsor may be a business, a group of individuals, or another entity. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065425 | DIGITAL PERSONAL ASSISTANCE VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting access, coordination, modification, updating, and management of multiple sources of multimedia information resident on a plurality of access device is disclosed. A broadband access gateway may support applications that perform user services involving multiple sources of multimedia information across a network by acting as a focal point for access to multimedia information related to the applications. Using information that identifies such sources, the broadband access gateway may coordinate modification of one or more multimedia information sources based upon the content of other related sources of multimedia information. One such application may include the coordination of calendars for the planning of a meeting involving multiple participants. A representative embodiment of the present invention may identify available meeting dates and times, and the placement of reservations for appropriate travel accommodations using services accessible to the broadband access gateway via a broadband network. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066746 | SYNCHRONIZED DATA STREAMING - A system and method in a media server for synchronizing media delivery sessions to a plurality of media players that are receiving the same media content. The method includes determining, for a group of the plurality of media players, to deliver streamed media in a synchronized manner through a multicast transmission based on at least one media player and network information. Once media transmission scheduling has occurred, the method includes modifying scheduling for outgoing content to change at least some content from unicast to multicast transmissions, or vice-versa based upon subsequently received media playback performance data and network performance data. Unicast and multicast content can be transmitted to a media player at the same time in one embodiment. Generally, scheduling is performed to avoid having a media player wait for content. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066748 | MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK SUPPORTING VARYING MEDIA GUIDE BASED ON VIEWING FILTERS - Systems having a user interface comprising a filtered view of media available for consumption are disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may provide a first user with a view that enables consumption of only the available media that matches characteristics of a media filter. The characteristics of the media filter may be specified by a second user, and the second user may define the characteristics of the media filter remotely, via a communication network. The user interface may support separate media filters for each of a number of different users. Filter characteristics such as type of media channel, the language of any dialogue, an industry rating, an overall viewer rating, and the media format may be supported. The media filter characteristics may be applied not only to what is displayed on the user interface, but also the media available for selection via a remote control. | 03-17-2011 |
20110066929 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF SELECTABLE OBJECTS IN A STILL IMAGE FILE AND/OR DATA STREAM - A system and method for providing information of selectable objects in a still image and/or data stream, as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067047 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING USER-SELECTION OF OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a distributed system (e.g., a distributed television system) for providing user-selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067051 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING ADVERTISING INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A USER-SELECTED OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for providing commerce (or advertising) information associated with a user-selected object in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067052 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF SELECTABLE OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM IN AN INFORMATION STREAM INDEPENDENT OF THE TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method for providing information of selectable objects in a television program in an information stream independent of the television program as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067054 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM FOR RESPONDING TO USER-SELECTION OF AN OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a distributed television system for responding to user-selection of an object in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067055 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A USER-SELECTED PERSON IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for providing information associated with a user-selected person in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067056 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A LOCAL TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR RESPONDING TO USER-SELECTION OF AN OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a local television system for responding to user-selection of an object in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067057 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR RESPONDING TO USER-SELECTION OF AN OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM UTILIZING AN ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method in a television system for responding to user-selection of an object in a television program utilizing an alternative communication network, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067060 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION FOR PROVIDING USER-SELECTION OF OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television for providing user-selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067061 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING FOR USER-SELECTION OF AN OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for providing for user-selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067062 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION OF SELECTABLE OBJECTS IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method for providing information of selectable objects in a television program as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067063 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PRESENTING INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A USER-SELECTED OBJECT IN A TELEVISON PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for presenting information associated with a user-selected object in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067064 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PRESENTING INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A USER-SELECTED OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for presenting information associated with a user-selected object in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067065 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A USER-SELECTED INFORMATION ELELMENT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for providing information associated with a user-selected information element in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067069 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A PARALLEL TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING FOR USER-SELECTION OF AN OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a parallel television system for providing for user selection of objects in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110067071 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A TELEVISION SYSTEM FOR RESPONDING TO USER-SELECTION OF AN OBJECT IN A TELEVISION PROGRAM BASED ON USER LOCATION - A system and method in a television system for responding to user-selection of an object in a television program based on geographical location, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 03-17-2011 |
20110070921 | MULTIMODE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH CONFIGURATION UPDATE CAPABILITY - A system and method in a multimode mobile communication device for providing communication configuration update capability. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise establishing a first communication link characterized by a first communication mode of a plurality of communication modes in which the multimode communication device is capable of communicating. Such a first communication link may, for example, be established utilizing a first communication interface module. Communication configuration (or profile) information for a second communication mode may be received over the first communication link. The communication configuration information for the second communication mode may then be utilized to configure the mobile communication device to perform communications in the second communication mode (e.g., utilizing a second communication interface module). | 03-24-2011 |
20110072155 | SECURE ANONYMITY IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for communicating of information in a communication network is disclosed and includes receiving media containing a security code from a first communication device at a third communication device. The security code is acquired by the first communication device from a second communication device. The received media may be routed to the second communication device based on an IP address of the second communication device. The IP address of the second communication device may correspond to the security code. The security code may be translated to the IP address of the second communication device. The security code may be a pin code. A duration for which the security code is valid may be limited to at least one of time and a number of uses. | 03-24-2011 |
20110082918 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING AND/OR CONFIGURING A MOBILE PLATFORM TO PROVIDE A SUITE OF SERVICES - A system and method for determining a service provider set of one or more service providers to provide a service suite of one or more services in a platform (e.g., a mobile device platform) and configuring such platform to utilize such service provider set to provide such service suite to a user, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 04-07-2011 |
20110097999 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTISESSION COMMUNICATION USING MULTIPLE PHYSICAL (PHY) LAYERS - A wireless device comprising a single communication stack accessing a corresponding radio interface accessed via a corresponding physical layer, may utilize a plurality of communication sessions to perform a plurality of applications simultaneously. The corresponding radio interface may be utilized to perform initial connectivity and/or control functionality associate with each of the communication sessions; whereas data communication during the communication sessions may be performed utilizing one or more other radio interfaces supporting high speed data standards, which may also be accessed by the single communication stack, using corresponding other PHY and/or MAC layers. The connectivity and/or control functionality may comprise discovery, pairing, and/or initial connection. The plurality of high speed data standard may comprise WLAN, ultra-wideband (UWB), and/or 60 GHz PHY and/or PHY/MAC layers. Two or more of the communication sessions may contemporaneously utilize different PHY and/or PHY/MAC layers pertaining to the same high speed data standard. | 04-28-2011 |
20110099072 | METHOD OF CREATING INCENTIVES FOR ESTABLISHING HOTSPOT LOCATIONS - A process of creating incentives for wireless hotspots by a service provider is disclosed. An access point is provided to a wireless hotspot for wireless devices to wirelessly connect to a larger network in a publicly accessible location. Use of the access point for a portable device is authenticated by requesting submission of an account identifier to the service provider and billing data for a user of the portable device for use of the access point is generated. Use statistics are evaluated of the access point of the wireless hotspot by portables devices and an inducement is provided to the publicly accessible location based on the evaluated use statistics. | 04-28-2011 |
20110106964 | Media player with integrated parallel source download technology - A media player implements an integrated parallel source download technology to receive a media file from streamed and segmented media file sources. A first source streams delivery of streamed media packets of the media file in sequential packet number order to the media player, while a second source provides segmented delivery of segmented media packets of the media file in random order to the media player. The media player combines the streamed media packets and the segmented media packets to produce the media file. | 05-05-2011 |
20110107414 | System and Method for Location Assisted Virtual Private Networks - A system and method for location assisted virtual private networks (VPNs). Users can create location uncertainty by logging into a VPN server that geographically remote from the present location. Geographic information provided by a VPN client along with or in combination with identification information can be used to resolve such location uncertainty. An accurate indication of the location of a VPN client can be used for operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning purposes. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110352 | Method and System For Redundancy-Based Decoding of Voice Content in a Wireless LAN System - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of voice content in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system are provided. A WLAN receiver may determine whether a decoded portion of a received packet comprises voice content and may select a redundancy-based decoder to decode a remaining portion of the packet when voice content is detected. The redundancy-based decoder may be a Viterbi decoder. The redundancy-based decoder may be selected to decode a determined number of subsequent packets or to decode subsequent packets for a determined amount of time. After decoding the remaining portion of the packet and any subsequent packets, the WLAN receiver may select a standard Viterbi decoder to decode additional received packets. The WLAN receiver may generate at least one signal to select the redundancy-based decoder and the standard Viterbi decoder. | 05-12-2011 |
20110113460 | Media Processing System Based on Satellite Set Top Box Platform with Telephony Downstream and Upstream Data Paths - Systems and methods that provide satellite-based media processing are described. In one embodiment, a system that exchanges media may include, for example, a communications device that may be coupled to a network and to an antenna. The communications device may provide two-way communications with the network and may provide one-way communications with the antenna. The communications may receive media content from the antenna and/or the network. The communications device may send the media content to the network | 05-12-2011 |
20110115604 | REMOTE CONTROL FOR MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM HAVING TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL FOR USER ID - Operating a remote control to identify a user by receiving touch pad input from at least one touch sensitive element of the remote control that has a plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input corresponds to the user's touch of at least some of the plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input is at least partially processed by processing circuitry of the remote control and transmitted to a multimedia system console via a communications interface of the remote control for processing of the at least partially processed touch pad input to identify the user via pattern recognition. At least partially processing the touch pad input can be by identifying at least one finger orientation, at least one finger spacing, at least one finger width, a plurality of finger knuckle/joint locations, and/or a plurality of finger lengths based upon the touch pad input. | 05-19-2011 |
20110115606 | TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL IN VEHICLE FOR USER IDENTIFICATION - A vehicle control system includes at least one touch pad having a plurality of touch sensitive elements and processing circuitry communicatively coupled to the at least one touch pad. The processing circuitry is operable to receive touch pad input from the at least one touch pad, the touch pad input corresponding to a user's touch of at least some of the plurality of touch sensitive elements. The processing circuitry further processes the touch pad input to determine user finger characteristics. The processing circuitry further processes the user finger characteristics to identify the user via pattern recognition and alters at least one vehicle setting based upon the identified user. Vehicle settings may be one or more of entertainment system settings, navigation system settings, suspension system settings, seat settings, mirror settings, steering wheel settings, climate control system settings, suspension system settings, engine control system settings, lighting system settings, and communication system settings. | 05-19-2011 |
20110115742 | TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL DETECTING HOVERING FINGER - A touch sensitive pad with a plurality of touch sensitive elements and processing circuitry coupled to a communications interface and to the touch sensitive pad for scanning the plurality of touch sensitive elements to measure a plurality of touch sensitive element values. The plurality of touch sensitive element values is compared to a hovering finger threshold pattern. Upon a favorable comparison, a hovering finger condition is determined, and a position of the hovering finger in three-dimensions is detected with respect to the touch sensitive pad. The plurality of touch sensitive element values is compared to a touching finger threshold pattern. Upon a favorable comparison, a touching finger condition is determined, and a position of the touching finger is detected upon the touch sensitive pad. | 05-19-2011 |
20110118026 | HAND-HELD GAMING DEVICE THAT IDENTIFIES USER BASED UPON INPUT FROM TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL - Operating a game controller to identify a user by receiving touch pad input from at least one touch sensitive pad of the game controller that has a plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input corresponds to the user's touch of at least some of the plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input is at least partially processed by processing circuitry of the game controller and transmitted to a game console via a communications interface of the game controller for processing of the at least partially processed touch pad input to identify the user via pattern recognition. At least partially processing the touch pad input can be by identifying at least one finger orientation, at least one finger spacing, at least one finger width, a plurality of finger knuckle/joint locations, and/or a plurality of finger lengths based upon the touch pad input. | 05-19-2011 |
20110118027 | ALTERING VIDEO GAME OPERATIONS BASED UPON USER ID AND-OR GRIP POSITION - Operating a gaming system having a game console and a game controller by receiving touch pad input from at least one touch sensitive pad of the game controller that has a plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input corresponds to a user's touch of at least some of the plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input is at least partially processed by processing circuitry of the game controller to produce partially processed touch pad input and transmitted from the game controller to the game console via communications interfaces of the game controller and the game console. The game console processes the at least partially processed touch pad input to produce game alteration data. The at least one corresponding game operation is altered based upon the game alteration data. | 05-19-2011 |
20110118028 | HAND-HELD GAMING DEVICE WITH CONFIGURABLE TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL(S) - A game controller with a communications interface, at least one touch sensitive pad having a plurality of touch sensitive elements, and processing circuitry coupled to the communications interface and the at least one touch sensitive pad. The processing circuitry enacts touch pad configuration settings that correlate subsets of the plurality of touch sensitive elements to respective distinct user input locations. The processing circuitry receives touch pad input from the at least one touch sensitive pad. The touch pad input corresponds to a user's touch of at least some of the plurality of touch sensitive elements. The processing circuitry processes the touch pad input to determine user input directions based upon the touch pad configuration settings, and then transmits the touch pad input directions to a game console via the communications interface for use as gaming input. | 05-19-2011 |
20110118029 | HAND-HELD GAMING DEVICE WITH TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL(S) FOR GAMING INPUT - Operating a game controller by receiving touch pad input from at least one touch sensitive pad of the game controller that has a plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input corresponds to the user's touch of at least some of the plurality of touch sensitive elements. The touch pad input is at least partially processed by processing circuitry of the game controller and the at least partially processed touch pad input is transmitted to a game console via a communications interface of the game controller for use as gaming input. At least partially processing the touch pad input can be by determining hand/foot position, changes in hand/foot position, hand grip/foot pressure, changes in hand grip/foot pressure based upon the touch pad input. | 05-19-2011 |
20110118030 | DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS VIA INTRA-BODY COMMUNICATION PATH - A communication device that may comprise one of a cell phone or a game controller system that further includes a game console and a pair of game controllers that communicate via a human body path. Generally, the communication device communicates by way of a touch pad array through a human body path using capacitive coupling in one embodiment of the invention. Encryption parameters and user contact information may be exchanged through the human body path. For example, a pre-shared key may be transmitted through the human body path to support subsequent encrypted wireless communications. The touch pad array may be a part of a display of the communication device but is not required to be so. | 05-19-2011 |
20110127843 | WIRELESS POWER SYSTEM WITH SELECTABLE CONTROL CHANNEL PROTOCOLS - A wireless power system includes a wireless power transmit and receive units. The wireless power transmit unit includes a wireless power transmit circuit that generates a wireless power magnetic field and a transmit unit transceiver that transceives a communication regarding the wireless power magnetic field in accordance with a control channel protocol. The wireless power receive unit includes a wireless power receive circuit, a transceiver, and a processing module. The wireless power receive circuit converts the wireless power magnetic field into a voltage. The receive unit processing module is operable to: identify the control channel protocol; determine whether the receive unit transceiver is capable of communication using the control channel protocol; and, when the receive unit transceiver is capable of communication using the control channel protocol, coordinate configuration of the receive unit transceiver to transceive the communication regarding the wireless power magnetic field via the control channel. | 06-02-2011 |
20110127844 | Low pin count wireless power IC - A low pin count IC includes a wireless power receive coil, a rectifying circuit, an output circuit, circuit modules, a power management unit (PMU), a die, and a package substrate. The wireless power receive coil generates an AC voltage from a wireless power electromagnetic signal and the rectifying circuit generates a rectified voltage from the AC voltage. The output circuit generates a DC voltage from the rectified voltage. The PMU manages distribution of the DC voltage to the circuit modules. The die supports the circuit modules and the PMU, wherein the die includes return pads for coupling to circuit return nodes and a PMU return node. The package substrate supports the die and includes return pins for coupling to the return pads, wherein at least one of the die and the package substrate support the wireless power receive coil, the rectifying circuit, and the output circuit. | 06-02-2011 |
20110127845 | Wireless power circuit board and assembly - A circuit board assembly includes a multiple layer substrate, a wireless power transmitter control module, a wireless power coil assembly, and a plurality of ICs. The wireless power transmitter control module is supported by a layer of the multiple layer substrate and the wireless power coil assembly is fabricated on an inner layer of the multiple layer substrate. The ICs are mounted on an outer layer of the multiple layer substrate, wherein an IC of the plurality of IC is aligned to substantially overlap a coil of the wireless power coil assembly and is wirelessly powered by the wireless power transmitter control module via the coil. | 06-02-2011 |
20110127951 | DEVICE WITH INTEGRATED WIRELESS POWER RECEIVER - A device includes an integrated power receive circuit, a battery charger, a battery, a processing module, one or more input/output modules, and one or more circuit modules. The integrated power receive circuit is operable to generate a DC voltage from a received magnetic field in accordance with a control signal. The battery charger is operable to convert the DC voltage into a battery charge voltage. The battery is coupled to the battery charger in a first mode and is coupled to supply power in a second mode. The processing module is operable to: generate the control signal based on desired electromagnetic properties of at least one of the received magnetic field and the integrated power receive circuit; process outbound data to produce processed outbound data; and process inbound data to produce processed inbound data. | 06-02-2011 |
20110127952 | IC CONTROLLED WIRELESS POWER OPERATION AND APPLICATIONS THEREOF - An integrated circuit (IC) for use in a device includes a wireless power receiver circuit, a transceiver, and a processing module. The wireless power receiver circuit is operable to convert an electromagnetic signal into a voltage. The transceiver, when operable, transceives a control channel communication. The processing module is operable to: transition the device from an idle state to a charge state when a wireless power transmitter unit is detected; transition the device from the idle state to a wireless power operated state when a wireless power transmit circuit is detected and the device is enabled; and transition the device from the idle state to a battery operated state when the device is enabled and the wireless power transmit circuit is not detected. | 06-02-2011 |
20110127953 | WIRELESS POWER SYSTEM - A wireless power system includes a primary device and a secondary device. The primary device includes a power conversion unit, a function module, and a transceiver. The peripheral device includes a wireless power receiver circuit, a peripheral transceiver, and a peripheral unit. The power conversion unit converts a power source into an electromagnetic signal. The functional module executes a function regarding peripheral information. The transceiver communicates information regarding the electromagnetic signal and the peripheral information. The wireless power receiver circuit converts the electromagnetic signal into a voltage. The peripheral transceiver communicates the information regarding the electromagnetic signal and the peripheral information. The peripheral unit processes the peripheral information. | 06-02-2011 |
20110127954 | Battery with integrated wireless power receiver and/or RFID - A battery includes one or more rechargeable cells, a wireless power coil, a battery charger circuit, and may further include an RFID module. The wireless power coil is operable to generate an AC voltage from a wireless power electromagnetic field. The battery charger circuit is operable to generate a battery charge voltage from the AC voltage in accordance with a battery charge control signal and, when enabled, to charge the one or more rechargeable cells via the battery charge voltage. If the battery further includes the RFID module, it is operable to generate the battery charge control signal and communicate with a wireless power transmitter device. | 06-02-2011 |
20110130093 | Wireless power and wireless communication integrated circuit - An integrated circuit (IC) includes a wireless power receive circuit, a wireless communication module, and a circuit module. The wireless power receive circuit generates a supply voltage from a wireless power electromagnetic signal. The wireless communication module converts inter-chip outbound data into an inter-chip outbound wireless signal; transmits the inter-chip outbound wireless signal to another IC; receives an inter-chip inbound wireless signal from the other IC; and converts the inter-chip inbound wireless signal into inter-chip inbound data. The circuit module is powered by the supply voltage and is operable to generate the inter-chip outbound data; and process the inter-chip inbound data. | 06-02-2011 |
20110135025 | MULTI-TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM WITH MIMO AND BEAM-FORMING CAPABILITY - A system and method for communicating with a second communication system utilizing a plurality of antennas. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise determining whether communicating with the second communication system utilizing a plurality of antennas in a first configuration, which comprises a beam-forming configuration, is preferable to utilizing a plurality of antennas in a second configuration, which comprises a MIMO or MISO configuration. If it is determined that the first configuration is preferable to the second configuration, the communication system may be configured to communicate with the second communication system by utilizing at least a portion of the plurality of antennas in the first configuration. If it is determined that the second configuration is preferable to the first configuration, then the communication system may be configured to communicate with the second communication system by utilizing at least a portion of the plurality of antennas in the second configuration. | 06-09-2011 |
20110137144 | ARTICLE OF CLOTHING INCLUDING BIO-MEDICAL UNITS - An article of clothing includes a clothing fabric and a plurality of bio-medical units integrated into the clothing fabric. A bio-medical includes a power harvesting module, a communication module, a processing module, a functional module, a die, and an IC package. The die supports the power harvesting module, the processing module, the communication module, and the functional module. The IC package houses the die and includes a mechanism for adhering to the clothing fabric. | 06-09-2011 |
20110143717 | SECURE USER INTERFACE IN A SHARED RESOURCE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method for providing a secure user interface in a shared resource environment. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise establishing a first wireless communication link between a first system and a user interface system. A first wireless communication port may, for example, establish such a wireless communication link. A first secure communication pathway may be established between the first system and the user interface system. A first secure communication module may, for example, establish such a secure communication pathway. A second wireless communication link may be established between a second system and the user interface system. A second wireless communication port may, for example, establish such a wireless communication link. A second communication pathway between the second system and the user interface system may be established. A second communication module may, for example, establish such a communication pathway. | 06-16-2011 |
20110144573 | BIO-MEDICAL UNIT SYSTEM FOR MEDICATION CONTROL - A system includes bio-medical units, a wireless communication module, and a wireless power source. A bio-medical unit includes a power harvesting module, a communication module, a processing module, and a medication control module for performing a medication control function and generating a medication response. The wireless communication module is operable to wirelessly communicate inbound and outbound wireless signals with the bio-medical unit. The wireless power source is operable to generate the electromagnetic signal, which the power harvesting module converts into a supply voltage that powers the other modules of the bio-medical unit. | 06-16-2011 |
20110157167 | COORDINATED DRIVING OF ADAPTABLE LIGHT MANIPULATOR, BACKLIGHTING AND PIXEL ARRAY IN SUPPORT OF ADAPTABLE 2D AND 3D DISPLAYS - Methods, systems, and apparatuses are described for driving an adaptable light manipulator and a pixel array in a coordinated fashion so as to achieve a selected one of a plurality of possible viewing configurations of an adaptable two-dimensional/three-dimensional image display. Methods, systems, and apparatuses are also described for driving an adaptable light manipulator, a pixel array and a non-uniform light generator in a coordinated fashion so as to achieve a selected one of plurality of possible viewing configurations of an adaptable two-dimensional/three-dimensional image display. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157168 | THREE-DIMENSIONAL DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH ADAPTATION BASED ON VIEWING REFERENCE OF VIEWER(S) - A display system that presents three-dimensional content to a viewer is described herein. The display system includes a screen assembly having one or more adaptable display characteristics relating to the presentation of three-dimensional content, first circuitry that at least assists in producing reference information corresponding to at least one aspect of a viewing reference of the viewer, and second circuitry that causes modification of at least one of the one or more adaptable display characteristics, the modification corresponding at least in part to the reference information. The viewing reference of the viewer may comprise one or more of a location of the viewer relative to the screen assembly, a head orientation (tilt and/or rotation) of the viewer, and a point of gaze of the viewer. The first circuitry may comprise, for example, viewer-located circuitry and/or other circuitry that is communicatively connected to the second circuitry for providing the referencing information thereto. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157169 | OPERATING SYSTEM SUPPORTING MIXED 2D, STEREOSCOPIC 3D AND MULTI-VIEW 3D DISPLAYS - Operating systems are described that interface applications and display screens capable of displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional content. In one aspect, an operating system includes an application programming interface (API), a display driver interface, and a display driver. The API enables one or more applications to deliver requests that define a screen region and either a two-dimension indicator or a three-dimension indicator. The display driver interface passes configuration commands corresponding to the requests. The display driver is associated with a display screen. The display driver receives the configuration commands and responds by generating screen control signals to adjust the display screen to support the screen region. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157170 | PROGRAMMING ARCHITECTURE SUPPORTING MIXED TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL DISPLAYS - Applications are provided that contain code of a programming language enabling simultaneous display on a screen of both two-dimensional and three-dimensional content. Furthermore, development systems and program libraries supporting the same are provided. A first command is generated by first program code of an application. The first command directs a first configuration of a first region of the screen to support the three-dimensional content. A second command is generated by second program code of the application. The second command directs a second configuration of a second region of the screen to support the two-dimensional content. The display of the three-dimensional content is caused within the first region of the screen, and the display of the two-dimensional content is caused within the second region of the screen. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157172 | USER CONTROLLED REGIONAL DISPLAY OF MIXED TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL CONTENT - Techniques are described herein for supporting user controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content. A display system includes a pixel array, a screen assembly, and a screen surface. The screen assembly and the pixel array are controlled to cause various settings for a regionally adjustable characteristic of the screen assembly to be applied to respective regions of the screen assembly. Each setting specifies a value of the regionally adjustable characteristic that is to control or affect a visual characteristic that is associated with content that is to be presented in the corresponding region. A user may provide an input signal that specifies setting(s) for the regionally adjustable characteristic with respect to specified region(s) of the screen assembly. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157257 | BACKLIGHTING ARRAY SUPPORTING ADAPTABLE PARALLAX BARRIER - Display systems are described that include an adaptable parallax barrier that filters light passed by a display panel in a manner that allows for the simultaneous viewing of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions. The display system also includes a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that may be individually controlled to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to the display panel on a region-by-region basis. Since each of the display regions may be perceived as having a different number of pixels per unit area depending upon the type of content being presented, the backlight array enables the brightness of each region to be controlled such that a viewer perceives roughly uniform brightness across all regions. Alternative regional brightness control schemes are also described. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157264 | COMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURE INCLUDING SIMULTANEOUS VIDEO PATHWAYS FOR MULTI-VIEWER SUPPORT - A communication system is described that allows co-located viewers to simultaneously consume different media content, such as different video content, via the same display screen, wherein video content delivered to at least one co-located viewer is not visible to the other co-located viewer(s). The communication system comprises an infrastructure that includes multiple pathways for delivering media content from one or more media sources to the eyes of each of the co-located viewers, wherein each pathway passes through the pixels of a pixel array included in the shared display screen. The pathways also include distributed or non-distributed processing circuitry that manages certain resources that are shared among the multiple pathways, wherein such shared resources may include shared display resources (e.g., pixels of the pixel array and light generated thereby) and shared data communication resources (e.g., bandwidth on data communication links and processing resources of nodes located on such links). | 06-30-2011 |
20110157309 | HIERARCHICAL VIDEO COMPRESSION SUPPORTING SELECTIVE DELIVERY OF TWO-DIMENSIONAL AND THREE-DIMENSIONAL VIDEO CONTENT - Systems, methods and apparatuses are described herein for encoding a plurality of video frame sequences, wherein each video frame sequence corresponds to a different perspective view of the same subject matter. In accordance with various embodiments, the encoding is performed in a hierarchical manner that leverages referencing between frames of different ones of the video frame sequences (so-called “external referencing”), but that also allows for encoded representations of only a subset of the video frame sequences to be provided when less than all sequences are required to support a particular viewing mode of a display system that is capable of displaying the subject matter in a two-dimensional mode, a three-dimensional mode, or a multi-view three-dimensional mode. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157315 | INTERPOLATION OF THREE-DIMENSIONAL VIDEO CONTENT - Techniques are described herein for interpolating three-dimensional video content. Three-dimensional video content is video content that includes portions representing respective frame sequences that provide respective perspective views of a given subject matter over the same period of time. For example, the three-dimensional video content may be analyzed to identify one or more interpolation opportunities. If an interpolation opportunity is identified, frame data that is associated with the interpolation opportunity may be replaced with an interpolation marker. In another example, a frame that is not directly represented by data in the three-dimensional video content may be identified. For instance, the frame may be represented by an interpolation marker or corrupted data. The interpolation marker or corrupted data may be replaced with an interpolated representation of the frame. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157322 | CONTROLLING A PIXEL ARRAY TO SUPPORT AN ADAPTABLE LIGHT MANIPULATOR - A display system is provided that enables three-dimensional images to be displayed. The display system includes an adaptable light manipulator positioned proximate to an image generator to provide an image to a viewer based on light that is received from the image generator. The image generator includes a pixel array. A display controller controls the pixel array to compensate for modification of a configuration of the adaptable light manipulator. The pixel array includes a plurality of display pixels. A plurality of image pixels is rendered to a plurality of respective subsets of the display pixels. The display controller is capable of changing a number of display pixels that represents each image pixel and/or which display pixels or groups thereof correspond to the respective image pixels. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157326 | MULTI-PATH AND MULTI-SOURCE 3D CONTENT STORAGE, RETRIEVAL, AND DELIVERY - Techniques are described herein for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content. For example, portions of three-dimensional viewing content may be received via respective pathways from respective sources. A visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content may be caused based on the portions. In another example, instances of viewing content may be received via respective pathways from respective sources. Configurations of respective regions of a screen may be directed to support display of the respective instances. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157327 | 3D AUDIO DELIVERY ACCOMPANYING 3D DISPLAY SUPPORTED BY VIEWER/LISTENER POSITION AND ORIENTATION TRACKING - Techniques are described herein for supporting 3D audio delivery accompanying 3D display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking. For example, audio content is configured to have a spatial orientation that accords with an orientation of a viewer. A spatial orientation of audio content is a configuration of the audio content in which characteristics of respective portions of the audio content, which correspond to respective speakers, indicate an orientation of ears of a viewer/listener with respect to sound source(s) that correspond to (e.g., are depicted in) a three-dimensional view. Such a characteristic may include an amplitude of sound that corresponds to a sound source and/or a delay associated with the sound that corresponds to the sound source. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157330 | 2D/3D PROJECTION SYSTEM - Projection systems, including projectors and projection screens, that support the presentation of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images for viewing are described, as well as methods for operating the same. In each of the example projection systems, a projection screen is used in conjunction with a light manipulator, such as a parallax barrier or a lenticular lens, that is disposed adjacent to (and may be integrated with) the projection screen to support the viewing of both two-dimensional and three-dimensional images. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157336 | DISPLAY WITH ELASTIC LIGHT MANIPULATOR - A display system is provided that enables three-dimensional images to be displayed. The display system includes an elastic light manipulator positioned proximate an image generator. The image generator includes a pixel array. The elastic light manipulator includes an elastic material and is mounted in a manner that allows for automated stretching thereof. For instance, the elastic light manipulator may be an elastic lenticular lens, an elastic parallax barrier, etc. Because the elastic light manipulator can be stretched, optical properties of the elastic light manipulator can be dynamically modified, thereby changing the manner in which light emanating from the pixel array is delivered to the eyes of viewer(s). This allows for adaptive accommodation of, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot. The elastic light manipulator may be automatically rolled up or otherwise automatically removed from in front of the image generator in order to facilitate switching between 2D and 3D views. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157339 | DISPLAY SUPPORTING MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS 3D VIEWS - A display system and method are provided that enable two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images to be displayed. One or more light manipulating layers, a pixel array, and an optional backlighting panel are provided. Each light manipulating layer may be a parallax barrier or a lenticular lens. A parallax barrier includes a plurality of barrier elements arranged in a barrier element array. The barrier element array includes a plurality of strips of barrier elements selected to be transparent to form a plurality of non-blocking strips. A lenticular lens includes an array of sub-lenses, and may be elastic. The display system is configured to deliver light from the pixel array or backlighting panel as views to corresponding viewers in a viewing space. The delivered views may include one or more two-dimensional views and/or one or more three-dimensional views. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157471 | INDEPENDENT VIEWER TAILORING OF SAME MEDIA SOURCE CONTENT VIA A COMMON 2D-3D DISPLAY - Techniques are described herein for supporting independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display. A first independently controllable version of video content is caused to be delivered to a first region of a screen. A second independently controllable version of the video content is caused to be delivered to a second region of the screen. The first region and the second region overlap at least in part. For example, the first and second independently controllable versions may be simultaneously displayed such that the first independently controllable version is displayed for a first viewer but not for a second viewer and such that the second independently controllable version may be displayed for the second viewer but not for the first viewer. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157696 | DISPLAY WITH ADAPTABLE PARALLAX BARRIER - A display system is provided that enables three-dimensional images to be displayed. The display system includes a parallax barrier. The parallax barrier is positioned proximate a light source. The parallax barrier includes a plurality of barrier elements arranged in a barrier element array. Each barrier element is configured to be selectively opaque (blocking) or transparent (non-blocking). In a first mode, each barrier element of the barrier element array is selected to be non-blocking to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated. In a second mode, each barrier element in a plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements of the barrier element array is selected to be non-blocking to form a plurality of parallel non-blocking slits to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated. The number, width, and orientation of non-blocking slits are selectable to modify display characteristics, such as a position at which the three-dimensional image is delivered. | 06-30-2011 |
20110157697 | ADAPTABLE PARALLAX BARRIER SUPPORTING MIXED 2D AND STEREOSCOPIC 3D DISPLAY REGIONS - A display system is provided that enables two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to be displayed. The display system includes a pixel array and a parallax barrier, and may include backlighting. The parallax barrier includes a plurality of barrier elements arranged in a barrier element array. Each barrier element is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. The barrier element array is configured to filter light from the pixel array to form a plurality of images in a viewing space. Pairs of the images may be perceived by viewers in the viewing space as three-dimensional. Different regions of the barrier element array may be configured to filter light from the pixel array in different ways to form corresponding different images in the viewing space, including simultaneously delivering one or more two-dimensional views and/or three-dimensional views to viewers in the viewing space. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159872 | MULTI-COMMUNICATION PATHWAY ADDRESSING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A system and method for performing multi-communication pathway addressing in a mobile communication device. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise at least one communication interface module adapted to communicate with at least a first plurality of communication networks. At least one module may be adapted to utilize the at least one communication interface module to conduct a particular type of communication over any of the first plurality of communication networks. A user interface module may be adapted to receive user input indicative of a desired communication. In response to such a received user input, the at least one module may be adapted to identify, from the received user input, at least one communication network of the first plurality of communication networks and utilize the at least one communication interface module to conduct the desired communication (e.g., of the particular type of communication) over the identified at least one communication network. | 06-30-2011 |
20110159929 | MULTIPLE REMOTE CONTROLLERS THAT EACH SIMULTANEOUSLY CONTROLS A DIFFERENT VISUAL PRESENTATION OF A 2D/3D DISPLAY - Remote control devices that can be used to independently modify multiple visual presentations that are simultaneously displayed by a screen assembly are described, wherein at least one of the visual presentations is observable by a first viewer but not a second viewer. The remote control devices can also be used to independently select media content upon which each of the multiple visual presentations is based and to control the manner in which such media content is delivered to the screen assembly. In accordance with certain embodiments, at least one of the visual presentations comprises a three-dimensional visual presentation. Display systems that include such remote control devices and methods of operating the same are also described. | 06-30-2011 |
20110160802 | BIO-MEDICAL UNIT SYSTEM FOR PHYSICAL THERAPY - A system includes bio-medical units and an electromagnetic signal generating unit. A bio-medical unit includes a power harvesting module, a wireless communication module, a processing module, and a functional module that performs physical therapy function and generates physical therapy data. The electromagnetic signal generating unit that includes at least one signal generating module and a plurality of near field communication (NFC) modules. The signal generating module generates one or more signals and an NFC module converts the one or more signals into a component of electromagnetic signal, which the power harvesting module converts into a supply voltage that powers the other modules of the bio-medical unit. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161831 | VIEW SHARING BETWEEN IN-RANGE DEVICES - A system and method for sharing a view between systems in a dynamic wireless communication network. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise a first system communicating information of a view to a display resource of the first system. The first system may establish a two-way wireless communication link between the first system and a second system in the dynamic wireless communication network. The second system may, for example, communicate a request to the first system for the first system to share a view with the second system. The first system may, for example, receive such a request and respond to such a request by communicating information of a view to the second system. The second system may then communicate information of the view to a display resource of the second system. Various aspects may comprise the first and second systems communicating view modification information between the systems. | 06-30-2011 |
20110161843 | INTERNET BROWSER AND ASSOCIATED CONTENT DEFINITION SUPPORTING MIXED TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL DISPLAYS - A browser architecture and associated content definition are provided that support display on a display screen of two-dimensional content and three-dimensional content. Web page content is received and parsed. Two-dimensional content to be displayed in a first region of the screen is identified. A first configuration request is communicated to cause a first configuration of the first region of the screen to support the two-dimensional content. Three-dimensional content to be displayed in a second region of the screen is identified. A second configuration request is communicated to cause a second configuration of the second region of the screen to support the three-dimensional content. | 06-30-2011 |
20110162007 | TELEVISION SYSTEM PROVIDING USER-INTERACTION RELATED TO AN IN-PROGRESS TELEVISION PROGRAM - A system and method in a television system for providing user-interaction related to an in-progress television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 06-30-2011 |
20110164034 | APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE SUPPORTING MIXED TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL DISPLAYS - Application programming interfaces (APIs) are provided that enable applications to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional content in regions of a display screen. A first command is received from an application directing at least in part a first configuration of a first region of the screen to support the three-dimensional content. The first command is responded to by sending a first configuration request to place the screen in a three-dimensional mode within the first region. A second command is received directing at least in part a second configuration of a second region of the screen to support the two-dimensional content. The second command is responded to by sending a second configuration request to place the screen in mode corresponding to a two-dimensional mode within the second region. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164111 | ADAPTABLE MEDIA STREAM SERVICING TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL CONTENT - Media sources that deliver at least portions of media content to viewer systems are described. The media content represents a plurality of camera perspectives of a single media product. A first request and a second request are both received. The first request is from a first viewer system and the second request is from a second viewer system. The first request is responded to by delivering a primary media stream to the first viewer system. The primary media stream contains a representation of at least a first of the plurality of camera perspectives. The second request is responded to by delivering both the primary media stream and a secondary media stream to the second viewer system. The secondary media stream contains a representation of at least a second of the plurality of camera perspectives. The second viewer system combines the primary and secondary media streams to display a three-dimensional view. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164115 | TRANSCODER SUPPORTING SELECTIVE DELIVERY OF 2D, STEREOSCOPIC 3D, AND MULTI-VIEW 3D CONTENT FROM SOURCE VIDEO - Transcoders are provided for transcoding three-dimensional content to two-dimensional content, and for transcoding three-dimensional content of a first type to three-dimensional content of another type. Transcoding of content may be performed due to user preference, display device capability, bandwidth constraints, user payment/subscription constraints, device loading, and/or for other reason. Transcoders may be implemented in a content communication network in a media source, a display device, and/or in any device/node in between. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164188 | REMOTE CONTROL WITH INTEGRATED POSITION, VIEWER IDENTIFICATION AND OPTICAL AND AUDIO TEST - Remote control devices that support interaction by a viewer with a screen assembly of a display device are provided. The eyes of the viewer have a first position within a premises relative to the screen assembly of the display device. The remote control device has a second position within the premises relative to the screen assembly of the display device. The remote control device includes an input interface that receives viewer input, a communication interface that supports wireless transmissions, and processing circuitry. The processing circuitry participates in a generation of location information relating to the first position of the eyes of the viewer. The processing circuitry causes the communication interface to make at least one wireless transmission relating to the generation of the location information. The processing circuitry, at least in part, causes a reconfiguration of the screen assembly based on the location information. | 07-07-2011 |
20110169913 | SET-TOP BOX CIRCUITRY SUPPORTING 2D AND 3D CONTENT REDUCTIONS TO ACCOMMODATE VIEWING ENVIRONMENT CONSTRAINTS - Set-top box circuitry and methods of operating the same are described that support the delivery of media content between one or more media content sources and a screen assembly of a display system. The set-top box circuitry is configured to process media content having display requirements that exceed constraints associated with a viewing environment that includes the screen assembly to produce processed media content having display requirements that do not exceed the constraints. The set-top box circuitry may also be configured to obtain substitute media content that replaces requested media content when the requested media content has display requirements exceeding constraints associated with a media content source, a communication path from the media content source, and/or the viewing environment. | 07-14-2011 |
20110169919 | FRAME FORMATTING SUPPORTING MIXED TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL VIDEO DATA COMMUNICATION - Systems and methods are provided that relate to frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication. For example, frames in frame sequence(s) may be formatted to indicate that a first screen configuration is to be used for displaying first video content, that a second screen configuration is to be used for displaying second video content, and so on. The screen configurations may be different or the same. In another example, the frames in the frame sequence(s) may be formatted to indicate that the first video content is to be displayed at a first region of a screen, that the second video content is to be displayed at a second region of the screen, and so on. The regions of the screen may partially overlap, fully overlap, not overlap, be configured such that one or more regions are within one or more other regions, etc. | 07-14-2011 |
20110169930 | EYEWEAR WITH TIME SHARED VIEWING SUPPORTING DELIVERY OF DIFFERING CONTENT TO MULTIPLE VIEWERS - Systems and methods are provided in which eyewear with time shared viewing is capable of supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers/users. The content that is delivered to each viewer includes a respective frame sequence that is displayed on a screen. The frame sequences are mixed when they are displayed on the screen. A lens assembly may be used by each viewer to view the frame sequence that is delivered to that viewer. For instance, a first lens assembly may pass a first frame sequence but not frame sequences other than the first frame sequence. A second lens assembly may pass a second frame sequence but not frame sequences other than the second frame sequence, and so on. The content that is delivered to a viewer may depend on a maturity of the viewer (e.g., whether the viewer's maturity is less than a maturity threshold). | 07-14-2011 |
20110171972 | METHOD OF DETERMINING OPTIMAL CELL CONFIGURATION BASED UPON DETERMINED DEVICE LOCATION - A configuration device for configuring a wireless device within a wireless cell can include a receiving unit configured to receive a request message from a wireless device within a wireless cell. In addition, the configuration device can include a first processing unit configured to determine location information of the wireless device, and a second processing unit configured to determine a communication capacity of the wireless device, and to estimate a communication requirement based on the request message. Furthermore, the configuration device can have a transmitting unit configured to transmit optimal information to the wireless device with respect to the request message. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176789 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A PROGRAM RECORDER FOR MANAGING ADVERTISEMENT PRESENTATION - A system and method for managing advertisement presentation in user equipment, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 07-21-2011 |
20110178853 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPDATING ADVERTISING CONTENT FOR A RECORDED PROGRAM - A system and method for updating advertising content for a recorded program (e.g., recorded on personal video recorder equipment), substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 07-21-2011 |
20110178876 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VIEWER IDENTIFICATION-BASED ADVERTISING - A system and method for providing viewer identification-based advertising, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 07-21-2011 |
20110178880 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AND REPORTING PRESENTATION OF RECORDED ADVERTISING CONTENT - A system and method for monitoring and reporting presentation of recorded advertising content, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179446 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING PROGRAMMING AND ADVERTISING CONTENT THROUGH DIVERSE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A system and method for communicating programming and advertising content through diverse communication networks, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 07-21-2011 |
20110179448 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING USER SPECIFICATION OF ADVERTISING CONTENT - A system and method for providing user specification of advertising content, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 07-21-2011 |
20110196609 | DOWNLOADING MAP SEGMENT(S) TO A CELL PHONE BASED UPON ITS GPS COORDINATES AND MOBILITY - A wireless terminal displays its location and navigation information (map segment) on its display. The wireless terminal accesses a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver of the wireless terminal to determine its location coordinates. The wireless terminal determines a maximum data size for navigation information to be downloaded. The wireless terminal sends a navigation information download request to a map server via a supporting wireless network infrastructure that includes the location coordinates and the maximum data size. The wireless terminal receives navigation information that has a data size no greater than the maximum data size and displays the navigation information on the display. The wireless terminal may display a map segment and an icon representing the wireless terminal at a location corresponding to the location coordinates of the wireless terminal with respect to the map segment. The wireless terminal may download a premises map from a premises map server. | 08-11-2011 |
20110197234 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH TIMING BASED ON A GLOBAL CLOCK AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A network module receives network global positioning system (GPS) signals and that transmits a video signal to a remote device that includes time stamps that are based on the network GPS signals. The network module receives a device parameter from the remote device that indicates that local GPS signals are available to the remote device. The network module reduces a frequency of the time stamps when the device parameter indicates that local GPS signals are available to the remote device; | 08-11-2011 |
20110199185 | BUILDING A LOCATION BASED SERVICE REFERENCE DATABASE BASED ON ENCOUNTERED RFID TAGS - A RFID reader of a RFID enabled mobile device receives RFID information from a RFID tag attached to an object. In instances where the RFID enabled mobile device is GNSS enabled, a GNSS position of the RFID enabled mobile device is determined to associate, for example, by location stamping, with the received RFID information. The location-stamped RFID information is communicated to a remote location server, where location-based RFID information is received from a plurality of users. The RFID enabled mobile device may communicate at least a portion of the received RFID information to the remote location server. When GNSS is not enabled, the RFID enabled mobile device estimates its own location utilizing location information, if available, for the object in the received RFID information. Otherwise, the RFID enabled mobile device acquires location-based RFID information from the remote location server so as to determine its own location. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199255 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A POSITION FIX INDOORS - A location server may be operable to refine a location for a RF node based on a weight applied to one or more location samples that are received from one or more mobile devices. The received location samples may be weighted based on a manufacturer and/or a model information of each of the mobile devices, properties and/or conditions of a RF environment associated with each of the mobile devices, a GNSS dilution of precision, motion sensors used by each of the mobile devices and/or a geometrical population condition associated with each of the mobile devices within range of the RF node. A valid location for the RF node may be generated utilizing the weighted location samples. The location server may update location information for the RF node, which may be stored in a location database, utilizing the valid location for the RF node. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199257 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATING ALTITUDE INFORMATION FOR A LOCATION BY USING TERRAIN MODEL INFORMATION TO PRIME ALTITUDE SENSORS - Methods and systems for updating altitude information for a location by using terrain model information to prime altitude sensors are disclosed and may include determining an altitude of a wireless device including one or more altimeters. The determination of altitude may include determining a location of the wireless device, receiving an altitude value for the location from an altitude database, and measuring a change in the altitude using the altimeters. The database may include a worldwide terrain database that may be stored on a remote device, such as a server. Part of the database may be stored on the wireless device and may be updated as the wireless device moves. The location may be determined utilizing a global navigation satellite system, which may include GPS, GLONASS, and GALILLEO. The location may be measured utilizing cellular service triangulation or by utilizing one or more access points with known locations. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199259 | SENSOR-ASSISTED LOCATION-AWARE MOBILE DEVICE - A GNSS enabled mobile device moves from a first area where GNSS signal quality and/or level is above a threshold to a second area where GNSS signal quality and/or level is below the threshold. The GNSS enabled mobile device in the second area determines its own location utilizing previous GNSS measurements in the first area. GNSS signals are received to calculate GNSS measurements whenever the GNSS enabled mobile device is in the first area. The calculated GNSS measurements are utilized to determine a location of the GNSS enabled mobile device within the first area. The GNSS enabled mobile device in the second area utilizes the most current GNSS measurements in the first area to determine its own location. Sensors such as an image sensor, a light sensor, an audio sensor and/or a location sensor are used to refine the location of the GNSS enabled mobile device in the second area. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199260 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION OF A CELLULAR BASE STATION UTILIZING MOBILE GNSS VELOCITY AND CORRESPONDING CELLULAR DOPPLER - A GNSS enabled mobile device concurrently receives GNSS signals from GNSS satellites and transmissions from a cellular base station. GNSS-based velocities and GNSS locations are determined for the GNSS enabled mobile device utilizing the received GNSS signals. A cellular Doppler is measured on the cellular base station. A location of the cellular base station is determined based on the determined GNSS-based velocity and corresponding cellular Doppler measurements. The cellular base station may be located by the GNSS enabled mobile device and/or by a remote location server. In this regard, the remote location server may determine the location for the cellular base station utilizing GNSS velocities and corresponding cellular Doppler measurements received from plural GNSS enabled mobile devices in a coverage area of the cellular base station. The determined location of the cellular base station is used to refine GNSS locations of the plurality of GNSS enabled mobile devices when needed. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199261 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STABILIZING A GNSS CLOCK BY REDUCING INTERFERENCE - Methods and systems for stabilizing a GNSS clock by reducing interference are disclosed and may include stabilizing a frequency of a temperature compensated crystal oscillator (TCXO) on a chip in a GNSS device. A clock signal may be generated for the device by temporarily configuring circuitry adjacent to the TCXO at a constant power level. Temperature and electromagnetic interference of the TCXO may be stabilized by the constant power level of the adjacent circuitry, which may be on the chip or external to the chip. The frequency of the TCXO may be stabilized by temporarily disabling the adjacent circuitry. A GNSS clock signal may be stabilized by the configuring of the constant power level while a GNSS location may be calibrated. A GNSS location of a fixed wireless device, such as a wireless access point, may be calibrated utilizing the configured constant power level and shared with other wireless devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199262 | ESTIMATING FREQUENCY OF A GNSS ENABLED DEVICE BASED ON TIME STAMPS - A GNSS enabled device that is communicatively coupled to a network, receives time stamps via the network. The time stamps are generated based on reference clock signals within the network. GNSS receiver clock signal frequency may be adjusted based on the time stamps. When GNSS satellite signals and/or SRN signals are not available, the time stamps enable synchronization with GNSS satellites. Network clock signals and/or time stamps may be generated by an access point, a DSL modem, a cable modem and/or a primary reference clock within the network. A series of time stamps may be utilized for adjusting frequencies. Clock signals may be generated for adjusting frequencies based on a comparison between time stamps and oscillator or mixer output. Clock signals are generated for baseband, intermediate and/or RF frequency signal processing. GNSS satellite signals may be demodulated, correlated with a pseudonoise code sequence and/or synchronized based on the time stamps. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199916 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A WIRELESS ACCESS POINT USING SINGLE DEVICE BASED POWER MEASUREMENTS - A mobile device measures power from different locations for an encountered wireless access point, a WiFi or Bluetooth access point, and communicates the power measurements to a remote location. The remote location server collects power measurements for the encountered wireless access point from a plurality of communication devices. The remote location server determines the location of the encountered wireless access point utilizing corresponding power measurements from a single communication device. The power measurements are performed at different locations and over a period of time. The power measurements are time stamped and transmitted to the remote location server. The single communication device is selected based on quality and/or availability of corresponding power measurements for the encountered wireless access point. The determined location of the encountered wireless access point is stored into a reference database so as to be shared among the plurality of communication devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199917 | COLLABORATIVE SHARING OF LOCATION INFORMATION AMONG DEVICES IN A NETWORK - A wireless communication device determines its location and communicates the location to other local devices utilizing a nonstandard, standard and/or proprietary protocol in combination with another protocol such as a Bluetooth, RFID, IEEE 802.11 and/or a cellular phone protocol. The location may be determined utilizing a GNSS receiver and/or network device information. A new location may be determined based on the determined location, a relative distance and/or a relative direction to other local devices. Determined location information may be communicated to other devices via a network. The wireless communication device may receive locations and/or corresponding location uncertainties from devices located within a limited range. The received information is utilized to determine a more accurate location. The more accurate location is communicated back to the devices within the limited range and/or to other communication devices. | 08-18-2011 |
20110199964 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION OF AN ACCESS POINT BASED ON ASSOCIATION OF THE ACCESS POINT WITH A COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING A KNOWN LOCATION - A communication device associated with a wireless access point, namely, a WiFi access point or a Bluetooth access point for example, communicates its location information to the wireless access point. The wireless access point determines its own location utilizing the communicated location information. The communicated location information comprises a device location address and/or a GNSS position of the associated communication device. The device address comprises a network accessible address, a device identifier, a telephone number, an IP address, a url and/or ftp location, an e-mail address, and/or an account number that identifies a corresponding location of the communication device. The wireless access point retrieves corresponding device location addresses and/or GNSS positions from a plurality of associated communication devices. The retrieved device location addresses are converted to determine corresponding locations for self-locating the wireless access point. The determined location of the wireless access point is shared with each associated communication device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200023 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A POSITION FIX INDOORS - Whenever a mobile device in a building is within proximity of a RF communication device, the mobile device may be operable to receive location information transmitted, for example by broadcasting it, from a RF communication device. The transmitted location information comprises altitude information of the RF communication device. At least an altitude of the mobile device may be determined based on the received altitude information of the RF communication device. The RF communication device may be located in an elevator car and/or on a particular floor in the building. Whenever the RF communication device is located in the elevator car, the altitude information of the RF communication device may be received by the RF communication device from an elevator controller. In instances when the RF communication device also transmits its latitude/longitude (LAT/LON), the mobile device may be operable to determine a 3-dimentional (3D) location of the mobile device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200024 | PROVIDING GNSS ASSISTANCE DATA VIA A WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT - A wireless mobile device, either a WLAN enabled mobile device or a Bluetooth enable device, which is within range of a WLAN access point, is operable to receive GNSS assistance data broadcasted from the WLAN access point. The GNSS assistance data are acquired by the WLAN access point from a reference database coupled to a location server. The broadcast GNSS assistance data comprise ephemeris data, LTO data, location information related to the WLAN access point and/or time information. The WLAN access point receives the acquired GNSS assistance data from the location server over a broadband IP network. The WLAN access point selects available resources for broadcasting the received GNSS assistance data to wireless mobile devices in range. The wireless mobile device receives the broadcast GNSS assistance data to calculate its own location. The calculated location of the wireless mobile device is used to update or refine the reference database. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201305 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENSURING USER AND/OR DEVICE ANONYMITY FOR LOCATION BASED SERVICES (LBS) - A mobile device may communicate with a location server during location based services (LBS) operations using a secure identifier. The secure identifier abstracts identification information of the mobile device and/or identification information of a user of the mobile device in instances that the mobile device and/or user identification information are deemed protectable from the location server. The location server may be operable to store location data corresponding to the mobile device and/or the user in a location reference database based on the secure identifier. The secure identifier may comprise a unique value, which may be randomly generated. The secure identifier may also be generated based on the mobile device and/or user identification information, by applying, for example, encryption algorithms to the mobile device and/or user identification information. Service providers for the mobile device may retrieve the abstracted mobile device and/or user identification information from the secure identifier. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201335 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A LOCATION-BASED VERTICAL HANDOFF OVER HETEROGENEOUS MOBILE ENVIRONMENTS - A multi-radio mobile device receives data transmissions for a wireless communication session from a current serving access network in a coupled heterogeneous network system comprising a plurality of different access networks. The multi-radio mobile device initiates a handoff for the wireless communication session based on the current mobile location. The multi-radio mobile device acquires location based network connection information such as call drop in the current mobile location from a location server so as to make a handoff decision. When the handoff is to be performed, a target access network or a different base station in the current serving access network associated with the lowest call drop rate is selected. The wireless communication session is received from the selected target access network, as a new serving access network, or from the different base station in the current serving access network with the completion of the handoff. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201336 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING USER-LEVEL QoS DURING A LOCATION-BASED HANDOFF OVER HETEROGENEOUS MOBILE ENVIRONMENTS - A multi-radio mobile device receives data transmission of a session from a serving access network in a heterogeneous network system comprising difference access networks. A handoff is performed based on the received data transmissions. User-level QoS for the wireless communication session is adjusted during the handoff based on connection QoS information in the current location of the multi-radio mobile device and/or a velocity of the multi-radio mobile device. Location-based network connection information, comprising call drop information and the connection QoS information, in the current location of the multi-radio mobile device is acquired from a location server. A target access network or a different base station in the serving access network associated with the highest connection QoS is selected. The user-level QoS is adjusted during the handoff for receiving the wireless communication session from the selected target access network or the different base station in the serving access network. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201347 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LOCATION-BASED DYNAMIC RADIO SELECTION - A multi-radio mobile device comprises a plurality of different radios. When a location update occurs, the multi-radio mobile device, at a specific location, acquires location-based radio information from a remote location server. The multi-radio mobile device selects a radio for use in the specific location based on the acquired location-based radio information comprising available radios in the specific location and radio weights. The radio is selected from the available radios based on the radio weights in the specific location. Transmissions of a desired service are received in the specific location utilizing the selected radio. Location-based radio measurements reports to the remote location server are generated utilizing signal strength measurements for the received signals. Radio quality information of the available radios is calculated by the location server utilizing location-based radio measurement reports from associated users. The radio weights of the available radios are determined based on the calculated radio quality information. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201348 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING UPLOADING OF LOCATION DATA FOR LOCATION BASED SERVICES - A mobile device may be operable to collect location data for a RF node and cache the collected location data in the mobile device. Resources that may be utilized for improving the uploading of the cached location data to a location server may be determined by the mobile device. The cached location data may be communicated, to the location server for updating a location database, by the mobile device utilizing the determined resources. The mobile device may determine and utilize an opportunistic transport based on a data usage and/or an access. The mobile device may store a subset of the location database locally for comparing with the cached location data for redundancy. The compared location data may be transmitted by the mobile device to the location server for updating the location database if the compared location data are not redundant data. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201357 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REFINING A LOCATION OF A BASE STATION AND/OR A MOBILE DEVICE BASED ON SIGNAL STRENGTH MEASUREMENTS AND CORRESPONDING TRANSMITTER AND/OR RECEIVER ANTENNA PATTERNS - A mobile device receives data transmissions, via a coupled receiver antenna array, from a transmitter antenna array of a serving base station. The mobile device determines relative distances, with respect to the serving base station, associated with signal strength measurements on the received data transmissions. The signal strength measurements are compensated, at the mobile device and/or a remote location server, in three-dimensional space based on corresponding transmitter and/or receiver antenna pattern, and/or mobile orientation information for estimating the relative distances. The estimated relative distances are refined by fitting a function of the azimuth and elevation angles. A location for the serving base station and/or the mobile device is determined or refined based on the refined relative distances to be shared among a plurality of users of the remote location server. Fixed or adaptive antenna patterns are supported at the serving base station and/or the mobile device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201358 | DETERMINING APPLICATION USAGE RELATIVE TO A PARTICULAR LOCATION - A mobile device collects information about application usage and associates collected application information with a location of the mobile device and/or a time that the application is accessed. The application is stored on the mobile device or on an external device and accessed via a network. The application information, location of the mobile device and time the application is accessed are communicated to another device and stored in a storage device which may be operated or managed by a service provider or another entity. The application information may comprise identification of a website, a network device or URL, the application and/or data that is input and/or output from the application. The location of the mobile device and/or the time, are determined utilizing a GNSS receiver and/or utilizing information from a network device. The application information, the location of the mobile device and/or the time may be utilized for targeted advertizing. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201360 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PHYSICAL MAP-ASSISTED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT LOCATING - A mobile device receives a server-assisted location for a wireless access point, either a WiFi access point or a Bluetooth access point, from a remote location server comprising a reference database. The received server-assisted location is refined using a physical map or image. The mobile device is operable to acquire the physical map or image for a map-assisted location for the wireless access point. The mobile device compares the two locations to generate a valid location for the wireless access point. In instances where the two locations are consistent, the mobile device utilizes one of the two locations as the valid location for the wireless access point. Otherwise, the mobile device refines the server-assisted location utilizing the map-assisted location. The resulting refined server-assisted location is utilized as the valid location for the wireless access point and is transmitted to the remote location server to refine the reference database. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202416 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTHORIZING TRANSACTIONS BASED ON DEVICE LOCATION - Aspects of a method and system for authorizing network transactions based on device location are provided. In this regard, a request may be received to approve a transaction that was initiated from a first communication device and comprises a need to access an account. In response to the request, a second communication device that is associated with the account may be determined, and it may be determined whether to approve the transaction based on received data relating to the identity and location of the second communication device. The transaction may be associated with the second communication device via a database stored on the location server. The transaction may be approved in instances that the first communication device is in a location associated, via the database, with the second communication device. The transaction may be approved in instances that the first communication device is in substantially the same location as the second communication device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202460 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTHORIZING TRANSACTIONS BASED ON RELATIVE LOCATION OF DEVICES - Aspects of a method and system for authorizing transactions based on relative location of devices are provided. In this regard, data relating to a location of a first communication device and data relating to a location of a second communication device may be received, a distance between the first communication device and the second communication device may be determined based on the received data, and whether to approve a transaction may be determined based on the determined distance. The transaction may have been initiated from one of the first communication device and the second communication device, and may comprise a need to access an account. The transaction may be approved in instances that the first communication device and the second communication device are within a predetermined distance of each other. The received data may comprise distance information determined via communications between the first communication device and the second communication device. | 08-18-2011 |
20110202461 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTHORIZING NETWORK TRANSACTIONS BASED ON RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) CHARACTERIZATION OF A DEVICE'S LOCATION - Aspects of a method and system for authorizing network transactions based on radio frequency (RF) characterization of a device's location are provided. In this regard, whether to approve a communication device to perform a network transaction may be determined based on results of a comparison between a radio frequency (RE) characterization of a location of the communication device and one or more approved RF characterizations. The RF characterization may be based on information from a plurality of receivers within the communication device. The one or more approved characterizations may be stored in the network device. The RF characterization may indicate a quantity of RF sources detected and identified by the communication device at the location. The RF characterization may indicate signal strength of signals received from RF sources detected and indentified by the communication device at the location. | 08-18-2011 |
20110205110 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROPAGATING GNSS ASSISTANCE DATA AMONG COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN A GNSS GROUP - A communication device within a GNSS group propagates GNSS assistance data to one or more other communication devices in the GNSS group utilizing direct device-to-device connections. The GNSS assistance data comprises ephemeris received from one or more GNSS satellites and/or predicted ephemeris. As a source device, the communication device generates, and/or acquires from other resources such as a remote location server, the predicted ephemeris. As a destination device, the communication device receives existing GNSS assistance data from a source device and/or other communication devices in the GNSS group. A GNSS position for the communication device and corresponding time information are used to refresh the received GNSS assistance data. In instances where the communication device further acts as a relay device, the refreshed GNSS assistance data is relayed to other communication devices over wired and/or wireless direct device-to-device connections utilizing appropriate communication technologies such as WiFi, Bluetooth and/or Bluetooth low energy. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207444 | Method And System For 60 GHZ Location Determination Based On Varying Antenna Direction And Coordination Of WLAN/WPAN/GPS Multimode Devices - Within a local region, information may be communicated between two or more wireless multimode communication devices (WMCD) comprising | 08-25-2011 |
20110207471 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING LOCATION WITHIN A BUILDING BASED ON HISTORICAL LOCATION INFORMATION - A mobile device may be operable to receive historical location trail information of a building. A location of the mobile device within the building may be determined by placing, moving or snapping a reference location of the mobile device onto a trail according to the received historical location trail information. The historical location trail information may be acquired from a location server. The historical location trail information stored in the location server may be generated using a plurality of location samples that are provided by one or more other mobile devices that have been within the building. The historical location trail information may also be acquired from an indoor map of the building that is used by the mobile device for navigation within the building. The determined location of the mobile device may then be utilized by the mobile device to navigate within the building for location-based services. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207472 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR CLOCK-ASSISTED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT LOCATING - A wireless access point comprising a cellular receiver receives radio signals from a cellular base station. A cellular reference clock, synchronized to the cellular base station, is detected from the received radio signals. The detected cellular reference clock is utilized to stabilize a local access point clock for GNSS positioning. A clock difference between the local access point clock and the detected cellular reference clock is determined and the local access point clock may be adjusted accordingly. The adjusted local access point clock is utilized for clocking communications between the wireless access point and other communication devices. A time offset between the adjusted local access point clock and the detected cellular reference clock is provided to a remote location server. The remote location server retrieves time offset information from wireless access points served by the cellular base station so as to determine relative distances among the wireless access points. | 08-25-2011 |
20110212732 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION OF A MOBILE DEVICE BASED ON A PLURALITY OF LOCATION SAMPLES - A mobile device may be operable to receive three or more location samples for the mobile device from each of three or more resources. Two or more valid location samples may be selected based on an accuracy indicator associated with each of the received location samples. A location of the mobile device may be determined utilizing the selected two or more valid location samples. A region around each of the received location samples may be determined based on the accuracy indicator and a condition of a geographic environment that is associated with each of the received location samples. Two or more valid location samples among the received location samples may be selected in instances when at least a portion of the region of each of the selected valid location samples overlaps with at least a portion of the regions of each of other selected valid location samples. | 09-01-2011 |
20110212735 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SEAMLESS CONSUMMATION OF AN ELECTRONIC TRANSACTION BASED ON LOCATION RELATED DATA - A mobile device may determine its location, receive transaction related information, and initiate, based on its determined location and/or the transaction related information, a transaction at the current location. The transaction related information may be received from a location server. The mobile device and/or its users may also be authenticated, using the location server. The initiated transaction may be completed automatically, without user input. The device user may also be prompted for authorization and/or information for completing the transaction. The transaction related information may specify if and/or when transactions are to be completed automatically. The mobile device may track user actions via the mobile device, and may generate based on that tracking, user action data pertaining transactions initiated and/or conducted by the user. The generated user action data may be communicated to the location server, and may be used to update the profile data maintained by the location server. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216671 | Environment Configuration by a Device Bases on Auto-Discovery of Local Resources and Generating Preference Information for those Resources - Methods and systems for environment configuration by a device based on auto-discovery of local devices and generating preference information for those resources are disclosed and may include discovering available devices utilizing a wireless mobile communication device (WMCD). Wireless communication may be established with one or more of the available devices utilizing the WMCD, which may then configure the resources according to a user's preferences or a plurality of user preferences. The user preferences may be stored internal or external to the WMCD, and may be modified based on subsequent changes to the configuring of the resources. The WMCD may communicate with the resources utilizing one or more of a plurality of wireless protocols, which may include cellular, WLAN, near-field communication, Bluetooth, and radio frequency identification. The WMCD may auto-discover as well as determine and authenticate access privileges for the resources, which may include devices for adjusting a user's local environment. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216765 | MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK SUPPORTING MULTIPLE BROADBAND NETWORK AND SERVICE PROVIDER INFRASTRUCTURES - A method for communicating information includes establishing a logical communication path that is independent of a physical communication path that couples at least two end points via at least a first broadband network. At least a first portion of the logical communication path and at least a second portion of the logical communication path utilize different communication protocols. Both of the physical and logical communication paths are established through the same plurality of network nodes. Information that would be normally transferred over the physical communication path may be transferred between the at least two endpoints, via the established logical communication path over the corresponding redundant network connection. The established logical communication path may be provisioned for handling communication functions. The communication functions may include operations administration maintenance and provisioning (OAM&P), roaming, user authentication, media transfer, caching, storage management and/or addressing management. | 09-08-2011 |
20110221694 | TACTILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for communicating tactile information, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222471 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZED TRANSFER OF LOCATION DATABASE INFORMATION - A servicing communication device may receive a subset of a location reference database that is maintained by a plurality of location servers, and may provide location related data to a mobile device that is communicatively coupled to the servicing communication device based on the received subset. The servicing communication device may determine capabilities and/or requirements of the mobile device, and may generate the location related data based on that determination. The servicing communication device may determine attributes and/or parameters that may affect determination of the subset of the location reference database. The subset of location reference database may be requested based on the determined attributes and/or parameters. The attributes and/or parameters may comprise a location of the servicing communication device. The servicing communication device may determine its location, directly based on GNSS transmissions and/or indirectly based on assisted GNSS (A-GNSS) data received from the plurality of location servers. | 09-15-2011 |
20110223931 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CHARACTERIZING LOCATION AND/OR RANGE BASED ON TRANSMIT POWER - A transmitting communication device may iteratively adjust its transmit power, and may estimate, based on iterative transmit power adjustment, relative location of a receiving communication device. The transmit power may be initialized to a maximum value, and the transmit power may be iteratively reduced until connectivity with the receiving communication device is lost. The loss of connectivity may be determined based on reception of responses to ping messages transmitted by the transmitting communication device. The transmitting communication device may authenticate the receiving communication device and/or a user of the receiving communication device. The authentication may comprises utilizing transmit power adjustment and/or relative location estimation therefrom to ensure that a separation between the devices does not exceed a maximum value. The transmitting communication device may generate location info associated with the receiving communication device based on the relative location estimation, and may communicate the location info to a location server. | 09-15-2011 |
20110227788 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING AND PROPAGATING LOCATION INFORMATION BY A MOBILE DEVICE USING SENSORY DATA - A mobile device may determine its initial absolute location; may track using a plurality of sensors, its movements relative to the initial absolute location; and may generate location related data for a location based on that tracking. Tracking movement of the mobile device may comprise generating data corresponding to three-dimensional (3D) linear and/or rotational changes in position and/or location of the mobile device. The initial absolute location may be determined directly by the mobile device, based on GNSS signals and/or assisted GNSS (A-GNSS) data received from one or more location servers; and/or it may be estimated based on a location of a communication device that is communicatively coupled to the mobile device. The generated location related data may propagated by the mobile device to other mobile and/or communication devices, and/or to the location servers, where a reference database for supporting location related services (LBS) may be updated accordingly. | 09-22-2011 |
20110237185 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION FOR A RF COMMUNICATION DEVICE BASED ON ITS PROXIMITY TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A mobile device may be operable to determine, based on a known location of the mobile device, a location for a RF communication device that communicates with the mobile device, whenever the mobile device is within proximate range of the RF communication device. The determined location for the RF communication device may be stored in a location database in a location server and/or a memory in the RF communication device. The stored location of the RF communication device may then be used to determine a location for other mobile devices that may communicate with the RF communication device and are within proximate range of the RF communication device. The RF communication device may comprise a radio-frequency identification (RFID) device and/or a near field communication (NFC) device. The determined location for the RF communication device may comprise the known location of the mobile device. | 09-29-2011 |
20110239244 | DEMAND BROADCAST CHANNELS AND CHANNEL PROGRAMMING BASED ON USER VIEWING HISTORY, PROFILING, AND REQUESTS - A system and method for scheduling media for consumption via a demand broadcast channel based upon notifications received during user consumption of media. An embodiment of the present invention may employ notifications generated when users select media for consumption, to calculate one or more statistics. The statistics may be calculated and used by a media provider to schedule media into a demand broadcast channel in which the frequency of repetition or time of availability of the media is set according to a ranking of the relative frequency of requests for the media. The statistics may also be shared with a third party, to enable a third party media provider to arrange the scheduling of media availability according to the relative frequency of requests for the media. | 09-29-2011 |
20110248877 | SYSTEM AND METHOD PROVIDING REMOTE USER SELECTION OF A DEVICE - A system and method providing remote user selection of a device, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252130 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A NETWORK OF USER-SELECTABLE DEVICES - A system and method for managing a network of user-selectable devices, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252131 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY MANAGING A NETWORK OF USER-SELECTABLE DEVICES - A system and method for automatically forming and/or maintaining a network of user-selectable devices, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 10-13-2011 |
20110252328 | SYSTEM AND METHOD IN A NETWORK CONTROLLER FOR REMOTELY MONITORING AND/OR CONTROLLING DEVICES - A system and method for remotely monitoring and/or controlling devices, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255513 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a hand off has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs. | 10-20-2011 |
20110258557 | PERSONAL STREAMING AND BROADCAST CHANNELS IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Systems and methods for the exchange of personal streaming media channels are disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may permit the exchange of media such as, for example, audio and video, in a real time manner via a personal media channel in a media exchange network. The media channel may be established based upon input from a user, and its establishment may be initiated based upon input from sensors such as, for example, a smoke or fire sensor, a motion detector, a swimming pool disturbance detector, and a door bell button. A personal streaming media channel may be a one-way or a two-way channel. The media may be consumed using a set top box, and may be produced by a media peripheral such as, for example, a digital camcorder, a microphone, a video camera, and a MP3 player. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261761 | EXTENDED CALL HANDLING FUNCTIONALITY USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information via a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information simultaneously exchanged by an associated access device via a wide area network. The broadband access gateway may store the received multimedia information locally, within the broadband access gateway, or may communicate the multimedia information to storage accessible from the broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available. | 10-27-2011 |
20110271111 | Systems and Methods For Providing Security to Different Functions - Methods and systems are provided that use smartcards, such as subscriber identity module (SIM) cards to provide secure functions for a mobile client. One embodiment of the invention provides a mobile communication network system that includes a mobile network, a mobile terminal, a server coupled to the mobile terminal via the mobile network, and a subscriber identity module (SIM) card coupled to the mobile terminal. The SIM card includes a first key and a second key. The first key is used to authenticate an intended user of the mobile terminal to the mobile network. Upon successful authentication of the intended user to the mobile network, the mobile terminal downloads a function offered from the server through the mobile network. The second key is then used by the mobile terminal to authenticate the intended user to the downloaded function so that the intended user can utilize the function. | 11-03-2011 |
20110274078 | AUTOMATIC QUALITY OF SERVICE BASED RESOURCE ALLOCATION - A system and method for providing quality-of-service based network resource allocation and utilization in a dynamic network environment. For example, a wireless communication network may comprise a first system and a second system. The first system may provide a current service to a user at a current quality level. The first system and second system may establish a wireless communication link. At least one of the first and second systems may determine whether utilizing one or more resources of the second system will provide the current service to the user at a higher level of quality than the current quality level. One or more resources of the second system may be allocated for providing the current service to a user at a higher quality level. The allocated resources may be utilized to provide the current service to the user at a higher quality level than the current quality level. | 11-10-2011 |
20110276655 | Software Applications Incorporating Functionalities Based in Data-Type and Access - A process of sending and receiving data by a wireless device through a wireless network is disclosed. Access criteria are set for at least one of the wireless device and applications running on the wireless device. At least one query is formulated by one of the applications running on the wireless device and the query is sent over the wireless network. Data is received in response to the query, wherein the data received is based on the access criteria and the access criteria relate to an access of the wireless device to the wireless network. | 11-10-2011 |
20110285908 | O/S APPLICATION BASED MULTIPLE DEVICE ACCESS WINDOWING DISPLAY - A system and method for providing access to a video display for multiple devices. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise receiving, at a video display system, a first video data signal through a first data communication interface and a second video data signal through a second data communication interface. A processor module may process the first and second video data signals to generate video information of first and second display windows in a composite display. For example, the processor module may transform and translate video information to fit display windows. The processor module may, for example, generate an output video signal comprising information of the first window and information of the second window. Such a signal may, for example, be utilized to drive an output display showing the first and second windows. Various aspects may also provide method steps and apparatus for controlling aspects of the displayed windows. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286434 | ENHANCED WIDE AREA NETWORK SUPPORT VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A wireless broadband access gateway having a wireless interface compatible with any of a number of commercial wireless wide area network standards provides enhanced wire area network coverage via a broadband network. The gateway may function as a wireless wide area network base station having a small coverage area, and may be communicatively coupled via a broadband access provider to a broadband wireless controller that cooperatively coordinates call management for access devices comprising cellular or mobile multimedia handsets. The broadband network may comprise cable, digital subscriber line, satellite, T1, or T3 type networks, and may carry traffic unrelated to the signaling, control, voice, and multimedia information of associated with wide area network calls. The wireless broadband access gateway may comprise a set-to-box, and may operate to convert from air interface protocols used to communicate with mobile handsets of the wireless wide area network, to/from the packet-based protocols that may be used in the broadband network. | 11-24-2011 |
20110299410 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING QUALITY OF SERVICE VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for managing quality of service via a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a broadband gateway that supports one or more first QoS protocols may determine, based on communications with a plurality of communication devices, whether each of the plurality of communication devices supports the one or more first QoS protocols. The gateway may communicate a result of the determination to a content provider and/or service provider. In this manner, the content provider and/or service provider may determine whether to utilize one or more second QoS protocols to deliver content to a particular one of said plurality of communication devices based on whether said particular of communication devices based on whether said particular one of said plurality of communication devices supports the one or more first QoS protocols. The gateway may be operable to map between QoS protocols. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299411 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTENT AGGREGATION VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway determines network channel conditions for a requested service and identifies a user profile for a requesting device. The broadband gateway negotiates a service profile for the requested service with the at least one network access service provider based on the determined network conditions and the identified user profile. Content may be acquired and received for the requested service from the at least one network access service provider utilizing the negotiated service profile. The broadband gateway aggregates and assembles the received content. The resulting assembled content is communicated to the requesting device for the requested service. The broadband gateway may relay content among peer devices. Content conversion may be performed during the relay communication to match user profiles of subsequent peer devices. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299412 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A BROADBAND GATEWAY TO PROVIDE ENERGY EFFICIENT MANAGEMENT IN A HOME NETWORK - A broadband gateway may provide energy management service within a home network. The energy management service may enable reducing and/or enhancing energy consumption within the home network. The energy management service may comprise managing one or more devices in the home network by the broadband gateway. The energy management service may be performed based on energy-related information associated with devices, and the information may be stored by the broadband gateway. At least some of the energy-related information may be acquired from the managed devices. The energy management service may comprise controlling and/or configuring the managed devices, and/or communications between the managed devices within the home network. The broadband gateway may track actual energy usage by the managed devices. Information corresponding to energy-related activities and/or usage may be displayed via a user interface. The information may also be reported to entities external to the home network. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299540 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-TRANSPORT AND MULTI-PROTOCOL PROCESSING IN A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may receive a packet from a network access service provider over a physical layer connection. The broadband gateway may determine which one of a set of possible transport protocols is utilized for the received packet. The determined transport protocol is utilized to identify or search for content of the received packet. The set of possible transport protocols are selected based on, for example, a channel type identified for the physical layer connection. The selected set of possible transport protocols may be utilized, sequentially or concurrently, to determine the transport protocol for the received packet. The identified content is marked utilizing the determined transport protocol for content distribution to devices for content consumption. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299541 | Method and System for Recognizing Energy Efficient Certified Devices Through a Gateway - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, may be operable to identify an energy efficient certified device from the plurality of devices. The broadband gateway may handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Information related to the identified energy efficient certified device, including usage information of the device, may be communicated to one or more entities. The broadband gateway may acquire the usage information of the energy efficient certified device by monitoring whether the device is operating in an energy efficient mode. The broadband gateway may obtain a credit and/or a reward from the one or more entities based on the usage information of the energy efficient certified device. The broadband gateway may deposit the credit and/or the reward to an account associated with the energy efficient certified device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299542 | Method and System for Providing Directory Services by a Gateway for Peer-to-Peer Communications - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices and handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider, may be operable to identify one or more individuals with whom a user desires to engage in peer-to-peer communications. The user is associated with one or more of the plurality of devices. A directory may be generated by the broadband gateway for the peer-to-peer communications based on the identified one or more individuals. The directory may comprise name information, location information, contact information, communication device information, and/or content sharing information. The broadband gateway may communicate the directory to one or more network access service providers and/or one or more content providers. Peer-to-peer exchanges and/or network resource allocations for the peer-to-peer communications may be controlled and/or monitored by the network access services providers and/or the content providers based on information in the directory. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299543 | Method and System for Providing Virtual Gateway Services - A broadband gateway configured to operate as a virtual broadband gateway may comprise a network portion and a local portion. The network portion is communicatively coupled to the local portion via a plurality of physical layer connections to one or more network access service providers. The virtual broadband gateway may acquire content from one or more providers, process the content for delivery to one or more local devices, and deliver the content to the one or more local devices. The remote portion may be implemented in one or more network devices. The network devices may be owned and/or operated by one or more content providers, one or more network access service providers, and/or one or more independent entities. Gateway functions performed by the network portion may comprise, for example, content downloading, content streaming, content authentication, data format conversion, service negotiation, service selection, data encryption, data decryption and/or data storage. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299544 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING BANDWIDTH BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for managing bandwidth by a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, broadband gateway may, upon receiving a request for content from a user of the communication device, present, via a graphical user interface, a message that offers a benefit to the user in exchange for deferring consumption of the content until a later time. The gateway may then deliver the content to the communication device at a time determined by a response to the message received from the communication device. The message may provide several times at which the content may be delivered and a corresponding benefit available for each of the times. The times may correspond to times at which it is expected there will be less traffic in the network over which the content is to be delivered. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299545 | CUSTOMIZED ACQUISITION OF CONTENT BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for customized acquisition of content by a broadband gateway are provided. A broadband gateway may be operable to determine options for acquiring particular content. The broadband gateway may be operable to rank the determined options. The ranking may be based on one or more characteristics of the options and based on user-specified criteria. The broadband gateway may be operable to select one of the options for acquiring the content based on results of the ranking. One or more of the options may be available via a first physical layer connection and one or more of the options may be available via a second physical layer connection. The gateway may rank the determined options based on attributes of one or more devices via which the particular content will be consumed. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299546 | Method and System for Optimizing Communication in a Home Network Via a Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a content request may be received by a broadband gateway from a device connected to the broadband gateway through a home network. The broadband gateway may select content that corresponds to the request from content that is available through a network access service provider and/or from other devices in the home network. The selection of the content corresponding to the request may be based on capability information of the device. The capability information may comprise display, audio reproduction, encoding, decoding, and/or storage capabilities, for example. The selection may be based on an optimization associated with a bandwidth to transfer the content within the home network and/or a power consumed to process the content. The content that is selected may be received and processed by the broadband gateway, and/or by another device in the home network, before being communicated to the device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299547 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING ENERGY COSTS UTILIZING A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for managing energy costs utilizing a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a broadband gateway may determine usage patterns for one or more electronic devices communicatively coupled to the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may control tasks performed and/or to be performed based on the patterns of use and based on a pricing structure for energy supplied to the broadband gateway and/or the one or more electronic devices. Controlling tasks to be performed may comprise, for example, scheduling performance of the tasks. Exemplary tasks may comprise downloading multimedia content and configuring a state of operation of the one or more electronic devices. In an exemplary embodiment of the invention, a state of operation of the electronic device(s) may be configurable between a plurality of states comprising: a powered-off state, a standby state, and a powered-on state. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299548 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PORTING GATEWAY FUNCTIONALITY ASSOCIATED WITH A USER FROM A FIRST GATEWAY TO ONE OR MORE OTHER GATEWAYS - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may operate as a home gateway to negotiate with one or more visited gateways, a common authorized service area or domain (ASD) for providing services to the visited gateways. The home gateway may establish one or more corresponding communication links with the visited gateways based on the negotiated common ASD. The home gateway communicates corresponding content for the services to the visited gateways via the established corresponding communication links. The home gateway communicates information about gateway functionalities required for the services to the visited gateways. The visited gateways may port gateway functionalities forwarded by the home gateway, or may perform gateway functionality conversion to support the services, which may be acquired via the home gateway and/or the visited gateways from networks. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299549 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENERGY EFFICIENT BASED SERVICE OPTIMIZATION BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway may provide energy efficient management of services delivered to a home network. The energy efficient service management may enable reducing and/or enhancing energy consumption within access networks utilized during the managed services. The energy management service may comprise determining energy-related costs associated with providing services, based on use of external physical layer connections. The services may then be provisioned based on energy-related costs associated with the services. The service provisioning may comprise controlling and/or adjusting bitrate selection, physical (PHY) layer selection, and/or service level agreement (SLA) parameters. The broadband gateway may negotiate with the network access service providers during the provisioning of the services. This may comprise negotiating and/or configuring micro-leases for use in providing the services. A dedicated energy messaging protocol may be utilized for communicating by the broadband gateway, and/or by network access service and/or content providers during the energy efficient service management. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299550 | UTILIZING A GATEWAY FOR BROKERING AND/OR ARBITRATING SERVICE CONSUMPTION OPTIONS - A broadband gateway may provision services requested in a home network managed and/or serviced by the broadband gateway by a user associated with the broadband gateway, based on determination of criteria related to the requested service. The requested service may comprise obtaining and/or delivering content for consumption by one or more of a plurality of devices serviced by the broadband gateway in the home network. The criteria may comprise device related data, user preference related information, service performance related parameters, payment related information, and/or energy use related information. The broadband gateway may store information associated with the determined criteria. Provisioning requested services may comprise negotiating with at least one remote resource that may support at least a portion of the requested service. The negotiation may comprise brokering and/or arbitrating a plurality of options of remote resources utilized for providing the at least a portion of the requested service. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299606 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING SELECTED LAYERED VIDEO SERVICE VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which that enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may identify video layer information required for a layered video service based on video decoding capabilities and/or power profiles for the devices. The identified video layer information, comprising number of required layers and corresponding video formats such as 720P60, 1080i60 and/or 1080P60, may be communicated to the at least one network access service provider. A base layer video and one or more enhancement layer videos, generated via scalable coding based on the communicated identified video layer information, may be received from the at least one corresponding network access service provider. The received base layer video and enhancement layer videos are selectively provided to the devices for the requested layered video service based on the corresponding video decoding capabilities and/or power profiles. | 12-08-2011 |
20110300825 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING EMERGENCY RELATED SERVICES VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for providing emergency-related services via a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a broadband gateway may receive one or more emergency notification messages, generate one or more alert messages in response to the received emergency notification message(s), and communicate the alert message(s) to the electronic device(s). Accordingly, each of the one or more alert messages may be formatted for communication to a corresponding one or corresponding ones of the one or more electronic devices. The emergency notification message(s) may be generated by an emergency services provider in response to an emergency. The emergency services provider may send a notification message to the broadband gateway device upon determining that the broadband gateway device, a person associated with the broadband gateway device, and/or a location associated with the broadband gateway device meets particular criteria. | 12-08-2011 |
20110301963 | Method and System for Providing Energy Related Information Associated with Gateway Connected Devices - A broadband gateway which enables communication with a plurality of devices may be operable to determine an energy consumption metric associated with each application usage in each of the devices. The broadband gateway may handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The energy consumption metric and/or related information may be communicated to a user who may be associated with one or more of the plurality of devices. The energy consumption metric and/or the related information may be communicated to the user via a graphical user interface (GUI), a text-based interface, an audio interface and/or an electronic program guide (EPG). The broadband gateway may offer a credit and/or a reward based on a selection of a choice of consuming the application with reduced energy consumption. The broadband gateway may generate alerts based on monitored energy consumption and a monthly threshold. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302010 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING INCENTIVIZED BENEFITS IN A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for providing incentivized benefits in a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, credits may be added to a subscriber account associated with a broadband gateway based on input provided by a user of an electronic device in communication with the broadband gateway, and it may be determined whether to provide services and/or content via the broadband gateway based on a number of credits in the subscriber account. The input may comprise, for example, feedback regarding content consumed via the broadband gateway, and responses to surveys, polls, or questionnaires presented via the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may be operable to handle a plurality of physical layer connections to a corresponding plurality of network access service providers. The broadband gateway may be operable to communicate the user input to a provider associated with the subscriber account via one or more of the physical layer connections. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302068 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MULTI-TIER BILLING FOR DOWNLOADING CONTENT VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway may be used to provide multi-tier billing services in a home network. The broadband gateway may determine whether a transaction requested from the broadband gateway is performable in a plurality of steps, may associate a charge and/or a credit with each of the determined plurality of steps, and may perform the requested transaction based on the associated charges and/or credits. The broadband gateway may determine a plurality of cost combinations for performing the requested transaction based on the determined associated charges and/or credits, and may offer the generated plurality of cost combination for selection by user. The transaction may comprise obtaining content for consumption by devices serviced by the broadband gateway. In this regard, a charge and/or a credit may also be associated with one or more criteria associated with obtaining content. The broadband gateway may communicate with users during multi-tier billing services via a user interface. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302077 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for account maintenance via a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a subscriber associated with a gateway may have a plurality of subscriber accounts with a corresponding plurality of service/content providers. Information associated with the accounts may be stored in the gateway, and the gateway may present a user interface via which the subscriber may manage settings and balances associated with the accounts. The user interface may enable submitting a single payment such that funds from the single payment are applied to each of the accounts. Activity of the plurality of accounts may be displayed via the user interface. The gateway may be operable to monitor activity of one or more of the plurality of accounts. The gateway may be operable to generate one or more alerts based on the activity and based on criteria established for each of the plurality of accounts. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302248 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A BROADBAND GATEWAY FOR PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A broadband gateway may be used to provide peer-to-peer communications with other broadband gateways. One or more peer-to-peer connections may be configured with each of the other broadband gateway, for use in peer-to-peer communications, which may be utilized to communicate shared content among the broadband gateways. Users may receive incentives for participating in peer-to-peer communications, comprising sharing credits and/or reduced charges. The broadband gateway may track and/or aggregate sharing credits based on communication of shared content. Peer-to-peer connections may be configured using at least one physical layer connection utilized by the broadband gateway in communicating with corresponding access network service provider. Peer-to-peer connections may also be configured using direct connections and/or links between the broadband gateways. The broadband gateway may generate a directory for use in conjunction with peer-to-peer operations. The directory may be presented via a user interface. The broadband gateway may generate and/or communicate peer-to-peer related alerts. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302275 | Method and System for Matching Content Consumption Preference Via a Broadband Gateway - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices and handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service providers, may be operable to receive a request for content from a particular device of the plurality of devices. Content which corresponds to the request may be selected by the broadband gateway from content that may be available in one or more content sources, based on user preference information associated with a particular type of the content. The broadband gateway may receive the selected content from a selected content source of the one or more content sources for communication to the particular device. The broadband gateway may receive the selected content from a content provider and/or a network access service provider via broadcast communications and/or Internet communications. The selected content may also be received from a communication device via peer-to-peer communications. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302276 | ADAPTIVE MULTIMEDIA DELIVERY VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for adaptive multimedia delivery via a broadband gateway are provided. A broadband gateway may be operable to determine which one or more of a plurality of devices is communicatively coupled to the broadband gateway. Content may be requested from, and/or scheduled to be delivered to, one or more of the devices. The gateway may be operable to select a provider from which to request the content based on results of the determining. The provider may be selected based on a bandwidth of a link between the broadband gateway and the one or more devices to which the content is to be delivered. The gateway may be operable to select one of a plurality of versions of the content based on results of the determining and requesting the selected version of the content from the selected content provider. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302296 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING SECURE TRANSACTIONS VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway may be used to authorize transactions associated with one or more accounts, which may be associated with a user of the broadband gateway. The transaction may be handled by the broadband gateway. The authorizations may be performed based on information associated with the accounts, whose storage may be controlled by the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may block and/or terminate transactions failing authentication and/or validation, which may be performed based on the stored information. The transactions may be initiated within a network serviced by the broadband gateway. The transactions may also be initiated outside the serviced network. The stored information may comprise a user profile, which may comprise a plurality of settings for controlling and/or managing authorization performed by the broadband gateway. The user profiles may be configurable by users, wherein configuration may comprise initializing and/or modifying one or more of the transaction related settings. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302308 | Method and System for Providing User-Generated Content Via a Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a broadband gateway may be operable to handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may receive content and associated metadata through the at least one network access service provider. The broadband gateway may determine, based on the received metadata and on one or more rules associated with a user profile, whether to enable access to at least a portion of the received content by a device connected in a peer-to-peer configuration with the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may communicate to such device an indication that at least a portion of the received content is available for sharing. The metadata may comprise rating information, copyright information, language information, and privacy rules. The rating information may be modified based on information received by the broadband gateway from other users. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302309 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING POWER CONSUMPTION IN A HOME NETWORK VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Before allowing the devices to access content from the service provider, the broadband gateway may identify a device power profile for each of the devices, and a network power profile for the content to select a corresponding content delivery mechanism to optimize power consumption. The content may be communicated to the devices utilizing the corresponding selected content delivery mechanism. Depending on configuration, content transcoding may be performed at the broadband gateway and/or at the devices. The content may be burst downloaded and stored in a local storage to be consumed by the devices thereafter. Upon completion of download, the broadband gateway may shut down receiving components to save resources and power. The receiving components may be tuned on to receive additional content when needed. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302313 | Method and System for Utilizing a Gateway to Enable Peer-to-Peer Communications in Service Provider Networks - A broadband gateway may be operable to receive network topology information to enable peer-to-peer communications between a first communication device and a second communication device. The first communication device is communicatively coupled to the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may be operable to handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. A communication link which may bypass core layer network components and/or resources for enabling the peer-to-peer communications between the first communication device and the second communication device may be established by the broadband gateway, based on the received network topology information, a location of the first communication device and a location of the second communication device. The broadband gateway may establish the communication link to enable the peer-to-peer communications by marking traffic such as by inserting QinQ tags into traffic between the first communication device and the second communication device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302324 | CUSTOMIZED DELIVERY OF CONTENT BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for customized delivery of content by a broadband gateway are provided. A broadband gateway may be operable to determine one or more characteristics of acquired content. The gateway may be operable to determine, based on the determined characteristics and based attributes of one or more electronic devices that will be utilized for consuming the content, whether the acquired content may be compatible with the device(s). In instances that the acquired content is not compatible with the device(s), the gateway may transcode the acquired content to make it compatible with the device(s). The one or more characteristics may comprise an identity or a type of a provider associated with the acquired content, a quality of the acquired content, and/or power consumption associated with communicating the acquired content to a destination device, and/or power consumption associated with presenting or otherwise processing the acquired content on a destination device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302431 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING POWER CONSUMPTION UTILIZING INTER-GATEWAY COMMUNICATION - Aspects of a method and system for managing power consumption utilizing inter-gateway communication are provided. In this regard, a first broadband gateway residing in a first location may determine past, present, and/or expected power consumption of the first location. The gateway may receive, from one or more other broadband gateways residing in one or more other locations, information that enables determining past, present, and/or expected power consumption of the other location(s). The gateway may control power consumption of the first location by controlling a state of operation of devices residing in the first location. The gateway may determine aggregate power consumption of the first location and the other location(s). The gateway may control power consumption of the first location by enabling operation of one or more devices during periods of lower aggregate power consumption and disabling operation the devices during periods of higher aggregate power consumption. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302442 | Method and System for Combining and/or Blending Multiple Content From Different Sources in a Broadband Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a broadband gateway may receive different content from different sources, may combine the content to produce a combined content, and may communicate the combined content to a device connected to the broadband gateway. The content may be automatically and/or manually synchronized. The synchronization may be based on a clock signal received from the device, a clock signal from another device connected to the broadband gateway, and/or a clock signal received through one or more network access service providers. The content may be video image data and/or audio data. Moreover, user-generated content may be received and combined by the broadband gateway when in a peer-to-peer communication configuration with the source of the content. When more than two different content are received, the broadband gateway may be utilized to select which contents to combine. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302497 | Method and System for Supporting a User-Specified and Customized Interface for a Broadband Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a user interface application may be received by a broadband gateway and may be configured to generate a user interface for display in a display device. The user interface may be generated based on programming information and/or associated metadata received through one or more network access service providers. Each of the network access service providers may be handled by the broadband gateway through a corresponding physical layer access. More than one user interface application may be received by the broadband gateway. In such instances, the broadband gateway may enable the selection of one of the available user interface applications to generate the user interface. For each user interface application, the associated user interface that is generated may have a particular layout, visual characteristics, set of functions, and/or theme that is different from that of the other user interfaces. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302596 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRUSTED RATINGS FOR CONTENT CONSUMPTION VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for trusted ratings for content consumption via a broadband gateway are provided. A first broadband gateway may collect information regarding users of a first one or more electronic devices and information regarding content handled by the first broadband gateway. The first broadband gateway may utilize the collected information to generate ratings for content. The ratings may be customized for one or more users of the first electronic device(s). The first broadband gateway may be operable to restrict, promote, or otherwise govern access to content based on the generated ratings. The ratings may be generated based on criteria input by users of the first electronic device(s). The first electronic device(s) may be coupled to the first gateway. The first broadband gateway may also collect information from users of a second one or more electronic device(s) which may be coupled to a second broadband gateway. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302598 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTENT FILTERING IN A BROADBAND GATEWAY - Aspects of a method and system for content filtering in a broadband gateway are provided. In this regard, a broadband gateway may be operable to determine whether to allow access to content based on attributes of the content and based on one or more of: which of a plurality of electronic devices is attempting to access the content, sensor information identifying a user attempting to access the content, and a time at which a user is attempting to access the information. Attributes of the content may be determined by analyzing the content utilizing one or more pattern recognition techniques. The gateway may be operable to allow a first subset of the electronic devices to access the content during a first period of time, and allow a second subset of the electronic devices to access the content during a second period of time. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302612 | Method and System for Providing Channel Changes Via a Gateway - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices and handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider, may be operable to receive one or more programs in preview formats from one or more program sources. Each of the one or more programs may be specified in a list. The programs specified in the list may be from different program sources. The broadband gateway may process the received one or more programs in the preview formats for presentation to one or more of the plurality of devices. The processed one or more programs in the preview formats may be communicated by the broadband gateway to the one or more of the plurality of devices, via a programming guide, for program preview by one or more users during program selections from the list. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302620 | MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM SUPPORTING ADAPTIVE DIGITAL MEDIA PARAMETERS BASED ON END-USER VIEWING CAPABILITIES - Systems and methods that adapt media content are described. In one embodiment, a system may include, for example, a first communications device and a second communications device. The first communications device may be disposed in a first location and may be operatively coupled to a network. The second communications device may be disposed in a second location and may be operatively coupled to the network. The second communications device may receive a device profile relating to the first communications device, adapt media content based upon the device profile of the first communications device, and send the adapted media content to the first communications device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302624 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SECURE CONTENT DISTRIBUTION BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Security boundaries such as conditional access (CA) and/or digital right management (DRM) boundaries associated with the broadband gateway are identified based on security profiles associated with the plurality of devices and/or a service from networks. The identified security boundaries are utilized to determine or negotiate CA information for content access for the service. The received content may be distributed according to the determined CA information and the security profiles of the corresponding devices. The broadband gateway may be automatically and dynamically configured based on the identified security boundaries to secure content distribution to the devices. Content distribution security schemes, for example, super encryption, simul-crypt, IPSec and/or watermarking, may be selected by matching the CA information with corresponding device security profiles. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302632 | Method and System for Supporting Visitor Access Via a Broadband Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a broadband gateway may enable a guest or visitor to access content available to the broadband gateway. The content may be received by the broadband gateway through one or more of a plurality of network access service providers that may provide separate physical layer access to the broadband gateway. After a visitor's device is connected to the broadband gateway, the broadband gateway may classify the device. Based on the classification, the device may be authorized to access a portion of the content received. Once the authorization process is complete, the appropriate content may be made available and transferred to the device. The authorization process may include the authentication of a device identifier and/or a user identifier. The authorized access may be time-limited, but may be renewed or enabled when a request is received within a determined period of time. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302634 | PROVIDING SECURE COMMUNICATION AND/OR SHARING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway may manage confidential data associated with users in a home network managed and/or serviced by the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may store the user confidential data broadband gateway in a distributed manner, wherein the confidential data may be divided into a plurality of portions and stored separately in multiple storage locations or devices. When users authorize the transfer of the confidential data, all portions may be communicated to enable aggregating them such that the confidential data may be obtained. The user confidential data may be encrypted. The broadband gateway may securely communicate and/or share the user confidential user data. This may be achieved by tracking communication of the user confidential data, by using tags incorporated into the data. The broadband gateway may also ensure that communicated confidential data is rendered unusable under certain conditions, based on use for various timing tags for example. | 12-08-2011 |
20110302663 | Method and System for Securing a Home Domain From External Threats Received by a Gateway - A method and system are provided in which a broadband gateway may handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. The broadband gateway may receive content comprising an application through the at least one network access service provider and may store the content in a first portion of a memory. A software agent may be utilized to request the content and/or to store the received content in the first portion of the memory. The broadband gateway may execute the application after access by the application to a second portion of the memory is disabled. After the execution of the application is completed, access to the second portion of the memory may be enabled. In some instances, the application may be verified to determine whether it is secure for utilization and/or distribution. When verification fails, the application may be deleted. | 12-08-2011 |
20110306376 | MULTIMODE CONTROL DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES TO COMMUNICATION DEVICES THAT USE DIFFERING PROTOCOLS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A control device includes a first transceiver for communicating first control data with a first plurality of devices that utilize the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a first protocol, wherein the first transceiver utilizes the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with the first protocol. A second transceiver communicates second control data with a second plurality of devices that utilize the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a second protocol, wherein the second transceiver utilizes the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with the second protocol. A resource controller allocates resources of the millimeter wave frequency band to the first plurality of devices and the second plurality of devices based on the first control data and the second control data. | 12-15-2011 |
20110307618 | SECURE LEGACY MEDIA PERIPHERAL ASSOCIATION WITH AUTHENTICATION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for secure access and communication of information in a distributed media network is disclosed and includes detecting, at a first geographic location, when a media peripheral is communicatively coupled to at least one computing device at the first geographic location within the distributed media network. The media peripheral may be validated for use at the first geographic location using at least one identifier. The at least one identifier may be associated with the media peripheral. The at least one identifier may be used to facilitate communication by and/or to the media peripheral over the distributed media network. The at least one identifier associated with the media peripheral and at least one identifier of a user may be requested utilizing the media peripheral. The at least one identifier associated with the media peripheral is a serial number of the media peripheral. | 12-15-2011 |
20110307912 | CARD-BASED AND INDEPENDENT SERVER-BASED BILLING AND AUTHORIZATION SYSTEM IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system for communicating multimedia information in a communication network includes at least a first communication device deployed in a first geographic location and coupled to the communication network, and a card carrying information related to one or more user-defined selections of information content. When the card is communicatively coupled to the first communication device, the card allows the first communication device to access at least a first portion of the one or more user-defined selections of information content. The first portion is located at a second communication device deployed at the first geographic location. The card also allows the first communication device to access at least a second portion of the one or more user-defined selections of information content. The second portion is located at a third communications device deployed at a second geographic location and coupled to the communication network. | 12-15-2011 |
20110310806 | PROVIDING ACCESS DEPENDENT SERVICES VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system supporting controlled access to multimedia information and media-related services, the system including a gateway communicatively coupled to a broadband network and at least one wireless interface, the gateway capable of selectively communicating multimedia information among the at least one wireless interface and the broadband network, and of communicating with a plurality of access devices via the at least one wireless interface. The gateway is also capable of selecting one of a plurality of access privilege tiers based upon identification information received from one of the plurality of access devices. The identification information includes a plurality of identity data pieces. Each of the plurality of identify data pieces differs from another of the plurality of identity data pieces. Access to each of the plurality of access privilege tiers requires a different degree of authentication that is represented by a different combination of the plurality of identity data pieces. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310995 | Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery - Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery. Respective media or multimedia elements are selectively and respectively encoded and/or transcoded. Such respective and selective processing of different media elements provides for their unbundled and independent communication to one or more other devices. In one instance, different respective overlays of a display (e.g., a computer, TV, PDA display, etc.) are respectively and selectively transcoded and/or encoded to generate different respective streams that may each be handled differently as a function of any number of parameters (e.g., media element type, content, communication channel characteristic, source proximity, priority, etc.). Different types of media elements include photo/image, video, graphics, text, audio, picture-in-picture, two-dimensional (2D), three-dimensional (3D), and/or other types of media elements as may be included within a given configuration of a display. Each respective encoding and/or transcoding may be particularly optimized or tailored for a given media element type. | 12-22-2011 |
20110312421 | APPARATUS FOR POSITION DETECTION USING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - An apparatus includes a transmitter and a receiver device, which includes a receiver section and a processing module. The transmitter transmits a high carrier frequency signal. The receiver section includes first and second antennas that have an antenna radiation relationship for receiving the high carrier frequency signal. A receiver module of the receiver section determines first and second signal properties of the received high carrier frequency signal. The processing module determines a position of the receiver device with respect to the transmitter based on the first and second signal properties and maps the position to a coordinate system. | 12-22-2011 |
20110321099 | Television Channel Selection Canvas - A channel selection canvas for display on a video display device is disclosed. The video display device can be a television, a laptop computer, or personal digital assistant device. The channel selection canvas allows a user to preview and choose video signals to be watched. The channel selection canvas displays a set of television channel video thumbnails, which can be full motion video, slow motion video or sampled video snapshots. A channel selection canvas can also display video thumbnails for security cameras, baby monitors, video phones and the like. A channel selection canvas generator that generates channel selection canvases is also disclosed. The channel selection canvas generator can reside within a television, set top box or similar video processing device. | 12-29-2011 |
20120009899 | NETWORK OR ACCESS POINT HANDOFF BASED UPON HISTORICAL PATHWAY - A device for handing off a wireless connection can include a receiver configured to receive a communication signal from a wireless device within a first wireless cell, a first processor configured to determine communication information regarding the first wireless cell, and a storage unit configured to store directional information regarding the first wireless cell. In addition, the device can have a transmitter configured to transmit the directional information to a wireless device located within the first wireless cell, and a second processor configured to provide wireless connection to the wireless device through the receiver and the transmitter. The second processor can Handoff the wireless connection to a second wireless cell. | 01-12-2012 |
20120019853 | PRINTER RESOURCE SHARING IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system providing printer resource sharing in a communication network includes a first communication device at a first location, communicatively coupled to a printer resource and to a second communication device at a second location. The first communication device may authenticate the second communication device, and subsequent to the authentication, may enable printing of information content on the printer resource, at a request of a user of the second communication device. The first communication device may authenticate the second communication device based on a signal received from the second communication device. The first and second communication devices and the printer resource may be communicatively coupled via a communication network. The communication network may include a broadband access headend, a cable infrastructure, a satellite network infrastructure, a digital subscriber line (DSL) infrastructure, an Internet infrastructure, an intranet or wired infrastructure, closed communication infrastructure, local area network, and/or a wireless infrastructure. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020270 | SIMULCASTING OR MULTICASTING OF MULTIMEDIA CALL SESSIONS IN A LAN/WLAN/PAN VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A method and system for simulcasting multimedia information via a broadband access gateway and a wireless wide area network, is disclosed. An access device such as, for example, a mobile multimedia handset engaged in a call served by a wireless wide area network may migrate to within the coverage area of an associated broadband access gateway with a wireless interface. The wireless wide area network may simulcast call content to the broadband access gateway via a broadband network. A user in the proximity of the broadband access gateway may be notified of the simulcasting of the call, and may elect to continue the call via a WLAN/PAN-enabled wireless handset or other access device that is compatible with the wired and/or wireless interfaces of the broadband access gateway. | 01-26-2012 |
20120030196 | MEDIA SEARCH ENGINE FOR A PERSONAL MEDIA NETWORK - A system providing search functionality supporting the exchange and consumption of media is disclosed. The searching of media on storage belonging to any of a pre-defined group of users of a personal media network is provided. In addition, media stored on designated servers may also be included in a search. The media stored may include audio, still images, video, and data. A user may search the stored media using a number of criteria including the time period of the media, the type of device, and the type of media. The system also provides support for the search of one or more media peripherals, which may be searched when the media peripherals are communicatively coupled to the system. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033548 | CLIENT QoS BASED CONNECTION SESSION JOGGING - A communication device, comprising communication interface circuitry, processing circuitry coupled to the communication interface circuitry, and a user interface coupled to the processing circuitry, interacts with a remote device in a communication infrastructure that supports multiple possible communication pathways such as first and second communication pathways between the communication device and the remote device. A data exchange relating to at least a voice delivery service is initiated by the processing circuitry over the first communication pathway. A jog input indication is generated during the data exchange via the user interface in response to a user input, and delivered to the processing circuitry. The jog input indication is indicative of dissatisfaction of the user with ongoing performance of the first communication pathway in the data exchange. In response to the jog input indication received, the processing circuitry switches the data exchange from the first communication pathway to the second communication pathway. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033644 | MULTI-DIMENSIONAL NETWORK RESOURCE ALLOCATION - A method for allocating communication resources for communication includes, in a first communication system including a plurality of transmitters, allocating frequency and time bandwidth for communication with a second communication system; determining a first portion of the plurality of transmitters for communication with the second communication system based, at least in part, on information obtained from the second communication system; and allocating the first portion of the plurality of transmitters for communication with the second communication system utilizing the allocated frequency and time bandwidth. A second portion of the plurality of transmitters may be allocated for a purpose other than communication with the second communication system utilizing the allocated frequency and time bandwidth. The allocating of the second portion of the plurality of transmitters includes allocating the second portion of the plurality of transmitters for communication with a third communication system utilizing the allocated frequency and time bandwidth. | 02-09-2012 |
20120034958 | MULTIPLE NETWORK WAKE-UP - In a mobile communication device, a method for determining the existence of one or more pending messages, the method including exiting from a power-save mode of operation, in which the mobile communication device does not receive messages; selecting for communication, one of a plurality of communication paths, the selecting based on at least one of a plurality of conditions associated with the one of the plurality of communication paths; and attempting to communicate over the one of the plurality of communication paths to check for pending messages. The plurality of communication paths includes at least a first and a second communication path. The attempting to communicate over the one of the plurality of communication paths includes attempting to communicate over the first communication path to check for the pending messages by communicating with a message server over the first communication path. | 02-09-2012 |
20120042348 | Utilizing A Replacement Pathway For Lost Packet Delivery During Media Reception In A Set-Top Box (STB) - A replacement pathway in an STB is utilized to determine loss of packets and delivery error during reception of media broadcasts, and to retrieve replacement data from one or more replacement media servers. The retrieval of the replacement data is performed during playback of the received media broadcasts. The communication of media broadcast incorporates delays to accommodate the retrieval of replacement data. Alternatively, received broadcast media streams are buffered to enable retrieval of replacement data and to provide seamless presentation of media content in the media broadcasts. The replacement media server performs access authentication operations during replacement data retrieval. The replacement media server is accessed via markup language, for example, HTML and/or XML, based interfaces and/or dedicated APIs. The replacement media server may deny replacement data based on plurality of service criteria such as acceptance and denial criteria, which may comprise allowable bandwidth and/or error rates. | 02-16-2012 |
20120047535 | Streaming transcoder with adaptive upstream & downstream transcode coordination - Streaming transcoder with adaptive upstream and downstream transcode coordination. A real-time transcoding environment is operative such that scalable video coding (SVC) is implemented to operate both upstream and downstream directions with respect to a middling device or transcoder such that the middling device or transcoder asked to coordinate upstream SVC with downstream SVC. Such upstream/downstream SVC coordination may also employ local considerations such as processing resources, available memory, etc. of the middling device or transcoder. Also, characteristics associated with one or more other devices, communication links, communication networks, etc. may be used to direct such adaptation. Moreover, control and/or feedback signaling between respective devices may also be used to assist in the adaptive operation of such a real-time transcoding environment. Generally speaking, such coordination between upstream SVC and downstream SVC is performed automatically in a multipoint fashion considering local and/or remote characteristic(s) associated with the overall communication system. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057580 | Method And System For 60 GHZ Antenna Adaptation And User Coordination Based On Base Station Beacons - A first device wirelessly transmits and/or receives swept 60 GHz beacon signals to and/or from other devices. Beacon signals indicate angle of reception and/or relative direction with respect to other devices. Knowing reception angle and/or relative direction enables beamforming of adaptive and/or steered antennas for communication. 60 GHz beacons are swept over one or more angles. Identity information, configuration information, timing information and/or spatial information are communicated via 60 GHz beacons. Control and/or coordination information are transmitted and/or received. Reception angle, relative direction and/or distance between devices are determined based on 60 GHz beacons. Adaptive and/or steered antennas used for communication are initialized and/or undergo beamforming for 60 GHz, based on the angle, direction and/or distance between devices. Devices are mobile and/or stationary. Devices comprise mobile stations, base stations, wireless phones, access points, set-top-boxes, computers, game consoles, video servers, video recorders, video playback devices, residential gateways and internet browsing devices. | 03-08-2012 |
20120066221 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CREATING A PERSONALIZED JOURNAL BASED ON COLLECTING LINKS TO INFORMATION AND ANNOTATING THOSE LINKS FOR LATER RETRIEVAL - A system and method is provided for handling data in wireless communication devices where data may be captured and linked to a personal journal via indexing and mapping of context data tags abstracted from captured data. The captured data may be retrieved by matching a query to one or more context data tags indexed and mapped to the personal journal. A user preference utilizing one or more of the context data tags linked to the personal journal may facilitate captured data retrieval. The captured data may include multimedia data of an event pre-tagged with indexed information such as user ID, time, date, location and environmental condition or optionally one or more user's biometric data in response to the event. The pre-tagged captured data may be stored in the local host device or transferred to a remote host or storage for later retrieval or post processing. | 03-15-2012 |
20120066308 | DIGITAL PERSONAL ASSISTANCE VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting access, coordination, modification, updating, and management of multiple sources of multimedia information resident on a plurality of access device is disclosed. A broadband access gateway may support applications that perform user services involving multiple sources of multimedia information across a network by acting as a focal point for access to multimedia information related to the applications. Using information that identifies such sources, the broadband access gateway may coordinate modification of one or more multimedia information sources based upon the content of other related sources of multimedia information. One such application may include the coordination of calendars for the planning of a meeting involving multiple participants. A representative embodiment of the present invention may identify available meeting dates and times, and the placement of reservations for appropriate travel accommodations using services accessible to the broadband access gateway via a broadband network. | 03-15-2012 |
20120066754 | SECURE MEDIA PERIPHERAL ASSOCIATION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for establishing secure access to a media peripheral in a home via a node in a communication network includes acquiring by the node, security data associated with the media peripheral; searching by the node, for a previously acquired security data associated with a location of previous operation of the media peripheral; and communicating between the node and the media peripheral, information associated with the media peripheral, while the media peripheral is located in the home, when the previously acquired security data is not found. The security data is a digital certificate. The security data may be read from the media peripheral. The security data may be transferred to a media exchange server coupled to the communication network. The acquired security data may be authenticated prior to the searching. At least one identifier may be established to facilitate communication of the media peripheral over the communication network. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069799 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS SERVICES ADVERTISING VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting the advertising of extended network access to multimedia services via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may determine available media-related services, and may transmit information about those services to an access device that may comprise, for example, a mobile multimedia handset, a personal digital assistant, and a personal computer. The access device may notify a user of the availability of the media-related services using visual and/or audible means. The gateway may receive from the access device capability and/or subscriber related information, and the gateway may transmit service information based upon the capability and/or subscriber-related information. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071187 | CONTROL DEVICE FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES TO COMMUNICATION DEVICES THAT USE DIFFERING PROTOCOLS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A control device includes at least one communication interface for communicating first control data with at least one first communication device that utilizes the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a first protocol and further for communicating second control data with at least one second communication device that utilizes the millimeter wave frequency band in accordance with a second protocol. A resource controller allocates resources of the millimeter wave frequency band to the at least one first communication device and the at least one second communication device based on the first control data and the second control data. | 03-22-2012 |
20120072954 | PORTABLE MEDIA PROCESSING UNIT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for communication includes performing by one or more circuits integrated within a single chip in a first communication device, functions that include storing media and meta-data corresponding to the stored media. The storing may occur at a first location of the first communication device. A channel guide including representations of the stored media that can be selected for presentation on a television in a second location, may be caused based on the meta-data corresponding to the stored media when the first communication device is communicatively coupled to a second communication device at the second location. In response to receiving a selection via the presented channel guide, at least one media file corresponding to the received selection may be displayed based on the meta-data corresponding to the stored media, on one or both of the television and/or a media player in the second location. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076123 | SIMULTANEOUSLY MULTI-NETWORKED HANDHELD MULTIMEDIA GATEWAYS - A user may simultaneously access sources of multimedia information via multiple wireless networks using a handheld multimedia gateway. A user interface may support the selection of information services that are each provided separate, but possibly overlapping, viewing spaces. Circuitry in the multimedia gateway manages the operation of the multiple wireless communication paths, and enables the display of visual information through two or more display devices. The user may customize the display, the size, and the location within a display of regions in which the information is presented. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076431 | APPLICATION BASED ADAPTIVE ENCODING - A system and method for encoding dynamic image information for an image generated by a computer application executing on a processor. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise determining a first set of information describing a reference image. A second set of information may be determined for describing an image, wherein the second set of information comprises information indicative of movement between the image and the reference image. For example, a set of primary movement directions may be determined based at least in part on the computer application generating the image. Such set of primary movement directions may be utilized for analyzing the image relative to the reference images. The difference between the image and the reference image may, for example, be analyzed using at least one of the set of primary movement directions. A movement direction may, for example, be utilized to describe the image. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077459 | CONTROLLING AND ENHANCING HANDOFF BETWEEN WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - A wireless device includes at least one processor operable to transmit authentication information to one of a plurality network devices associated with a first wireless hotspot; and establish an access session with the one of the plurality of access devices. Information related to the access session is saved in memory accessible by a plurality of wireless access providers. When the wireless device moves from a coverage area of the first wireless hotspot to a coverage area of the one of the plurality of wireless access providers, the saved information facilitates access to the one of the plurality of wireless access providers by the wireless device. The plurality of network devices includes a plurality of access points. The access session is established upon authentication of the wireless device. The wireless device is authenticated based on the authentication information. The memory comprises a shared memory register. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079078 | QUALITY OF SERVICE SUPPORT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for controlling communication of media content by a network device in a communication network includes providing, by the network device, a plurality of quality of service options corresponding to at least one media file selected for communication to a remote user via a communication channel; receiving a quality of service selection specifying at least one of the plurality of quality of service options; and communicating the at least one media file to the remote user utilizing the received quality of service selection. The providing may include displaying, by the network device, the plurality of quality of service options. At least a portion of specified parameters may be transferred to a first communication device coupled to the communication network. At least a portion of the communication channel may be configured by a second device utilizing the transferred at least a portion of the specified parameters. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079112 | Method And System For Enabling Rendering Of Electronic Media Content Via A Secure Ad Hoc Network Configuration Utilizing A Handheld Wireless Communication Device - A handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) establishes an ad hoc network comprising interconnected networks for a user. The HWCD gains access to content on a first device and controls communication of the content from the first device via the HWCD to a second device. The HWCD enables the second device to consume the content. The content may be streamed from the first device via the HWCD to the second device. The first device is a service provider network device or other network device. The access may be authenticated and/or secure. Secure access to the content is extended from the first device to the second device. The ad hoc network is configured and/or reconfigured until communication is complete. The HWCD comprises multiple wireless interfaces. The ad hoc network comprises a PAN, WLAN, WAN and/or cellular network. The HWCD may hand-off among base stations during communication of the content. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079536 | PARALLEL TELEVISION BASED MEDIA INTERACTION - A control device for interacting with a television system that displays media information. The control device is adapted to cause a change in an audio and/or a video portion of the media information on receiving an input from a user. The control device may further, for example, be adapted to govern actions of elements selected from the media information. At least one module is adapted to receive a movement selection from the user. The at least one module may also be adapted to send a control signal directing application of a movement corresponding to the movement selection to an element from the media information. The at least one module may further be adapted to display supplemental media information that guides the user to enter the movement selection. The control device may, for example, be adapted to interact with the Internet, which may provide audiovisual streams to the television system. | 03-29-2012 |
20120079600 | MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM SUPPORTING DIFFERENT MEDIA FORMATS VIA SERVER-BASED TRANSCODING - A method for processing media content includes receiving, at a second communications device communicatively coupled to a network at a first geographic location, from a first wireless mobile communications device communicatively coupled to the second communications device at the first geographic location, a device profile of the first wireless mobile communications device. The device profile received from the first wireless mobile communications device and media content may be sent to a server communicatively coupled to the network at a second geographic location. Media content may be received from the server, where the media content has been reformatted based on the device profile. The reformatted media content may be transmitted to the first wireless mobile communications device. The received device profile of the first wireless mobile communication device may be stored. | 03-29-2012 |
20120127885 | Multiple Independent Pathway Communications - A system and method for utilizing multiple independent communication pathways for communication. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise receiving a first signal directly from a first communication network, where the first signal communicates a first representation of a unit of information. A second signal may be received from a second communication network, where the second signal communicates a second representation of the unit of information. The received first and second signals may be processed to determine the first and second representations of the unit of information respectively. An indication of reliability may be determined from the second signal. The indication of reliability and the second representation of the unit of information may be used to re-determine the first representation of the unit of information. | 05-24-2012 |
20120128063 | CHANNEL ADAPTIVE VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that transmits a video signal to a remote device over at least one communications channel wherein the video signal is transmitted as at least one separate video layer stream chosen from, an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A control module determines at least one channel characteristic of the at least one channel and chooses the at least one separate video layer stream based on the at least one channel characteristic of the at least one channel. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129533 | HANDOFF OF A MULTIMEDIA CALL SESSION USING BACKGROUND NETWORK SCANNING - A method and system supporting handoff of a multimedia call session using background network scanning is disclosed. A mobile multimedia handset may engage in the exchange of a multimedia information stream via a first wireless network, and may sniff a portion of radio frequency spectrum for a second wireless network. Information about available services and network quality of service for the second network may be received by querying the second wireless network or from advertising by the second wireless network. Hand-off between the two networks may be based upon the results of the comparison and one or more user-defined criteria, and the handoff may be synchronized according to predefined events in the stream of multimedia information. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129606 | MULTI-MODE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH MOTION SENSOR AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A mobile communication device includes a motion sensor for generating motion signals in response to motion of the mobile communication device. A motion data generation module generates motion data based on the motion signals. At least one transceiver sends the motion data to a game device in a gaming mode of operation and transceives wireless telephony data with a wireless telephony network in a telephony mode of operation. | 05-24-2012 |
20120157111 | Dynamic Mimo Resource Allocation During a Single Communication - A system and method is provided for dynamic allocation of Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) communication resources during a single communication. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise communicating information using a first set of MIMO communication resources. While communicating the information, the system can determine, based on a monitored energy supply, to continue communicating the information using a second set of MIMO communication resources different from the first set. The communication continues using the second set of MIMO communication resources. Another aspect of the present invention may comprise determining to continue communicating the information using a second set of MIMO communication resources based on availability of communication resources of a second MIMO communication system receiving the communicated information. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157120 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR 60 GHZ LOCATION DETERMINATION AND COORDINATION OF WLAN/WPAN/GPS MULTIMODE DEVICES - Within a local region, information may be communicated between two or more wireless multimode communication devices (WMCD) comprising 60 GHz band and lower frequency band wireless interfaces. Spatial relationships between devices may vary. The 60 GHz interface may handle location determination operations and data transfers. The lower frequency band may support WPAN, WLAN and may handle coordination of communications and data transfers. The WMCDs may be coupled with a network. Antennas may be directional. Moreover, the spatial orientation of the antennas may be dynamically modified or swept across a specified angle. Furthermore, intelligent and/or adaptive antenna systems may be utilized. The WMCDs may utilize a position and/or time reference system to aid in location determination operations. | 06-21-2012 |
20120158916 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED INFRASTRUCTURE FOR STREAMING DATA VIA MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS - Methods and systems for distributed infrastructure for streaming data via multiple access points. Aspects of one method may include apportioning multimedia information among a plurality of transmitting devices based on feedback channel information received from a destination receiving device by, for example, a transmission controller device. The transmitting devices may transmit the multimedia information to the destination receiving device. A transmitting device that may not be apportioned multimedia information may transmit a probing signal. The destination receiving device may generate feedback channel information for a transmitting device, for example, based on the multimedia information or the probing signal received from the respective transmitting device. The apportioning of the multimedia information may be dynamically adjusted based on updated feedback channel information received from the destination receiving device. | 06-21-2012 |
20120165033 | DYNAMICALLY SPLITTING JOBS ACROSS MULTIPLE AGNOSTIC PROCESSORS IN WIRELESS SYSTEM - Dynamically splitting jobs in wireless system between agnostic processor may comprise evaluating a job that a wireless mobile communication device may be requested to perform. The wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may evaluate a requested job to determine if one or more tasks may be sent to a remote device. The WMC device may consider such factors as information pertaining to the WMC device itself, information relating to the connection between the devices, and/or information pertaining to the remote device. This information may comprise such data as power availability in the wireless mobile communication device, processing load in the WMC device, processing and/or storage capabilities of the remote device, and characteristics of the connectivity between the two devices. | 06-28-2012 |
20120172056 | METHOD OF DETERMINING OPTIMAL CELL CONFIGURATION BASED UPON DETERMINED DEVICE LOCATION - A configuration device for configuring a wireless device within a wireless cell can include a receiving unit configured to receive a request message from a wireless device within a wireless cell. In addition, the configuration device can include a first processing unit configured to determine location information of the wireless device, and a second processing unit configured to determine a communication capacity of the wireless device, and to estimate a communication requirement based on the request message. Furthermore, the configuration device can have a transmitting unit configured to transmit optimal information to the wireless device with respect to the request message. | 07-05-2012 |
20120177197 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR SCRAMBLING LAYERED VIDEO STREAMS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into an independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream that requires the independent video layer for decoding. A scrambling module scrambles the independent video layer stream to produce a scrambled independent video layer stream and leaves the first dependent video layer stream unscrambled. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182955 | Multi-Network Shared Phy Layer - A system and method is provided for processing a physical (“PHY”) layer signal. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise receiving a PHY layer signal, analyzing a non-content characteristic of the PHY layer signal, and determining a communication protocol associated with the PHY layer signal. The PHY layer signal may be processed according to the communication protocol to obtain a processed PHY layer signal. In one embodiment, when the communication protocol is a first communication protocol, the PHY layer signal may be processed according to the first communication protocol. When the communication protocol is a second communication protocol, the PHY layer signal may be processed according to the second communication protocol. The processed PHY layer signal may be outputted. | 07-19-2012 |
20120189065 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING FOR FAST CHANNEL CHANGE AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into an independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream based on a motion vector data or grayscale and color data. | 07-26-2012 |
20120190308 | TRANSCEIVER WITH PLURAL SPACE HOPPING PHASED ARRAY ANTENNAS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless transceiver includes an antenna array that transmits an outbound RF signal containing outbound data to remote transceivers and that receives an inbound RF signal containing inbound data from the remote RF transceivers, wherein the antenna array is configurable based on a control signal. An antenna configuration controller generates the control signal to configure the antenna array to hop among a plurality of radiation patterns based on a hopping sequence. An RF transceiver section generates the outbound RF signal based on the outbound data and that generates the inbound data based on the inbound RF signal. In one configuration, a switching section selectively couples a selected one of the antennas in the array to the RF transceiver section, based on the control signal. In another configuration, the RF transceiver section includes an RF section for each antenna in the array. | 07-26-2012 |
20120190349 | Method and System for Timely Delivery of Multimedia Content Via a Femtocell - Aspects of a method and system for timely delivery of multimedia content via a femtocell are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive data via an upstream path and transmit data via a downstream path. One of the upstream path and downstream path may comprise a cellular path and the other may comprise a non-cellular path. One or both of the upstream path and the downstream path may be audio video bridging (AVB) paths. Data may be stored in the femtocell based on timing characteristics of one or both of the upstream path and the downstream path. Data may be delivered to the femtocell utilizing best effort delivery and the data may be forwarded by the femtocell with guaranteed quality of service. Resources in the femtocell may be reserved and/or synchronized, utilizing AVB protocols, for communication of one or more data streams. | 07-26-2012 |
20120192219 | PREVENTING A NON-HEAD END BASED SERVICE PROVIDER FROM SENDING MEDIA TO A MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM - Systems and methods that prevent unauthorized access in a communications network are provided. In one embodiment, a system that prevents unauthorized access to a network device may include, for example, a network device and a headend. The headend may be coupled to a communications network. The network device may be deployed in a home environment and may be communicatively coupled to the communications network via the headend. The headend may be adapted, for example, to determine whether a request to access the network device is authorized. | 07-26-2012 |
20120196553 | POWER MANAGEMENT OF RADIO TRANSCEIVER ELEMENTS - A radio receiver includes a power control module for selectively powering down and powering up radio receiver elements in between known communication periods according to one aspect of the present invention. According to a second aspect of the invention, the radio receiver operates in a low power mode of operation and periodically “sniffs” to determine whether an access point has messages or communication signals to transmit to it. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196567 | Mobile Communication Device Providing Communication Pathway Determination Assistance - A system and method in a mobile communication device for providing assistance to a user in determining a communication pathway. A system may comprise processor-executable instructions, that when executed by a processor, cause a mobile communication device that supports a communication type over multiple networks to access availability information stored in a remote database for determining available networks among the multiple networks for performing the communication type, determine the available networks using the availability information, provide user assistance for determining a selected network among the available networks for the communication type, and perform the communication type using the selected network. | 08-02-2012 |
20120196574 | EXTENDED CALL HANDLING FUNCTIONALITY USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information are disclosed. Multimedia information exchanged by an associated access device and a gateway. The access device may request for the multimedia information to be recorded during a call, request retrieval of the multimedia information, and playback the multimedia information. The gateway may store the received multimedia information locally or may communicate the multimedia information to storage. The gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available. | 08-02-2012 |
20120207057 | System and Method for Providing a Wireless Access Point (WAP) Having Multiple Integrated Transceivers for Use in a Hybrid Wired/Wireless Network - The method may include determining a protocol associated with a communication signal for an access point. A compatible processor may be allocated and selected from a pool of available processors and subsequently utilized to process the communication signal. In one aspect of the invention, a processor may be made compatible by updating it with compatible protocol code that may be used for processing the communication signal. The compatible protocol code may be downloaded to the processor from a memory. The processor may associate a particular protocol code with a particular portion of the memory. Accordingly, the protocol code may be retrieved from the memory based on the association. The processor may be a digital signal processor (DSP), which may be adapted to process 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and Bluetooth protocols, for example. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207134 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a handoff has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs. | 08-16-2012 |
20120210376 | USING PROGRAM CLOCK REFERENCES TO ASSIST IN TRANSPORT OF VIDEO STREAM TO WIRELESS DEVICE - Processing a video stream using upon Program Clock References (PCRs) contained therein in preparation for transmission to a wireless device. Operation includes receiving video frames of the video stream, buffering the video frames, and extracting PCRs from at least some of the video frames of the video stream. Operation further includes, based upon at least the values of the PCRs, determining transmission parameters, and transmitting video frames of the video stream to the wireless device according to the transmission parameters. Operation may further include determining a round trip delay of transmissions to the wireless device and acknowledgements from the wireless device, adjusting PCRs of at least some video frames of the video stream based upon the round trip delay, and transmitting the video frames of the video stream to the wireless device. | 08-16-2012 |
20120212519 | Adaptive Control of Display Characteristics of Pixels of a LCD Based on Video Content - Determining pixel behavior type of a pixel or a group of pixels of a LCD and triggering adjustment in drive power of the pixel or the group of pixels based on the pixel behavior type. The pixel behavior type indicates relative motion of areas on the LCD in a video. A pixel behavior determination module directs one or more selected pixels of the LCD to be driven relative slower or faster based upon content of video that the selected pixels display. Operations include identifying an active window from a plurality of windows corresponding to a plurality of applications running on the host device and setting the drive power of those pixels that correspond to the active window based on speed of a video displayed on the active window. Operation may also include adapting LCD drive power on a pixel by pixel basis based upon user input and/or remaining battery life. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214543 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL FREQUENCY BAND CONVERSION - A wireless device includes processing circuitry and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver section. The processing circuitry determines a set of information signals for receipt, the set of information signals carried by a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal having a plurality of information signal frequency bands. The processing circuitry determines a shift frequency based upon the determination. the RF receiver section receives the RF MFBMS signal and down-converts the RF MFBMS signal by the shift frequency to produce a baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) MFBMS signal. The processing circuitry then extracts data from the set of information signals of the BB/IF MFBMS signal. | 08-23-2012 |
20120215833 | GATEWAY/SET TOP BOX IMAGE MERGING FOR DELIVERY TO SERVICED CLIENT DEVICE - A gateway includes at least one communications interface and processing circuitry and establishes communications with at least one service provider device and with a serviced client device. The gateway receives serviced client device display structure instructions, first streamed content from a service provider device, and second streamed content from a cloud server, the second streamed content based upon an Internet session hosted by the cloud server. Based upon the serviced client device display structure instructions, the gateway combines the first streamed content with the second streamed content to form merged streamed content and transmits the merged streamed content to the serviced client device. In another operation the gateway forwards the first streamed content to a first client device and the second streamed content to a second client device based upon the serviced client device display structure instructions. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218980 | Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance - Synchronized UWB piconets for SOP (Simultaneously Operating Piconet) performance. A common backbone (either wired or wireless) is employed that provides a common CLK (clock signal) to all of the various PNCs (piconet coordinators) of various piconets that may operate within a sufficiently close region such that interference could undesirably occur. By providing a very reliable CLK signal from a common backbone to all of the PNCs of the various piconets operating within a substantially close proximity to one another, very precise synchronization may be ensured for all of the communications performed therein. The various piconets may then even operate using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)—whose performance would be substantially compromised without effective synchronization. In addition, combined TFC (time frequency code) and TDMA may also be employed to support the communications therein thereby providing even another degree of orthogonality that provided by TDMA alone. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220334 | MULTI-TRANSCEIVER MULTI-PATH COMMUNICATION HANDOFF - A system and method for utilizing multiple communication pathways for communication hand-off (e.g., in a MIMO system). Various aspects of the present invention may comprise an access point communicating with a communication system utilizing a first number of transceivers. After determining to perform a hand-off of the communication system to a second access point, simultaneously, a second number of communication system transceivers may be utilized to communicate with the first access point and a third number of communication system transceivers may be utilized to communicate with the second access point. Various aspects of the present invention may also comprise an access point initially communicating with a communication system utilizing a first number of transceivers. After determining to hand-off the communication system, the access point may communicate with the communication system utilizing a second number of transceivers that is different from the first number of transceivers. | 08-30-2012 |
20120221749 | Automatic access and control of media peripherals on a media exchange network - Methods are disclosed for automatically monitoring and controlling at least one media peripheral device in a media exchange network. A communication link is established between a media management system (MMS) and a media peripheral (MP) device in the media exchange network and an operation of the MP device is automatically selected via the MMS over the communication link. Finally, the operation of the MP device is automatically carried out (i.e., performed). Also, after establishing a communication link between a media management system (MMS) and a media peripheral (MP) device in the media exchange network, at least one status parameter of the MP device may be automatically monitored via the MMS over the communication link. The status parameter may be automatically stored and/or displayed via the MMS. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224478 | HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION UTILIZING A HIGH FREQUENCY PHYSICAL LAYER FOR A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - Wireless devices may utilize a Bluetooth stack to setup a data transmission session with other devices. The data transmission session may include a Bluetooth physical layer or a medium access control/physical layer that permits wireless devices to perform discovery, pairing, and security setup operations. When a radio interface of a wireless device is insufficient to enable performing a required data communication, such as a high data rate communication, a data transmission session may be established with at least one medium access control/physical layer of a plurality of other medium access control/physical layers to accommodate the required data communication. | 09-06-2012 |
20120229702 | ADAPTIVE CONTROL OF LCD DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS BASED ON VIDEO CONTENT - Determining video content type of a video displayed on a LCD and triggering adjustment in drive power of the LCD based on the video content type. The video content type indicates relative content motion of the video. A video content type detection module is one or combination of a software and a hardware and directs the LCD to be driven relative slower or faster based upon video content. The module independently or in conjunction with another module identifies an active window from a plurality of windows corresponding to a plurality of applications running on the host device and sets the drive power of the LCD based on speed of a video displayed on the active window. The module may also adapt LCD drive power based upon user input and/or remaining battery life. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230297 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR FACILITATING INTER-NETWORK HAND-OFF FOR A MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A management unit allocates network resources multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at multiservice communication devices. The wireless control channel is separate from the communication between multiservice communication devices and the networks. A network interface receives network resource data from the networks. A management processing unit generates the outbound control data in response. The management processing unit facilities the handoff of a real-time service accessed by the multiservice communication devices via a first network to a second network. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230442 | Multi-Transceiver System with MIMO and Beam-Forming Capability - A system and method for communicating with a second communication system utilizing a plurality of antennas. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise determining whether communicating with the second communication system utilizing a plurality of antennas in a first configuration, which comprises a beam-forming configuration, is preferable to utilizing a plurality of antennas in a second configuration, which comprises a MIMO or MISO configuration. If it is determined that the first configuration is preferable to the second configuration, the communication system may be configured to communicate with the second communication system by utilizing at least a portion of the plurality of antennas in the first configuration. If it is determined that the second configuration is preferable to the first configuration, then the communication system may be configured to communicate with the second communication system by utilizing at least a portion of the plurality of antennas in the second configuration. | 09-13-2012 |
20120233632 | BILLING SUPPORT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system providing billing support for the exchange of media is disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may provide for the authorization of and billing for the delivery of media from a media server to local storage for consumption on a television display. The media may be audio, still pictures, video, or data. Other embodiments may provide for the authorization of and billing for the transfer of media from a media peripheral to a media server for media backup or distribution. A media peripheral may be, for example, a digital camera, digital camcorder, personal computer (PC), personal digital assistant (PDA), multi-media gateway, and MP3 player. An embodiment may support pre-payment, payment at time of use, and post-use billing for the media exchange. In an embodiment of the present invention, the storing or accessing of media may be performed without identifying the user to the media server. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236838 | DUAL MODE OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is dual mode operation by a communicating device in wireless network. The communicating device selects a radio frequency (RF) channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device processes signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 09-20-2012 |
20120238280 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF POWER AND FREQUENCIES IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - Aspects of a method and system for dynamic adjustment of power, antenna direction and frequencies in a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of femtocells, one or more base stations, and a femtocell management entity that coordinates operation of the plurality of femtocells. One or more parameters may be communicated from one of the plurality of femtocells and/or one or more base stations to the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be enabled to utilize the one or more parameters to determine configuration information for one of the plurality of femtocells and/or for one or more remaining ones of the plurality of femtocells. One of the plurality of femtocells may be enabled to receive the determined configuration information from the femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of femtocells may be configured utilizing the received determined configuration information. | 09-20-2012 |
20120246284 | Method and System for Enabling Rendering of Electronic Media Content Via a Secure Ad Hoc Network Configuration Utilizing a Handheld Wireless Communication Device - A handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) establishes an ad hoc network comprising interconnected networks for a user. The HWCD gains access to content on a first device and controls communication of the content from the first device via the HWCD to a second device. The HWCD enables the second device to consume the content. The content may be streamed from the first device via the HWCD to the second device. The first device is a service provider network device or other network device. The access may be authenticated and/or secure. Secure access to the content is extended from the first device to the second device. The ad hoc network is configured and/or reconfigured until communication is complete. The HWCD comprises multiple wireless interfaces. The ad hoc network comprises a PAN, WLAN, WAN and/or cellular network. The HWCD may hand-off among base stations during communication of the content. | 09-27-2012 |
20120246309 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE AND AGGREGATION OF MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method for the aggregation of multimedia information storage via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. Information about storage resources accessible to a broadband access gateway may be collected and used in selecting storage capacity used for storing multimedia information such as, for example, streaming video, broadcast video, digitized video, digitized audio, text, and digitized images. The gateway may manage storage and retrieval of the multimedia information based upon user defined criteria and characteristics of the available storage resources. Multimedia information may be parsed for storage across multiple storage resources, and the location and nature of the storage resources used for storage of multimedia information items may be unknown to the user. Storage services accessible via a broadband connection may also be used as storage resources. | 09-27-2012 |
20120257609 | MULTI-MODE WLAN/PAN MAC - Multi-mode WLAN/PAN MAC. A novel solution is presented in which a MAC (Medium Access Controller) is implemented that includes multiple functionality types. This MAC may include functionality supporting communication according to one or more of the IEEE 802.11 WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) related standards and also to one or more of the standards generated by the IEEE 802.15.3 PAN (Personal Area Network) working group. By providing this dual functionality of a multi-mode WLAN/PAN MAC, a communication device may adaptively change the manner in which it communicates with other communication devices. For example, in an effort to maximize throughput and overall efficiency of communication within a communication system, certain of the various devices may change from using the WLAN related standards to using the PAN related standards, and vice versa, based on any one or more of a variety of operational parameters including system configuration. | 10-11-2012 |
20120265896 | MEDIA PLAYER WITH INTEGRATED PARALLEL SOURCE DOWNLOAD TECHNOLOGY - A media player implements an integrated parallel source download technology to receive a media file from streamed and segmented media file sources. A first source streams delivery of streamed media packets of the media file in sequential packet number order to the media player, while a second source provides segmented delivery of segmented media packets of the media file in random order to the media player. The media player combines the streamed media packets and the segmented media packets to produce the media file. | 10-18-2012 |
20120266072 | Method And System For A Digital Diary System - A wireless communication device may generate an interactive digital diary for one or more users. The device may handle location information, multimedia data, transactions and/or secure communications via a plurality of technologies. Digital diary information may be stored internally or externally, it may be searchable and/or may comprise moving images, still images, audio, text, geographic location, entity information, time, date, transactions, financial information, consumer information, security information, user input, communications, user contacts, software applications, user profiles, scheduled events, prompts and/or reminders. The digital diary may comprise an interactive user interface which may have mapping capability and may provide link access to digital diary information and/or associated entities. User input methods may comprise screen touch, pressure sensor, key entry and/or voice. Information may be captured via a camera, microphone, geo-location data receiver, transaction write/reader, digital clock, digital calendar, key entry and/or tactile sensor. | 10-18-2012 |
20120272105 | HOME NETWORK ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES - A premises based multimedia communication system includes a source device that produces multimedia content, a rendering device that presents the multimedia content, and a premises communication network coupling the source device to the rendering device. The system determines a bit error rate of the premises communication network, transfers the multimedia content from the source device to the rendering device, and when the bit error rate exceeds a bit error rate threshold, the system at least partially disables link layer encryption of video frames of the multimedia content transfer. With the link layer operations at least partially disabled, the system can enable, at least partially, content layer encryption operations for the transfer of the multimedia content from the source device to the rendering device. | 10-25-2012 |
20120272300 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES TO ACCOMPLISH RENDERING OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT ON DISSIMILAR FORMAT DEVICES BASED ON USER BIOMETRIC DATA - A system and method is provided for communication of information in a mobile communication device (WMCD) configured to network connection may include discovering via a wireless mobile communication device, available communication resources based on acquired biometric data for a user of the WMCD, and communicating multimedia information between the WMCD and one or more of the discovered available resources. The acquired biometric data may include physical and behavioral biometric data to be authenticated and validated by a pattern recognition database. A connection between the WMCD and one or more discovered available resources may be established through linking the acquired biometric data to resources in available local or remote network. The established connection may enable the WMCD to consume or redirect media from the available resources and may be dynamically adjusted and updated based on dynamic sensing of the acquired biometric data in the available network or available resources. | 10-25-2012 |
20120274847 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDUNDANCY-BASED DECODING OF VIDEO CONTENT - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of video content are provided. A bit sequence comprising video content may be decoded in a multilayer process based on a decoding algorithm and at least one physical constraint. The decoding algorithm may be based on the Viterbi algorithm. Whether the bit sequence comprises video content may be determined based on information provided by a portion of a packet header or by packet priority information necessary for enabling quality of service applications. The physical constraint may be based on border, DC component, and/or low frequency continuity between neighboring discrete cosine transform (DCT) blocks. The physical constraint may also be based on the consistency of video data coded by a variable length coding (VLC) operation. At least one physical constraint test may be performed on selected estimated video bit sequences to select a decoded output video bit sequence. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276858 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND MULTIPLE STANDARD TRANSCEIVER - A transceiver includes a receiver section and a transmitter section. The receiver section converts an inbound Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal into a down converted signal, wherein the inbound MFBMS signal includes a desired signal component and an undesired signal component. In addition, the receiver section determines spectral positioning of the undesired signal component with respect to the desired signal component and adjusts at least one of the MFBMS signal and the down converted signal based on the spectral positioning to substantially reduce adverse affects of the undesired signal component on the desired signal component to produce an adjusted signal. The transmitter section converts an outbound symbol stream into an outbound MFBMS signal. | 11-01-2012 |
20120276876 | Multiple Network Wake-Up - A communication device may select a communication path to check for pending messages in a multiple network environment. The communication device may exit from a power-saving operating mode during which the communication device does not receive messages from a message server. After exiting the power-saving operating mode, the communication device may identify multiple different communication paths. The multiple communication paths may include different communication networks in the multiple network environment. The communication device may determine a selected communication path from among the multiple communication paths and communicate with a message server across the selected communication path to check for messages. | 11-01-2012 |
20120278468 | Personal Inter-Home Media Exchange Network - A system and method support the exchange of media between friends, family members, and 3rd party media providers over a closed and secure media exchange network. The media may include, for example, digital video, digital audio, digital images, digital data, or any form of digital information. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281711 | Method And System For Network Aware Virtual Machines - Network Interface Controller (NIC) logic may receive a packet comprising a routing parameter indicating a service or cost to be utilized in processing the packet. The NIC logic may determine a selected virtual machine (VM) running on a network device to process the packet according to the routing parameter. The NIC logic may communicate the packet across a network after the packet has been processed by the selected virtual VM. Or, the NIC logic may initialize a VM in the network device to process the packet according to the routing parameter. The NIC logic may receive multiple packets and determine a second selected VM or initialize a second VM to process the multiple packets according to the respective routing parameters of the multiple packets. The routing parameters may indicate device capabilities, service class, quality measurements, latency, power usage or any combination thereof. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287862 | Mobile Communication Device Having Multiple Independent Optimized Physical Layers - A communication device may include a Physical (PHY) layer configured to provide multiple communication services across a communication network. The communication device may adjust the PHY layer according to a first set of performance characteristics to provide a first communication service. When the device identifies a communication service change to the second communication service, the communication device may adjust the PHY layer according to a second set of performance characteristics, different from the first set, to provide the second communication service. The communication device may also receive a configuration indication from an application executing on the device specifying a performance characteristic change to the PHY layer. The communication device may also include multiple independent PHY layers that may adjusted independently. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287918 | Method and System for Preserving Content Timing Across Femtocell Interfaces Via Timestamp Insertion - Aspects of a method and system for preserving content timing across femtocell interfaces via timestamp insertion are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive a first time-stamped packet via a first interface and transcode the time-stamped packet. The femtocell may buffer the transcoded packet based on a time-stamp recovered from the packet and may transmit the buffered transcoded packet via a second interface. One of the first interface and the second interface may utilize the Internet Protocol. One of the first interface and the second interface may be a non-cellular interface and the other interface may be a cellular interface. The femtocell may be operable to generate a timestamp corresponding to a time instant at which a time-stamped packet arrived via the first interface or the second interface. The timestamp may be referenced to a clock within a cellular enabled communication devices communicatively coupled to the femtocell. | 11-15-2012 |
20120289280 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH LOGICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive network data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols, wherein at least one of the plurality of transceivers further transceives control channel data with a remote management unit contemporaneously with the network data via a logical control channel carried using the corresponding one of the plurality of network protocols, wherein the control channel data includes local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 11-15-2012 |
20120290722 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISCOVERING END-POINTS THAT UTILIZE A LINK LAYER CONNECTION IN A WIRED/WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - Aspects of the invention provide a communication system and method in a hybrid wired/wireless local area network. At least one discovery message may be broadcasted to at least one of a plurality of access points. A response may be received from one or more of the access points. The response may report a presence of at least one access device located within a coverage area of one or more of the access points. A status of at least one access device located within a coverage area of one or more of the access points may be requested from the access points. | 11-15-2012 |
20120295658 | SINGLE CHIP MULTIMODE BASEBAND PROCESSING CIRCUITRY WITH A SHARED RADIO INTERFACE - A multimode communication integrated circuit comprising baseband processing circuitry with a shared radio interface. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise a processor module adapted to perform various processing (e.g., baseband processing) in support of multimode communications. A first radio module may be communicatively coupled to the processor module through a common communication interface. A second radio module may also be communicatively coupled to the processor module through the common communication interface. The common communication interface may, for example, be adapted to communicate information over a communication bus that is shared between the processor module and a plurality of radio modules (e.g., the first and second radio modules). | 11-22-2012 |
20120297023 | Method and System for a Persistent Request Generated by a Wireless Device, Executed Remotely and Output to Configurable Local Resources - Methods and systems for a persistent request generated by a wireless device, executed remotely and output to configurable local resources are disclosed and may include generating via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) a persistent request for a user that may be communicated to remote devices for execution and storage of results. The stored results may be received from local resources local which may be configured by the remote devices based on user preferences to deliver the stored results to the user. The stored results may be received by the user via the HWCD or another wireless communication device, and the identity of the user may be authenticated prior to receiving the stored results. The remote devices may discover the local resources based on the detection of the user logging into the network. User preferences may be stored in networked devices or may be stored in the HWCD. | 11-22-2012 |
20120299710 | ACCESS, MONITORING, AND CONTROL OF APPLIANCES VIA A MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM - A device and method for accessing, monitoring, and controlling home appliances in a media exchange network by establishing a communication link between a communication initiation device and at least one home appliance and communicating at least one command from the communication initiation device to the at least one home appliance via the communication link. The at least one home appliance then generates at least one response to the at least one command. The commands may include turning the home appliance(s) on and off, parameter adjustment commands, access commands, monitoring commands, mode change commands, and programming commands. Appliance responses may include powering on, powering off, changing a mode of operation, sending a status to the communication initiation device, adjusting an operational parameter, and changing a programmed operational step. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303757 | Channel Frequency Reuse for Narrow Beam Video Streaming Based Upon Mobile Terminal Location Information - Transmitting streamed video to at least one wireless terminal by a wireless network having a channel frequency reuse pattern. The wireless network receives a request for the streamed video from the at least one wireless terminal and receives position information from the at least one wireless terminal requesting the streamed video. The wireless network selects a transceiving device to service transmission of the streamed video to the at least one wireless terminal. The transceiving device is allocated a first channel frequency set of the channel frequency reuse pattern. The wireless network or a component thereof selects a channel from a second channel frequency set that is different from the first channel frequency set. The transceiving device then, using a directional antenna, transmits the streamed video to the at least one wireless terminal in a direction based upon the position information using the selected channel. | 11-29-2012 |
20120303820 | Resource Controlled User Interface Resource Management - A communication link may be managed between the user interface and a system, where the user interface allows a user to select the system. The user interface is determined to be capable of being used with the system. It is communicated that the user interface may be used with the system. The user requests that the user interface be allocated for use with the system. The user interface is allocated for use with the system. | 11-29-2012 |
20120308208 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ADVERTISEMENT INSERTION AND PLAYBACK FOR STB WITH PVR FUNCTIONALITY - A personal video recorder (PVR) enabled set-top box (STB) may be operable to store an advertisement and associated playback control information received from a media provider into a storage device in the PVR enabled STB, schedule the stored advertisement for viewing based on the associated playback control information. The PVR enabled STB may be operable to insert the stored advertisement into media content for one or more times based on the scheduling. The PVR enabled STB may be operable to cause display of the stored advertisement and the media content in different transport formats. At a forward/reverse playback position during a PVR playback, the PVR enabled STB may be operable to cause display of the stored advertisement when a play count associated with the stored advertisement is less than a count threshold at the forward/reverse playback position. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314704 | SWITCH AND/OR ROUTER NODE ADVERTISING - A first of a plurality of intermediate routing devices is operable to advertise to and/or receive status information from remaining one(s) of the intermediate routing devices. The intermediate routing devices may store and/or analyze the advertised and/or received status information and may make routing decisions based on it. The first routing device may advertise status information for itself and/or for one or more other intermediate routing devices. Data may be routed based on type of data, service level and/or priority associated with the data. The advertised and/or received status information comprises current status information, predicted status information and/or past status information which may be based on one or more of port status, CPU utilization, memory utilization, quality of service (QoS), bandwidth utilization, bandwidth availability, traffic load, congestion, number of connections handled and capability to provide a particular level of service. | 12-13-2012 |
20120315934 | Automatic Quality Of Service Based Resource Allocation - A system can provide quality-of-service based network resource allocation and utilization in a dynamic network environment. A system may determine a current quality level of current media data presented to a user by a remote system in communication with the first system. The system may determine if it can provide subsequent media data to the remote system at a higher quality level than the current quality level. As one example, the system may identify a network connection with the remote system that supports providing the subsequent media data at the higher quality level to the remote system. The system may then obtain the subsequent media data at the higher quality level and send the subsequent media data at the higher quality level to the remote system. | 12-13-2012 |
20120315951 | Mobile Communication Device Providing N-Way Communication Through A Plurality Of Communication Devices - A device may provide N-Way communication through multiple communication services. The device may receive user data from a user interface and incoming data from a communication interface. The incoming data may be received through a first communication service. The device may combine the user data and incoming data, including through any combination of encoding or decoding processes. The device may also send the combined data using the communication interface, such as through a second communication service. The device may also receive first incoming data through a first communication service and second incoming data through a second communication service. The device may combine the first incoming data and second incoming data for display on a user interface or to send across a third communication service. | 12-13-2012 |
20120315991 | APPARATUS POSITION DETECTION USING MULTIPLE ANTENNAS - An apparatus includes a transmitter and a receiver device, which includes a receiver section and a processing module. The transmitter transmits a high carrier frequency signal. The receiver section includes first and second antennas that have an antenna radiation relationship for receiving the high carrier frequency signal. A receiver module of the receiver section determines first and second signal properties of the received high carrier frequency signal. The processing module determines a position of the receiver device with respect to the transmitter based on the first and second signal properties and maps the position to a coordinate system. | 12-13-2012 |
20120317490 | Central System Based User Interface Resource Management - A processing device includes a user interface module, the user interface module to connect the processing device with a user interface. A communication module connects the processing device with a mobile device. A communication link is established between the processing device and the mobile device. The communication module receives a request from the mobile device to display information. The user interface module sends the information for display on the user interface. | 12-13-2012 |
20120322435 | Method and System for Communication Between a Plurality of Femtocells to Mitigate Interference Between the Femtocells - Aspects of a method and system for communication between a plurality of femtocells to mitigate interference between the femtocells are provided. In this regard, a first of a plurality of femtocells in a network may receive interference information from one or more other femtocells, one or more base stations, and/or one or more communication devices in the network. The first femtocell may determine configuration information for the first femtocell and one or more other femtocells in the network based on the communicated interference information. The first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network may be configured based on the determined configuration information. The interference between the plurality of femtocells may be mitigated based on configuring the first femtocell and the other femtocells in the network based on the determined configuration information. | 12-20-2012 |
20120322450 | Communicatively Coupling WLAN and Femtocell Networks Utilizing a Femtocell-to-WLAN Network Bridge and Controller - Aspects of a method and system for communicatively coupling WLAN and femtocell networks utilizing a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller are provided. In this regard, data communicated via one or more femtocells and one or more WLAN access points may be managed via a FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller communicatively coupled between a femtocell controller and an access point controller. The femtocell controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more femtocells, and the access point controller may be operable to manage and/or control operation of the one or more WLAN access points. The FC-to-WLAN network bridge and controller, the femtocell controller, and the access point controller may intemperate to manage data communicated between a first end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the femtocells and a second end-user device communicatively coupled to one of the access points. | 12-20-2012 |
20120324115 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED INFRASTRUCTURE FOR STREAMING DATA VIA MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS - Methods and systems for distributed infrastructure for streaming data via multiple access points. Aspects of one method may include apportioning multimedia information among a plurality of transmitting devices based on feedback channel information received from a destination receiving device by, for example, a transmission controller device. The transmitting devices may transmit the multimedia information to the destination receiving device. A transmitting device that may not be apportioned multimedia information may transmit a probing signal. The destination receiving device may generate feedback channel information for a transmitting device, for example, based on the multimedia information or the probing signal received from the respective transmitting device. The apportioning of the multimedia information may be dynamically adjusted based on updated feedback channel information received from the destination receiving device. | 12-20-2012 |
20130003717 | Energy Based Communication Path Selection - A system and method for determining an information communication path based on energy requirements. Various aspects of the present invention provide a method that comprises identifying a plurality of information communication paths that may be utilized to communicate information (e.g., one or more units of information). A communication path identification module may perform such identification. Respective amounts of energy to communicate the information may be estimated for at least a portion of the identified plurality of information communication paths. A communication energy estimation module may perform such estimation. An information communication path may be selected from the identified plurality of information communication paths based, at least in part, on the estimated respective amounts of energy. A communication path selection module may perform such selection. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003877 | PLC Device Supporting MIMO Operations - A communications device includes a PLC interface operable to couple at least two differing communication signals to at least two differing pairs of at least three conductors of a powerline medium. A processing module of the device and the PLC interface interact with a remote PLC device to determine connectivity of the remote PLC device to the PLC device via the at least three conductors of the powerline medium, select at least two conductor pairs of the powerline medium that communicatively couple the PLC device to the remote PLC device for Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) signal servicing, and simultaneously transmit MIMO PLC signals to the remote PLC device via the at least two conductor pairs. The communications device may also include a non-PLC interface, with the communications device operable to divide MIMO communications between a powerline medium and a non-PLC medium, e.g., coaxial cable, cat-5 cable. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010857 | Network Packet Aware Data Encoding - A communication device is operable to manage communication of data streams, which comprise data encoded utilizing scheme that generate plurality of frames with logical grouping and/or inter-frame dependencies, based on determination of network payload parameters that are utilized for the data transmission. Exemplary encoding schemes comprise MPEG encoding, which generates data streams comprised I-frames, P-frames and/or B-frames. Network packets that are utilized to perform data communication are generated such that packet payloads comprise only data corresponding to a single frame and/or logical grouping within the encoded data stream. Feedback from networking subsystem in the communication device may be provided during processing of the data streams to enable use of network payload parameters during encoding operations. Frame sizes may be adjusted, for example, so that a size of each frame is multiple of a size of a payload of the network packets that are utilized in data communication. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010877 | Method and System for Redundancy-Based Decoding of Video Content - Aspects of a method and system for redundancy-based decoding of video content are provided. A bit sequence comprising video content may be decoded in a multilayer process based on a decoding algorithm and at least one physical constraint. The decoding algorithm may be based on the Viterbi algorithm. Whether the bit sequence comprises video content may be determined based on information provided by a portion of a packet header or by packet priority information necessary for enabling quality of service applications. The physical constraint may be based on border, DC component, and/or low frequency continuity between neighboring discrete cosine transform (DCT) blocks. The physical constraint may also be based on the consistency of video data coded by a variable length coding (VLC) operation. At least one physical constraint test may be performed on selected estimated video bit sequences to select a decoded output video bit sequence. | 01-10-2013 |
20130012197 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION VIA A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for communication are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive messages from a plurality of different sources comprising one or more other femtocells, one or more cellular enabled communication devices, and one or more non-cellular network nodes. The femtocell may select, based on the received messages, a master clock within one of the plurality of different sources as a master clock for synchronization of the plurality of different sources. A femtocell clock, a global navigational satellite signal (GNSS) clock, a cellular base station clock, or a cellular enabled communication device clock may be selected as the master clock. The femtocell may transmit and/or receive synchronization messages to and/or from the one or more cellular enabled communication devices and the one or more non-cellular network nodes. | 01-10-2013 |
20130013782 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR LEASING OF NETWORK SERVICES AND APPLICATIONS BASED ON A USAGE PATTERN - Aspects of a method and system for predictive leasing of network services and applications based on a usage pattern may comprise a management entity that coordinates operation of one or more endpoint devices. A user profile associated with the one or more endpoint devices may be received by the management entity, wherein the management entity may utilize the user profile associated with the one or more endpoint devices and a usage pattern associated with the one or more endpoint devices to determine leasing information for the one or more endpoint devices. The management entity may be operable to communicate the determined leasing information to the one or more endpoint devices. The leasing information may comprise leasing services and/or applications to the one or more endpoint devices. | 01-10-2013 |
20130014188 | PERSONAL ACCESS AND CONTROL OF MEDIA PERIPHERALS ON A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Methods are disclosed for indirectly monitoring and controlling at least one media peripheral device in a media exchange network by accessing a media management system (MMS) via a first media peripheral (MP) device (e.g., a TV screen) using a user control device (e.g., a remote control). An operation corresponding to a second media peripheral (MP) device (e.g., a digital camera) may be selected via the MMS using the first MP device and the user control device. The operation is then carried out (i.e., performed) by the second MP device. A status of the second MP device may be selected via the MMS using the first MP device and the user control device. The selected status is then displayed on the first MP device. | 01-10-2013 |
20130023290 | MULTI-MODE MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH MOTION SENSOR AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A mobile communication device includes a motion sensor for generating motion signals in response to motion of the mobile communication device. A motion data generation module generates motion data based on the motion signals. At least one transceiver sends the motion data to a game device in a gaming mode of operation and transceives wireless telephony data with a wireless telephony network in a telephony mode of operation. | 01-24-2013 |
20130034083 | Mobile Handoff Through Multi-Network Simulcasting - A method and apparatus supporting handoff using simulcasting of multimedia information via a gateway are disclosed. A gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information transmitted to an access device by a wide area network. The gateway may send the received multimedia information to the associated access device, and may communicate with the wide area network. | 02-07-2013 |
20130064307 | CHANNEL ADAPTIVE VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that transmits a video signal to a remote device over at least one communications channel wherein the video signal is transmitted as at least one separate video layer stream chosen from, an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A control module determines at least one channel characteristic of the at least one channel and chooses the at least one separate video layer stream based on the at least one channel characteristic of the at least one channel. | 03-14-2013 |
20130072163 | EXTENDED MULTIMEDIA CALL HANDLING FUNCTIONALITY - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using multimedia information are disclosed. Multimedia information exchanged by an associated access device and a gateway. The access device may request for the multimedia information to be recorded during a call. The gateway may store the received multimedia information locally or may communicate the multimedia information to storage. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077527 | Method and System for Dynamically Setting Up and Tearing Down Connections in Mesh Networks - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices may form and/or tear down intra-mesh connection with other WMC devices in the same mesh network. WMC devices may utilize information related to other WMC devices in the mesh network in determining formation and tearing down of intra-mesh connections. This information may comprise relative speeds, locations, and directions of movement of the WMC devices forming/tearing intra-mesh connections. Other information including data bandwidth and/or power consumption may be utilized in such determination. This information may also comprise available services advertised by WMC devices in the mesh network. | 03-28-2013 |
20130089053 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH COGNITIVE RADIO TRANSCEIVER - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive network data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols, wherein the plurality of transceivers includes at least one cognitive radio transceiver that is configured based on cognitive transceiver configuration data received from a management unit in communication with the multiservice communication device via a control channel. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091209 | AD HOC SOCIAL NETWORKING - An Ad Hoc social networking environment enables information and device access management between social networking groups and social networking members with or without access restrictions and anonymity. Contact and access information can be exchanged and updated on the fly without requiring users to notify other contacts or contacting devices and can support underlying contact information changes, enable extemporaneous termination or modification of contact access, enable temporary access, and the like. Ad Hoc social networking can utilize unique identifiers, proxy elements, or the like to support various levels of membership anonymity and Ad Hoc social networking. Proxy elements enable SNET tear down or dissolution by retracting the proxy service from a member. Storing social group contact information in shared databases can enable sharing and updating of contact information without the need to inform affected contacts. Some social networks can include various specialized devices and related services. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091216 | Social Device Service and Support Via Automatic Group Association - A social networking system offers a variety of device service and support functions via automated social network (SNET) group associations. Such functions can include, for example, device registration and warranty services, update and upgrade services, maintenance and testing services, resource utilization reporting services, cloning services, usage tutorials and user group interactions, targeted advertising, etc. In various embodiments, support services may be offered upon automated docking of a social device with a SNET group, such as a manufacturer's SNET group. Selection of available services may be automated based on device profile data. Alternatively, services may be manually selected through a user interface provided by a member device or support service. In other embodiments, all or portions of a first device may be cloned on a second device, either on a persistent or temporary basis. | 04-11-2013 |
20130091280 | Social Device Resource Management - A method and apparatus for allocating resources in a social network. In one embodiment, access to resources of a social network and participant social devices is managed through general or member class-specific access rights. Such access rights may also be established for authorized guests or non-members of the social network. In further embodiments, social resources may be offered and (re)allocated in a dynamic manner through real time usage and availability analysis. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094401 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING INFORMATION AMONG PERSONALIZED AND SHARED RESOURCES WITH A PERSONALIZED PORTABLE DEVICE - A user's request via a portable or handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) to process data may result in discovery of one or more networked resources capable of handling the processing. One or more communication routes may be established between one or more discovered network resources and one or more of the HWCD and a networked terminating device. The portable HWCD may be configured as a gateway. The user's identity may be determined and the user's personal networking preferences may be acquired. Based user's preferences, a route may be established between discovered networked resources and one or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device. The user's identity may be authenticated. Data may undergo rate and/or format conversion. The data may be protected by secure operations. One or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device may consume or render the requested data. | 04-18-2013 |
20130097288 | MEDIA PLAYER WITH INTEGRATED PARALLEL SOURCE DOWNLOAD TECHNOLOGY - A media player implements an integrated parallel source download technology to receive a media file from streamed and segmented media file sources. A first source streams delivery of streamed media packets of the media file in sequential packet number order to the media player, while a second source provides segmented delivery of segmented media packets of the media file in random order to the media player. The media player combines the streamed media packets and the segmented media packets to produce the media file. | 04-18-2013 |
20130099966 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROPAGATING GNSS ASSISTANCE DATA AMONG COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A communication device within a GNSS group propagates GNSS assistance data to one or more other communication devices in the GNSS group. The GNSS assistance data includes ephemeris received from one or more GNSS satellites and/or predicted ephemeris. As a source device, the communication device generates, and/or acquires from other resources such as a remote location server, the predicted ephemeris. As a destination device, the communication device receives existing GNSS assistance data from a source device and/or other communication devices in the GNSS group. A GNSS position for the communication device and corresponding time information are used to refresh the received GNSS assistance data. In instances where the communication device further acts as a relay device, the refreshed GNSS assistance data is relayed to other communication devices over wired and/or wireless direct device-to-device connections utilizing appropriate communication technologies such as WiFi, Bluetooth and/or Bluetooth low energy. | 04-25-2013 |
20130102318 | Method and System for a Handheld Wireless Communication Device for Configuring Connection to and Use of Local and Remote Resources - Methods and systems for a handheld portable communication device for configuring connection to and use of local and remote resources are disclosed and may include discovering available networks and resources, establishing a route between the handheld wireless communication device and a selected one or more of the available resources via a selected one or more of the available networks based on user preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device, and communicating multimedia data between the handheld wireless communication device and the selected one or more of the available resources via the established route. The established route may be dynamically adjusted, based on network availability and bandwidth. The handheld wireless communication device may communicate utilizing a plurality of wireless protocols. The preference criteria stored in the handheld wireless communication device may be dynamically adjusted. The resources may be local or remote to the handheld wireless communication device. | 04-25-2013 |
20130111213 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VIDEO TRANSMISSION AND PROCESSING WITH CUSTOMIZED WATERMARKING DELIVERY | 05-02-2013 |
20130111493 | DYNAMICALLY SPLITTING JOBS ACROSS MULTIPLE AGNOSTIC PROCESSORS IN WIRELESS SYSTEM | 05-02-2013 |
20130115908 | POWER MANAGEMENT OF RADIO TRANSCEIVER ELEMENTS - A radio receiver includes a power control module for selectively powering down and powering up radio receiver elements in between known communication periods according to one aspect of the present invention. According to a second aspect of the invention, the radio receiver operates in a low power mode of operation and periodically “sniffs” to determine whether an access point has messages or communication signals to transmit to it. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117411 | QUALITY OF SERVICE SUPPORT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for controlling communication of media content by a network device in a communication network includes providing, by the network device, a plurality of quality of service options corresponding to at least one media file selected for communication to a remote user via a communication channel; receiving a quality of service selection specifying at least one of the plurality of quality of service options; and communicating the at least one media file to the remote user utilizing the received quality of service selection. The providing may include displaying, by the network device, the plurality of quality of service options. At least a portion of specified parameters may be transferred to a first communication device coupled to the communication network. At least a portion of the communication channel may be configured by a second device utilizing the transferred at least portion of the specific parameters. | 05-09-2013 |
20130117787 | PORTABLE MEDIA PROCESSING UNIT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for communication includes performing by one or more circuits integrated within a single chip in a first communication device, functions that include storing media and meta-data corresponding to the stored media. The storing may occur at a first location of the first communication device. A channel guide including representations of the stored media that can be selected for presentation on a television in a second location, may be caused based on the meta-data corresponding to the stored media when the first communication device is communicatively coupled to a second communication device at the second location. In response to receiving a selection via the presented channel guide, at least one media file corresponding to the received selection may be displayed based on the meta-data corresponding to the stored media, on one or both of the television and/or a media player in the second location. | 05-09-2013 |
20130122857 | DETERMINING APPLICATION USAGE RELATIVE TO A PARTICULAR LOCATION - A mobile device collects information about application usage and associates collected application information with a location of the mobile device and a time that the application is accessed. The application is stored on the mobile device or on an external device and accessed via a network. The application information, location of the mobile device and time the application is accessed are communicated to another device and stored in a storage device which may be operated or managed by a service provider or another entity. The application information may comprise identification of a website, a network device or URL, the application and/or data that is input and/or output from the application. The location of the mobile device and/or the time, are determined utilizing a GNSS receiver and/or utilizing information from a network device. The application information, the location of the mobile device and/or the time may be utilized for targeted advertising. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122972 | System and Method Providing Low Power Operation in a Multimode Communication Device - A system and method providing low-power operation in a multimode communication device. Various aspects of the present invention may, for example, include at least one radio module that is adapted to communicate in a plurality of communication modes. The at least one radio module may also be adapted to operate in at least a first power-save mode. At least one module may, for example, be adapted to analyze at least one non-informational aspect of a signal (e.g., a received radio signal) to determine whether a first communication network corresponding to a first communication mode of the plurality of communication modes might be available. The at least one module may then, for example, be adapted to determine, based at least in part on the determined availability of the first communication network, whether to operate the at least one radio module in a respective mode other than the first power-save mode. | 05-16-2013 |
20130124694 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING RENDERING OF ELECTRONIC MEDIA CONTENT VIA A SECURE AD HOC NETWORK CONFIGURATION UTILIZING A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) establishes an ad hoc network comprising interconnected networks for a user. The HWCD gains access to content on a first device and controls communication of the content from the first device via the HWCD to a second device. The HWCD enables the second device to consume the content. The content may be streamed from the first device via the HWCD to the second device. The first device is a service provider network device or other network device. The access may be authenticated and/or secure. Secure access to the content is extended from the first device to the second device. The ad hoc network is configured and/or reconfigured until communication is complete. The HWCD comprises multiple wireless interfaces. The ad hoc network comprises a PAN, WLAN, WAN and/or cellular network. The HWCD may hand-off among base stations during communication of the content. | 05-16-2013 |
20130124741 | View Sharing Between In-Range Devices - A first system may receive a view from a second system. The first system may establish a direct wireless communication link with the second system that does not connect through any intermediate system between the first system and the second system. Through the direct wireless communication link, the first system sends a view sharing request to the second system. The view sharing request may specify a view that is displayed by the second system and not the first system. The first system may receive view information corresponding to the view and display the view according to the received view information. | 05-16-2013 |
20130125163 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING DATA DISTRIBUTION VIA CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS UTILIZING AN INTEGRATED FEMTOCELL AND SET-TOP-BOX DEVICE - Aspects of a method and system for controlling data distribution via cellular communications with an integrated femtocell and set-top-box (IFSTB) device are provided. In this regard, a cellular enabled communication device may detect when it is within cellular communication range of a femtocell. Upon detection of the femtocell, the cellular enabled communication device may communicate instructions to a content source instructing the content source to deliver multimedia content to the femtocell. In instances that multimedia content is already being delivered to the cellular enabled communication device prior to the detection, the instructions from the cellular enabled communication device may instruct the content source to redirect the multimedia content to the femtocell. In this regard, the multimedia content may be delivered from the content source to the cellular enabled communication device via the femtocell. The femtocell may deliver at least a portion of the multimedia content to other communication devices. | 05-16-2013 |
20130125229 | Theft prevention of media peripherals in a media exchange network - Systems and methods of theft prevention of communication devices are provided. In one embodiment, the method may include, for example, one or more of the following: registering a communication device being used at a home, where the device is connected to a communication network; entering validation information relating to the communication device; and analyzing the validation information to determine whether the communication device is authorized for use in the communication network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128770 | HIGH SPEED DATA TRANSMISSION UTILIZING A HIGH FREQUENCY PHYSICAL LAYER FOR A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK DEVICE - Wireless devices may utilize a communication stack to setup a data transmission session with other devices. The data transmission session may include a physical layer that permits wireless devices to perform operations such as discovery, pairing, and security setup. When a radio interface of a wireless device is insufficient to enable performing a data communication, a data transmission session may be established with at least one of a plurality of other physical layers to accommodate the data communication. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136421 | Overlay to augment quality of currently playing media - Overlay to augment quality of currently playing media. The overlay operates to enhance the quality format of media so that it is output in a different quality format. As one example, when playing media content encoded in accordance with a standard definition television (SDTV) quality format, an appropriate overlay would operate to upgrade the quality format thereof to enhanced definition television (EDTV) quality format, high definition television (HDTV) quality format (or some other quality format). An appropriate overlay may also operate in accordance with audio content (e.g., upgrading a quality format of the audio content). With the advent of Blu-Ray discs (and other higher quality format discs), many individuals presently have libraries of media that are encoded with legacy/previous quality formats. An appropriate overlay that operates in conjunction with media encoded with a legacy/previous quality format allows the same content to be enjoyed in accordance with a newer/improved quality format. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136429 | Constructing Video Frames And Synchronizing Audio Data In A Media Player From Data Received Via A Plurality Of Diverse Protocol Stack Paths - Video frames from a sequence of video frames and corresponding audio are received and processed by a media player. A first portion of the sequence depends on fewer reference frames then a second portion of the sequence. The number of reference frames per frame is limited. The first and second portions of the sequence are treated differently. The first portion is received at a lower data rate, with greater security and processed with a more robust protocol stack than the second portion. The first and second portions may be stored in a single queue and/or separate queues. The first portion of frame data is utilized to compensate for lost frames by repeating and/or interpolating video frames. The media player constructs a local video frame and synchronizes corresponding audio content with it. The received, repeated and/or interpolated video frames are assembled into display order and decoded. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137385 | TRANSCEIVER WITH PLURAL SPACE HOPPING ARRAY ANTENNAS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A wireless transceiver includes an antenna array that transmits an outbound RF signal containing outbound data to remote transceivers and that receives an inbound RF signal containing inbound data from the remote RF transceivers, wherein the antenna array is configurable based on a control signal. An antenna configuration controller generates the control signal to configure the antenna array to hop among a plurality of radiation patterns based on a hopping sequence. An RF transceiver section generates the outbound RF signal based on the outbound data and that generates the inbound data based on the inbound RF signal. In one configuration, a switching section selectively couples a selected one of the antennas in the array to the RF transceiver section, based on the control signal. In another configuration, the RF transceiver section includes an RF section for each antenna in the array. | 05-30-2013 |
20130150082 | USING SIGNAL-GENERATED LOCATION INFORMATION TO IDENTIFY AND LIST AVAILABLE DEVICES - A wireless detecting device may be operable to receive one or more signals from a corresponding one or more wireless devices within range of the wireless detecting device. A list of the corresponding one or more wireless devices within range of the wireless detecting device may be displayed on the wireless detecting device. Based on the received one or more signals from the corresponding one or more wireless devices, distance, range or geographic location of the one or more wireless devices, relative to the wireless detecting device may be indicated on the wireless detecting device. | 06-13-2013 |
20130151727 | MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM SUPPORTING DIFFERENT MEDIA FORMATS VIA SERVER-BASED TRANSCODING - Systems and methods that reformat media are described. In one embodiment, a system may include, for example, a server, a first communications device and a second communications device. The server, the first communications device and the second communications device may be operatively coupled to a network. The second communications device may receive, from the first communications device, a device profile relating to the first communications device and may send the device profile and media content to the server. The server may reformat the media content based on the device | 06-13-2013 |
20130154560 | BATTERY WITH INTEGRATED WIRELESS POWER RECEIVER AND/OR RFID - A battery includes one or more rechargeable cells, a wireless power coil, a battery charger circuit, and may further include an RFID module. The wireless power coil is operable to generate an AC voltage from a wireless power electromagnetic field. The battery charger circuit is operable to generate a battery charge voltage from the AC voltage in accordance with a battery charge control signal and, when enabled, to charge the one or more rechargeable cells via the battery charge voltage. If the battery further includes the RFID module, it is operable to generate the battery charge control signal and communicate with a wireless power transmitter device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155324 | Multiple Device Access Windowing Display - A system and method for receiving and filtering a video signal to change spatial characteristic information of a display window included the video signal. | 06-20-2013 |
20130159523 | SECURE LEGACY MEDIA PERIPHERAL ASSOCIATION WITH AUTHENTICATION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Aspects for secure access and communication of information in a distributed media network may include detecting when a legacy media peripheral is connected to a PC and/or a media processing system on the distributed media network. One or more identifiers associated with the legacy media peripheral may be established and utilized to facilitate communication of the legacy media peripheral over the distributed media network. At least one legacy media peripheral identifier and at least one identifier of a user utilizing the legacy media peripheral may be requested. The legacy media peripheral identifier may be a serial number of the legacy media peripheral, while the user identifier may be a user password and/or a user name. Media peripheral association software may be executed on the PC and/or the media processing system and utilized for media peripheral association and authentication in accordance with various embodiments of the invention. | 06-20-2013 |
20130165163 | Method of configuring device performance and device location to perform a task - A configuration device for configuring a wireless device within a wireless cell can include a receiving unit configured to receive a request message from a wireless device within a wireless cell. In addition, the configuration device can include a first processing unit configured to determine location information of the wireless device, and a second processing unit configured to determine a communication capacity of the wireless device, and to estimate a communication requirement based on the request message. Furthermore, the configuration device can have a transmitting unit configured to transmit optimal information to the wireless device with respect to the request message. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170566 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING FOR FAST CHANNEL CHANGE AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into an independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream based on a motion vector data or grayscale and color data. | 07-04-2013 |
20130172047 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH LOGICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive network data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols, wherein at least one of the plurality of transceivers further transceives control channel data with a remote management unit contemporaneously with the network data via a logical control channel carried using the corresponding one of the plurality of network protocols, wherein the control channel data includes local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 07-04-2013 |
20130174230 | Method and system for secure linking with authentication and authorization in a media exchange network - Certain embodiments of the invention may be found in a method for establishing a communication pathway for subsequent media exchanges between a television display in a first home and storage that contains media in a second home. The method may comprise securely receiving address correlation information associated with the television display in the first home and securely receiving address correlation information associated with the storage in the second home. Affirmative confirmation may be received and/or stored using the received address correlation information associated with at least one of the television display and the storage. The invention may also include verifying that affirmative information has been stored in association with any subsequent media exchanges. | 07-04-2013 |
20130176927 | Simultaneously Multi-Networked Handheld Multimedia Gateways - A user may simultaneously access sources of multimedia information via multiple wireless networks using a handheld multimedia gateway. A user interface may support the selection of information services that are each provided separate, but possibly overlapping, viewing spaces. Circuitry in the multimedia gateway manages the operation of the multiple wireless communication paths, and enables the display of visual information through two or more display devices. The user may customize the display, the size, and the location within a display of regions in which the information is presented. | 07-11-2013 |
20130178253 | USING LOCATION INFORMATION TO CONTROL TRANSMISSION SIGNAL LEVELS OF WIRELESS DEVICES - Provided is adjusting power output levels of a wireless network device by determining a location information of another wireless network device relative to the wireless network device, the location information including distance range. Based on the location information of the another wireless network device, a power output level is adjusted to optimize the power usage of the wireless network device. The power output level is readjusted based upon a sensing a subsequent signal of the another wireless device, and when a signal strength of the subsequent signal compares favorably to a predetermined threshold level, the location information is refreshed, and the power output level of the wireless network device is readjusted based upon the refreshed location information. | 07-11-2013 |
20130179927 | VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WITH TIMING BASED ON A GLOBAL CLOCK AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A network module receives network global positioning system (GPS) signals and that transmits a video signal to a remote device that includes time stamps that are based on the network GPS signals. The network module receives a device parameter from the remote device that indicates that local GPS signals are available to the remote device. The network module reduces a frequency of the time stamps when the device parameter indicates that local GPS signals are available to the remote device. | 07-11-2013 |
20130179934 | LAPTOP BASED TELEVISION REMOTE CONTROL - A portable computer may be provided that interacts with a television system. The portable computer may be adapted to receive a user input identifying a media selection and transmit a control signal to cause the storage of the media selection. In other aspects, a set top box may receive a control signal from a portable computer and direct storage of a media selection. | 07-11-2013 |
20130183911 | CONFIGURABLE ANTENNA STRUCTURE - A configurable antenna structure includes a plurality of switches, a plurality of antenna components, and a configuration module. The configuration module is operable to configure the plurality of switches and the plurality of antenna components into a first antenna for receiving a multiple frequency band multiple standard (MFBMS) signal. The configuration module continues processing by identify a signal component of interest of a plurality of signal components of interest within the MFBMS signal. The configuration module continues processing by configuring the plurality of switches and the plurality of antenna components into a second antenna. | 07-18-2013 |
20130195174 | DEVICE ADAPTIVE VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that receives a device parameter from a remote device and that transmits a video signal to the remote device, wherein the video signal is transmitted as at least one separate video layer stream chosen from, an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A control module chooses the at least one separate video layer stream based on the device parameter. | 08-01-2013 |
20130203387 | ENABLING REMOTE AND ANONYMOUS CONTROL OF MOBILE AND PORTABLE MULTIMEDIA DEVICES FOR SECURITY, TRACKING AND RECOVERY - Aspects of the invention comprise a remote tracking and control server operable to transparently activate control of resources and to monitor operations on a target handheld communication device utilizing code installed on the handheld device. The resources may comprise a camera, microphone, GPS receiver, input device, display, speaker, wireless and/or wire-line transmitter and/or receiver. The monitoring and/or controlling activity is protected from interruption. The handheld device may be accessed by a securely stored unique identifier. Access to the controlling function and/or the resources by a user of the handheld device may be restricted. Monitored information is stored on the handheld device and communicated to the tracking server. The control server may receive monitored information from the handheld device whenever the device is coupled to a communication network. Monitoring may be initiated based on detected motion, sound, user input, video and/or touch. | 08-08-2013 |
20130212218 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTED INFRASTRUCTURE FOR STREAMING DATA VIA MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS - Methods and systems for distributed infrastructure for streaming data via multiple access points. Aspects of one method may include apportioning multimedia information among a plurality of transmitting devices based on feedback channel information received from a destination receiving device by, for example, a transmission controller device. The transmitting devices may transmit the multimedia information to the destination receiving device. A transmitting device that may not be apportioned multimedia information may transmit a probing signal. The destination receiving device may generate feedback channel information for a transmitting device, for example, based on the multimedia information or the probing signal received from the respective transmitting device. The apportioning of the multimedia information may be dynamically adjusted based on updated feedback channel information received from the destination receiving device. | 08-15-2013 |
20130223573 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL UNIVERSAL FRONT END WITH ADJUSTABLE ADC(S) - A wireless device includes processing circuitry, a receiver section, a transmitter section, and an antenna. The processing circuitry determines a set of information signals of a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal. The receiver section down-converts a portion of the RF MFBMS signal by one or more respective shift frequencies to produce a corresponding baseband/low Intermediate Frequency (BB/IF) information signal from which the processing circuitry extracts data. The transmitter section converts a respective BB/IF information signal received from the processing circuitry by a respective shift frequency to produce a corresponding RF information signal and a combiner that combines the RF information signals to form a RF MFBMS signal. The receiver section and the transmitter section include ADCs and/or DACs, respectively, that are adjustable based upon characteristics of the RF MFBMS signal, the BB/IF MFBMS signal, and/or based upon signals carried therein, e.g., modulation type, SNR requirements, etc. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227005 | PERSONAL INTER-HOME MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system and method support the exchange of media between friends, family members, and 3rd party media providers over a closed and secure media exchange network. The media may include, for example, digital video, digital audio, digital images, digital data, or any form of digital information. | 08-29-2013 |
20130227021 | Media processing system communicating activity information to support user interaction during media broadcasts - A system and method for communicating activity information to support user interaction during media broadcasts in a media exchange network. In one aspect, a first user may associate a second user with particular media characteristics. The second user may be notified when the first user consumes media having pre-defined characteristics matching those associated with the second user. The second user may keep records of the consumption of media with particular media characteristics, and may provide services or incentives to the first user. A system may comprise a first and a second set top box, each having storage with an associated network address. A user of the second set top box may have at least one associated media characteristic, and the second user may be sent a notification when the first user requests media with pre-defined characteristics matching the media characteristic associated with the second user. | 08-29-2013 |
20130229066 | WIRELESS POWER SYSTEM WITH SELECTABLE CONTROL CHANNEL PROTOCOLS - A wireless power system includes a wireless power transmit and receive units. The wireless power transmit unit includes a wireless power transmit circuit that generates a wireless power magnetic field and a transmit unit transceiver that transceives a communication regarding the wireless power magnetic field in accordance with a control channel protocol. The wireless power receive unit includes a wireless power receive circuit, a transceiver, and a processing module. The wireless power receive circuit converts the wireless power magnetic field into a voltage. The receive unit processing module is operable to: identify the control channel protocol; determine whether the receive unit transceiver is capable of communication using the control channel protocol; and, when the receive unit transceiver is capable of communication using the control channel protocol, coordinate configuration of the receive unit transceiver to transceive the communication regarding the wireless power magnetic field via the control channel. | 09-05-2013 |
20130232033 | BILLING SUPPORT IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A system providing billing support for the exchange of media is disclosed. An embodiment of the present invention may provide for the authorization of and billing for the delivery of media from a media server to local storage for consumption on a television display. The media may be audio, still pictures, video, or data. Other embodiments may provide for the authorization of and billing for the transfer of media from a media peripheral to a media server for media backup or distribution. A media peripheral may be, for example, a digital camera, digital camcorder, personal computer (PC), personal digital assistant (PDA), multi-media gateway, and MP3 player. An embodiment may support pre-payment, payment at time of use, and post-use billing for the media exchange. In an embodiment of the present invention, the storing or accessing of media may be performed without identifying the user to the media server. | 09-05-2013 |
20130237169 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND MULTIPLE STANDARD TRANSCEIVER - A transceiver includes a receiver section and a transmitter section. The receiver section converts an inbound Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal into a down converted signal, wherein the inbound MFBMS signal includes a desired signal component and an undesired signal component. In addition, the receiver section determines spectral positioning of the undesired signal component with respect to the desired signal component and adjusts at least one of the MFBMS signal and the down converted signal based on the spectral positioning to substantially reduce adverse affects of the undesired signal component on the desired signal component to produce an adjusted signal. The transmitter section converts an outbound symbol stream into an outbound MFBMS signal. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237236 | Method and System for Mitigating Interference Among Femtocells Via Intelligent Channel Selection - Aspects of a method and system for mitigating interference among femtocells via intelligent channel selection are provided. In this regard, signals which may interfere with cellular communications between a femtocell and a cellular communication device may be detected via the femtocell. Based on the detection, the femtocell may be configured to transmit and/or receive signals on one or more frequencies and/or channels. The one or more frequencies and/or channels may be determined in the femtocell and/or in a network management entity. Detecting interfering signals and configuring the one or more femtocells may occur periodically, upon installation of a femtocell, upon power-up of a femtocell, and/or upon command from a network administrator. The results of the detection may be communicated to one or more other femtocells and/or to a network management entity. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237322 | HAND-HELD GAMING DEVICE WITH CONFIGURABLE TOUCH SENSITIVE PANEL(S) - A game controller with a communications interface includes a touch sensitive pad having a plurality of touch sensitive elements, and processing circuitry coupled to the communications interface and the at least one touch sensitive pad. The processing circuitry enacts touch pad configuration settings that correlate subsets of the plurality of touch sensitive elements to produce distinct user input locations. The processing circuitry receives touch pad input from the at least one touch sensitive pad. The processing circuitry processes the touch pad input to determine user input directions based upon the touch pad configuration settings, and then transmits the touch pad input directions via the communications interface for use as gaming input. | 09-12-2013 |
20130239118 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AN ATOMIZING FUNCTION OF A MOBILE DEVICE - Systems, apparatuses and methods are disclosed for apportioning tasks among devices. One such method is performed in handheld wireless communication device (HWCD). The method includes discovering available resources in a network and dynamically assessing cost functions for performing a task on the HWCD and on each of the discovered resources. Each of the respective cost functions is based on performance factors associated with the HWCD or with one of the devices. Based on change in the cost functions, the task is apportioned for local execution by the HWCD or remote execution by the available resources. | 09-12-2013 |
20130246499 | Processor Sharing Between In-Range Devices - A system and method for processor sharing between in-range devices. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise establishing a wireless communication link between a first system and a second system, for example, utilizing respective communication modules. A processing capability of the second system that is available for use with the first system may be identified, for example, by respective processing capability identification modules. An indication of the identified processing capability may be output, for example, by respective output modules of at least one of the first and second systems. A request for utilizing the identified processing capability of the second system with the first system may be received, for example, by respective interface modules of at least one of the first and second systems. The requested processing capability of the second system may be utilized with the first system, for example, by respective processing modules of the systems. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250769 | COMMUNICATION SESSION SOFT HANDOVER - While receiving content for a service at a user device via a particular delivery route, detecting a request for delivery of subsequent content for the service via a secure alternate delivery route. The user device may concurrently receive delivery of the subsequent content via the particular delivery route and the secure alternate delivery route. The detected request may be generated based on QoS associated with the received content of the service. The detected request may be received from a communication network and may comprise identification information for the particular delivery route. The secure alternate delivery route may be determined based on the identification information for the particular delivery route. A communication session profile may be generated and/or determined based on the secure alternate delivery route. The communication session profile is utilized for the requested delivery of the further content via the secure alternate delivery route. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252598 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF POWER AND FREQUENCIES IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - Aspects of a method and system for dynamic adjustment of power, antenna direction and frequencies in a femtocell network are provided. In this regard, a communication system may comprise a plurality of femtocells, one or more base stations, and a femtocell management entity that coordinates operation of the plurality of femtocells. One or more parameters may be communicated from one of the plurality of femtocells and/or one or more base stations to the femtocell management entity. The femtocell management entity may be enabled to utilize the one or more parameters to determine configuration information for one of the plurality of femtocells and/or for one or more remaining ones of the plurality of femtocells. One of the plurality of femtocells may be enabled to receive the determined configuration information from the femtocell management entity. One of the plurality of femtocells may be configured utilizing the received determined configuration information. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252617 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. An environmental monitoring receiver processes received RF signals over a broadband spectrum and that generates environmental data in response thereto. A processing module processes the environmental data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the environmental data. In an embodiment of the present invention, the environmental monitoring receiver can be implemented via one of the plurality of transceivers when operating in an environmental monitoring mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130254543 | Systems And Methods For Providing Security To Different Functions - Methods and systems are provided that use smartcards, such as subscriber identity module (SIM) cards to provide secure functions for a mobile client. One embodiment of the invention provides a mobile communication network system that includes a mobile network, a mobile terminal, a server coupled to the mobile terminal via the mobile network, and a subscriber identity module (SIM) card coupled to the mobile terminal. The SIM card includes a first key and a second key. The first key is used to authenticate an intended user of the mobile terminal to the mobile network. Upon successful authentication of the intended user to the mobile network, the mobile terminal downloads a function offered from the server through the mobile network. The second key is then used by the mobile terminal to authenticate the intended user to the downloaded function so that the intended user can utilize the function. | 09-26-2013 |
20130259019 | MULTI-MODE WLAN/PAN MAC - A novel solution is presented in which a MAC (Medium Access Controller) is implemented that includes multiple functionality types. This MAC may include functionality supporting communication according to one or more of the IEEE 802.11 WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) related standards and also to one or more of the standards generated by the IEEE 802.15.3 PAN (Personal Area Network) working group. By providing this dual functionality of a multi-mode WLAN/PAN MAC, a communication device may adaptively change the manner in which it communicates with other communication devices. For example, in an effort to maximize throughput and overall efficiency of communication within a communication system, certain of the various devices may change from using the WLAN related standards to using the PAN related standards, and vice versa, based on any one or more of a variety of operational parameters including system configuration. | 10-03-2013 |
20130262491 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING INFORMATION BASED ON DETECTED BIOMETRIC EVENT DATA - A system and method is provided for processing and storing captured data in a wireless communication device based on detected biometric event data. The captured data may be acquired through a data acquisition system with devices or sensors in an integrated or distributed configuration. The captured data may include multimedia data of an event with time, date and/or location stamping, and captured physiological and behavioral biometric event data in response to the event. The captured data may be dynamically stored in a data binding format or as raw data in a local host device or communicated externally to be stored in a remote host or storage. At least one user preference may be specified for linking a biometric event data to the mapped, analyzed, categorized and stored captured data in a database. Captured data may be retrieved by matching biometric event data to at least one user preference from the database. | 10-03-2013 |
20130267214 | PROFILE SELECTION AND CALL FORWARDING BASED UPON WIRELESS TERMINAL GPS LOCATION COORDINATES - A wireless terminal adjusts its profile settings based upon its GPS coordinates. The wireless terminal accesses its GPS receiver to determine its location coordinates, which may include elevation. The wireless terminal then accesses a plurality of location based profile rules, each of which includes location parameters and corresponding profile settings. The wireless terminal selects a location based profile rule of the plurality of location based profile rules based upon the location coordinates of the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal enacts corresponding profile settings of the selected location based profile rule. The profile settings may cause the wireless terminal to adjust its ringer on/off settings, its ringer volume settings, the number of rings it provides in response to an incoming communication, the ringer cadence, the number of repeat rings for incoming communications, vibration settings, call filtering settings, call forwarding settings, or message receipt settings, for example. | 10-10-2013 |
20130275749 | Secure Anonymity In A Media Exchange Network - Secure communication of information in a communication network may comprise acquiring a security code from a second communication device by a first communication device and receiving media containing the security code such as a pin code from the first communication device. The security code may be translated into an IP address corresponding to the second communication device. The received media may be routed to the second communication device based on the IP address of the second communication device. In this regard, the IP address of the second communication device remains anonymous or unknown to the first communication device. A duration for which the security code is valid may be limited to a specific time period and/or for a particular number of uses. Notwithstanding, the security code may be acquired out-of-band. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279604 | Network Packet Aware Data Encoding - A communication device is operable to manage communication of data streams, which comprise data encoded utilizing scheme that generate plurality of frames with logical grouping and/or inter-frame dependencies, based on determination of network payload parameters that are utilized for the data transmission. Exemplary encoding schemes comprise MPEG encoding, which generates data streams comprised I-frames, P-frames and/or B-frames. Network packets that are utilized to perform data communication are generated such that packet payloads comprise only data corresponding to a single frame and/or logical grouping within the encoded data stream. Feedback from networking subsystem in the communication device may be provided during processing of the data streams to enable use of network payload parameters during encoding operations. Frame sizes may be adjusted, for example, so that a size of each frame is multiple of a size of a payload of the network packets that are utilized in data communication. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281103 | CHANNEL FREQUENCY REUSE FOR NARROW BEAM VIDEO STREAMING BASED UPON MOBILE TERMINAL LOCATION INFORMATION - Transmitting signals to at least one wireless terminal by a wireless network having a channel frequency reuse pattern. A transceiving device within the wireless network selects a channel in contradistinction to the channel frequency reuse pattern to service transmission of a signal to the at least one wireless terminal. | 10-24-2013 |
20130282900 | Communication system and method for discovering end-points that utilize a link layer connection in a wired/wireless local area network - A communication system and method are provided for discovering wireless client devices within a local area network. A discovery message may be broadcast to a plurality of access points via a select access point to discover an access point. A response may be received from the discovered access point that may report a presence of a particular wireless client device located within a coverage area of the discovered access point. A status of the particular wireless client device may then be requested from the discovered access point. | 10-24-2013 |
20130288651 | User Profile Based Content Delivery Between a Standard Handset and a Femtocell Device - An access device receives content from a broadband IP network to be communicated to a wireless handset over a radio access network (RAN). The access device acquires a user profile utilized in the radio network for the wireless handset. Based on the acquired user profile, the access device determines transmission parameters utilized for communicating the received content to the wireless handset using an air interface protocol over the radio access network. A security level and/or a security protocol, a transcoding mechanism, and/or transmission bit rate are determined based on the acquired user profile. A resolution, transmission bit rate, coding structure, security protocol and/or security level for transmitting the received content to the wireless handset are adjusted based on the acquired user profile. Alternately, the access device is enabled to receive content from the wireless handset using a transmission profile determined Lased on user profile of the wireless handset. | 10-31-2013 |
20130289382 | ARTICLE OF CLOTHING INCLUDING BIO-MEDICAL UNITS - An article of clothing includes a clothing fabric and a plurality of bio-medical units integrated into the clothing fabric. A bio-medical includes a power harvesting module, a communication module, a processing module, a functional module, a die, and an IC package. The die supports the power harvesting module, the processing module, the communication module, and the functional module. The IC package houses the die and includes a mechanism for adhering to the clothing fabric. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294503 | CHANNEL ADAPTIVE VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video transmission system includes a transceiver module that transmits a video signal to a remote device over at least one communications channel wherein the video signal is transmitted as at least one separate video layer stream chosen from, an independent video layer stream and at least one dependent video layer streams that require the independent video layer for decoding. A control module determines at least one channel characteristic of the at least one channel and chooses the at least one separate video layer stream based on the at least one channel characteristic of the at least one channel. | 11-07-2013 |
20130298152 | Supporting multiple users from a single location sharing a media processing system via a personal media guide - Systems and methods of supporting multiple users from a single location sharing a media processing system via a personal media guide are provided. In one embodiment, a system may comprise, for example, a communication device, media content, and a software platform. The communication device may be coupled to a communication network. The media content may be disposed in the communication network or the communication device, and the media content may comprise broadcast media and personal media. The software platform may reside on the communication device, and the software platform may further receive authentication information and facilitate a display of a user-defined selection from the media content by the communication device in a user-defined layout. | 11-07-2013 |
20130303148 | Multimode Mobile Communication Device With Configuration Update Capability - A system and method in a multimode mobile communication device for providing communication configuration update capability. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise establishing a first communication link characterized by a first communication mode of a plurality of communication modes in which the multimode communication device is capable of communicating. Such a first communication link may, for example, be established utilizing a first communication interface module. Communication configuration (or profile) information for a second communication mode may be received over the first communication link. The communication configuration information for the second communication mode may then be utilized to configure the mobile communication device to perform communications in the second communication mode (e.g., utilizing a second communication interface module). | 11-14-2013 |
20130308603 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. A control channel transceiver transceives control channel data with a remote management unit including local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308710 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR SCRAMBLING LAYERED VIDEO STREAMS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video encoder that encodes a video stream into an independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream that requires the independent video layer for decoding. A scrambling module scrambles the independent video layer stream to produce a scrambled independent video layer stream and leaves the first dependent video layer stream unscrambled. | 11-21-2013 |
20130310005 | SERVICE MOBILITY VIA A FEMTOCELL INFRASTRUCTURE - Aspects of a method and system for service mobility via a femtocell infrastructure are provided. In this regard, a mobile cellular enabled communication device may detect a femtocell operable to deliver content for one or more services to the mobile cellular enabled communication device, where the one or more services may be provided via a set-top-box communicatively coupled to the femtocell. The mobile cellular enabled communication device may communicate a user profile to the femtocell, wherein information in the profile may be utilized by the set-top-box to authenticate and/or authorize access to the services by the mobile cellular enabled communication device and thus the mobile cellular enabled communication device may receive the content from the set-top-box based on the authentication and/or authorization. The content may comprise voice, video, data, text and/or still images. The mobile cellular enabled communication device may detect the femtocell by receiving one or broadcast messages from the femtocell. | 11-21-2013 |
20130311679 | SERVER ARCHITECTURE SUPPORTING A PERSONAL MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Certain aspects of the invention may be found in a method and system for setting up devices for communication on a communication network and may include a headend that may detect when a first device is initially coupled to the communication network and assign an address to the first device. The headend may transfer the assigned address to the first device and in response to receiving the transferred assigned address and/or an identifier of the first device from the first device, the headend may communicate the transferred received assigned address and/or the identifier of the first device to at least one communication server coupled to the communication network. The assigned address of the first device may be a static address, a dynamic address and/or an embedded device address such as a MAC address. The identifier of the first device may be a digital certificate and/or a serial number. | 11-21-2013 |
20130312032 | Media exchange network having media processing systems and personal computers with common user interfaces - A system supporting a common user interface for the consumption of media is disclosed. In an embodiment of the present invention, a set top box and a personal computer may have user interfaces that are substantially the same, providing users of such systems substantially the same look and feel in exchanging and consuming media. The media in such an embodiment may comprise audio, still images, video, real time video, and data. In addition, a media peripheral may also have a user interface supporting the exchange and consumption of media, and the user interface may be substantially the same interface as that of a set top box or a personal computer, having substantially the same look and feel. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315144 | Location-Aware Application Based Quality Of Service (Qos) Via A Broadband Access Gateway - A system and method supporting access to multimedia information based upon user-defined quality of service criteria is disclosed. A broadband access gateway may coordinate network behavior during the transition of an access device among communication pathways having different available capacities. Adjustments in bit rates and levels of compression may be made based upon the user-defined quality of service criteria. The user may be notified when network conditions disallow support for the desired quality of service, and may choose to override selected criteria. The user-defined quality of service criteria may be stored within the gateway and associated with a user, or may be located in the access device and accessible to the gateway. | 11-28-2013 |
20130316702 | Method and System for Timely Delivery of Multimedia Content via a Femtocell - Aspects of a method and system for timely delivery of multimedia content via a femtocell are provided. In this regard, a femtocell may receive data via an upstream path and transmit data via a downstream path. One of the upstream path and downstream path may comprise a cellular path and the other may comprise a non-cellular path. One or both of the upstream path and the downstream path may be audio video bridging (AVB) paths. Data may be stored in the femtocell based on timing characteristics of one or both of the upstream path and the downstream path. Data may be delivered to the femtocell utilizing best effort delivery and the data may be forwarded by the femtocell with guaranteed quality of service. Resources in the femtocell may be reserved and/or synchronized, utilizing AVB protocols, for communication of one or more data streams. | 11-28-2013 |
20130318204 | THIRD-PARTY ACCESS AND CONTROL OF MEDIA PERIPHERALS ON A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Methods are disclosed for a 3rd party system to indirectly access, control, monitor, and test a media peripheral (MP) device on a media exchange network by establishing a communication link between the 3rd party system and the media peripheral (MP) device via at least one media management system (MMS). A third party may select an operation of a MP device via a MMS over the communication link, causing the MP device to perform the selected operation. The 3rd party may monitor at least one status parameter of a MP device via a MMS over the communication link and respond to the status parameter. As a service, the 3rd party may push digital information (e.g., digital data, digital audio, digital images, digital video, etc.) to a MP device via a MMS over the communication link and bill an account associated with the MP device on the media exchange network. | 11-28-2013 |
20130329676 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A MESH NETWORK USING A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS (WAPs) - A first access point located in a first cell may be coupled to a second access point located in a second cell. Service may be initially provided to an access device by the first access point cell. The access device may subsequently be serviced by a second access point whenever a signal for the access device falls below a specified threshold level. The second cell may be a neighboring cell, which may be located adjacent to the first cell. A first signal may be transmitted from a first beamforming antenna coupled to the first access point, to the second access point via an uplink channel. Similarly, a second signal may be transmitted from a second beamforming antenna coupled to the second access point, to the first access point via a downlink channel. The uplink and downlink channels may be a backhaul channel. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336217 | Providing User-Spot (U-Spot) Services In A Communication System - A mobile communication device may be utilized to establish a localized user network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is then operable to determine services that may be provided in the user network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within the user network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Mobile communication devices are also operable to provide, directly or via local and/or remote resources, additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in user networks is incentivized to the mobile communication devices and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the mobile communication devices. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in U-Spot networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources. | 12-19-2013 |
20130342523 | Adaptive Control of Display Characteristics of Pixels of a LCD Based on Video Content - Determining pixel behavior type of a pixel or a group of pixels of a LCD and triggering adjustment in drive power of the pixel or the group of pixels based on the pixel behavior type. The pixel behavior type indicates relative motion of areas on the LCD in a video. A pixel behavior determination module directs one or more selected pixels of the LCD to be driven relative slower or faster based upon content of video that the selected pixels display. Operations include identifying an active window from a plurality of windows corresponding to a plurality of applications running on the host device and setting the drive power of those pixels that correspond to the active window based on speed of a video displayed on the active window. Operation may also include adapting LCD drive power on a pixel by pixel basis based upon user input and/or remaining battery life. | 12-26-2013 |
20130344808 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION FOR A RF COMMUNICATION DEVICE BASED ON ITS PROXIMITY TO A MOBILE DEVICE - A mobile device may be operable to determine, based on a known location of the mobile device, a location for a RF communication device that communicates with the mobile device, whenever the mobile device is within proximate range of the RF communication device. The determined location for the RF communication device may be stored in a location database in a location server and/or a memory in the RF communication device. The stored location of the RF communication device may then be used to determine a location for other mobile devices that may communicate with the RF communication device and are within proximate range of the RF communication device. The RF communication device may comprise a radio-frequency identification (RFID) device and/or a near field communication (NFC) device. The determined location for the RF communication device may comprise the known location of the mobile device. | 12-26-2013 |
20130345885 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING A BROADBAND GATEWAY TO PROVIDE ENERGY EFFICIENT MANAGEMENT IN A HOME NETWORK - A broadband gateway may provide energy management service within a home network. The energy management service may enable reducing and/or enhancing energy consumption within the home network. The energy management service may comprise managing one or more devices in the home network by the broadband gateway. The energy management service may be performed based on energy-related information associated with devices, and the information may be stored by the broadband gateway. At least some of the energy-related information may be acquired from the managed devices. The energy management service may comprise controlling and/or configuring the managed devices, and/or communications between the managed devices within the home network. The broadband gateway may track actual energy usage by the managed devices. Information corresponding to energy-related activities and/or usage may be displayed via a user interface. The information may also be reported to entities external to the home network. | 12-26-2013 |
20140007166 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEDIA CHANNEL SETUP IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK | 01-02-2014 |
20140010113 | Method And System For Scalable Switching Architecture - A switching fabric, within a network switching device, may comprise a plurality of dedicated interface modules to enable the switching fabric to interface with a plurality of switching support subsystems. The switching support subsystems may comprise a memory subsystem, a content address memory (CAM) subsystem, a packet processing subsystem, and a physical layer (PHY) subsystem. The switching fabric may be operable to determine capacity and/or capability of each of the plurality of switching support subsystems; and to configure each of the plurality of dedicated interface modules based on the determined capacity and/or capability of a corresponding switching support subsystem. The switching fabric also comprises an inter-switch interface module to enable coupling the network switching device to a plurality of other network switching devices, to form a multi-device switching mesh that enable sharing of resources and/or aggregation of switching capabilities of the network switching devices. | 01-09-2014 |
20140011537 | Single Chip Multimode Baseband Processing Circuitry With A Shared Radio Interface - A multimode communication integrated circuit comprising baseband processing circuitry with a shared radio interface. Various aspects of the present invention may comprise a processor module adapted to perform various processing (e.g., baseband processing) in support of multimode communications. A first radio module may be communicatively coupled to the processor module through a common communication interface. A second radio module may also be communicatively coupled to the processor module through the common communication interface. The common communication interface may, for example, be adapted to communicate information over a communication bus that is shared between the processor module and a plurality of radio modules (e.g., the first and second radio modules). | 01-09-2014 |
20140013328 | Method And System For Abstracting Virtual Machines In A Network - One or more processors and/or one or more circuits may be operable to configure one or more virtual machines and a hypervisor for controlling the one or more virtual machines. The virtual machines and the hypervisor may be distributed across a plurality of network devices. A sub-hypervisor may be configured within each of the virtual machines utilizing the hypervisor. Load information of the network devices may be communicated to the hypervisor utilizing the sub-hypervisors. The virtual machines may include threads, may be load balanced utilizing the hypervisor, dynamically configured utilizing the hypervisor based on changes in the network devices, and scaled by the distribution of the virtual machines across the network devices. Information from the processing of data may be received in the virtual machines. The network devices may include a plurality of: servers, switches, routers, racks, blades, mainframes, personal data assistants, smart phones, desktop computers, and/or laptop devices. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016608 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR UTILIZING STANDARDIZED INTERFACE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE TO DISCOVER AND USE LOCAL AND REMOTE RESOURCES - A wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may discover available networks, and available local and/or remote resources. The WMC device may configure routes utilizing one or more of discovered resources and one or more available networks. The routes may be utilized to performed operations requested via the WMC device. A standardized language and/or protocol may be utilized in discovering and/or communicating with available resources and/or networks. The standardized language and/or protocol may enable commonality among the discovered networks and/or resources, and encryption of data communicated through the established routes. The standardized language and/or protocol may be updated and/or modified to incorporate new resources either by direct interactions between said new resources and the WMC device, or via existing available resources and/or networks. The discovery of resources and/or establishment of routes may be user-triggered, or it may be based on user preference information. | 01-16-2014 |
20140022930 | DUAL MODE OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is dual mode operation by a communicating device in wireless network. The communicating device selects a radio frequency (RF) channel and a physical layer type. The communicating device processes signals received via the selected RF channel based on the selected physical layer type. The communicating device may determine whether a beacon frame has been detected base on the signals that were received via the selected RF channel and processed based on the selected physical layer type. When a frame is not detected, the communicating device may determine a signal energy level for the received signals. The communicating device may establish an association with an existing network based on detection of the beacon frame or the communicating device may transmit an originating beacon frame based on the determined signal energy level. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022931 | SPATIAL MAPPING OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SERVICE AREA - Spatial mapping of wireless access point service area. A means is presented by which a WACN's (Wireless Access Control Node's) service area is spatially mapped providing information corresponding to coverage region(s) within the WACN's service area. This spatial mapping may be generated and stored within either communication device at either end of a communication link (e.g., in a WACN or in a communication device operable to connect to the WACN). From the WACN's perspective, the spatial map can include its one or more coverage regions within its service area. From a communication device's perspective (e.g., a communication device that is capable to connect to a WACN), the spatial map can include multiple service areas provided by multiple WACNs and the various coverage regions therein. The partitioning of a WACN's service area into coverage areas can be performed along various lines (e.g., signal strength, history of connectivity, operational parameters employed, etc.). | 01-23-2014 |
20140024359 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION OF A FEMTOCELL - Aspects of a method and system for installation and configuration of a femtocell are provided. In this regard, information for configuring a femtocell to operate in a specified location may be received by the femtocell and may be utilized to configure one or more parameters of the femtocell. Once the femtocell is operational the parameters may be updated and/or optimized based on one or both of characterizations of cellular signals and/or information received from a femtocell registry. In this manner the femtocell may be reconfigured utilizing the updated and/or optimized parameters. The one or more parameters may be configured based on attributes of the location in which the femtocell is to operate. The one or more parameters may be configured based on a location, number, and/or coverage area of other femtocells The parameters may comprise one or more of power levels, frequency of operation, and/or antenna beam pattern. | 01-23-2014 |
20140032721 | Remote management of TV viewing options in a media exchange network - A system supporting the remote management of options related to media consumption in a media exchange network. A system may comprise a set top box communicatively coupled to a television display and storage. The set top box may be used for the consumption of media via a communication network. In such a system, server software may enable the remote modification, via a communication network, of options related to the consumption of media by a user of the set top box. The media consumed may be one or more of digital audio, a digital still image, digital video, and digital data. Other aspects may be seen in a personal computer monitor and personal computer circuitry, communicatively coupled to a storage and a communication network. A system may also enable the modification of TV viewing options via a telephone voice response system. | 01-30-2014 |
20140047486 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM AND TRANSCODER FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video transcoder that receives a independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream that requires the independent video layer for decoding, the video transcoder generating a transcoded video signal based at least one of the independent video stream and the dependent video layer stream. | 02-13-2014 |
20140066076 | Method and System for Location-Based Dynamic Radio Selection - A multi-radio mobile device comprises a plurality of different radios. When a location update occurs, the multi-radio mobile device, at a specific location, acquires location-based radio information from a remote location server. The multi-radio mobile device selects a radio for use in the specific location based on the acquired location-based radio information comprising available radios in the specific location and radio weights. The radio is selected from the available radios based on the radio weights in the specific location. Transmissions of a desired service are received in the specific location utilizing the selected radio. Location-based radio measurements reports to the remote location server are generated utilizing signal strength measurements for the received signals. Radio quality information of the available radios is calculated by the location server utilizing location-based radio measurement reports from associated users. The radio weights of the available radios are determined based on the calculated radio quality information. | 03-06-2014 |
20140068004 | Method and System for a Persistent Request Generated by a Wireless Device, Executed Remotely and Output to Configurable Local Resources - Methods and systems for a persistent request generated by a wireless device, executed remotely and output to configurable local resources are described and may include generating via a handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) a persistent request for a user that may be communicated to remote devices for execution and storage of results. The stored results may be received from local resources local which may be configured by the remote devices based on user preferences to deliver the stored results to the user. The stored results may be received by the user via the HWCD or another wireless communication device, and the identity of the user may be authenticated prior to receiving the stored results. The remote devices may discover the local resources based on the detection of the user logging into the network. User preferences may be stored in networked devices or may be stored in the HWCD. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071923 | MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BAND INFORMATION SIGNAL FREQUENCY BAND COMPRESSION - A wireless device includes processing circuitry and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver section. The processing circuitry determines a set of a plurality of information signals of interest within a RF Multiple Frequency Bands Multiple Standards (MFBMS) signal. The RF receiver section down-converts the plurality of information signals by a shift frequency to produce a plurality of down-converted signals and filters the plurality of down-converted signals to produce a plurality of filtered signals corresponding to the set of the information signals of interest. The processing circuitry further extracts data corresponding to the set of the information signals from the plurality of filtered signals. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073324 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH LOGICAL CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive network data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols, wherein at least one of the plurality of transceivers further transceives control channel data with a remote management unit contemporaneously with the network data via a logical control channel carried using the corresponding one of the plurality of network protocols, wherein the control channel data includes local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 03-13-2014 |
20140073325 | Anticipatory Hand-Off Setup Between Networks - A system and method for performing anticipatory hand-off setup between communication networks. Various aspects of the present invention may, for example and without limitation, provide a system and method for performing anticipatory hand-off setup between communication networks. For example and without limitation, prior to a determination to perform a hand-off of a mobile communication device from a first communication network to a second communication network, a determination may be made that hand-off setup information should be communicated with the second communication network. For example, such a determination may be made in anticipation of a hand-off that may or may not happen. Such hand-off setup information may then be communicated with the second communication network. Such communicated setup information may then, for example, be utilized to at least partially prepare for performing the anticipated hand-off. | 03-13-2014 |
20140077994 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR 60 GHZ ANTENNA ADAPTATION AND USER COORDINATION BASED ON BASE STATION BEACONS - Information may be communicated between two or more wireless devices via adaptive or steered antennas or antenna systems and | 03-20-2014 |
20140080526 | KEYBOARD WITH BUILT IN DISPLAY FOR PERSONAL AREA NETWORK ESTABLISHMENT AND INTER-OPERATION - A method and wireless communication device are provided for creating a personal area network with a personal area network (PAN) device, communicating with a wireless network and forwarding text messages between the PAN device and the wireless network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140082219 | Customized Delivery of Content by a Broadband Gateway - Aspects of customized delivery of content by a broadband gateway are provided. A broadband gateway may be operable to determine one or more characteristics of acquired content. The gateway may be operable to determine, based on the determined characteristics, whether the acquired content may be compatible with a device. In instances that the acquired content is not compatible with the device, the gateway may transcode the acquired content to make it compatible with the device. The one or more characteristics may comprise an identity or a type of a provider associated with the acquired content, a quality of the acquired content, power consumption associated with communicating the acquired content to a destination device, or power consumption associated with presenting or otherwise processing the acquired content on a destination device. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086320 | Multiple Decoding - A system for processing information received from a plurality of source devices. Various aspects of the present invention provide a first video generating device that produces a first video output that comprises compressed video information representative of a sequence of video frames, the compressed video information comprising inter-frame comparison information. A second video generating device is also provided, which produces a second video output. A processing module is communicatively coupled to the first and second video generating devices and independent of such devices. The processing module may decompress the first video output from the first video generating device. A video presentation device is provided, which may generate a display corresponding to the first video output via the processing module and a display corresponding to the second video output via the processing module. Generally analogous components for processing audio information are also provided. | 03-27-2014 |
20140105111 | Over The Air Programming Via A Broadband Access Gateway - A system and method supporting over-the-air programming of access device such as, for example, a mobile multimedia handset and a wireless personal digital assistant (PDA) via a broadband access gateway, is disclosed. The broadband access gateway may receive identifying information from the access device via a personal area network and/or a wireless local area network, and may transfer the identifying information to a wide area network or a third party content provider, via a broadband network. The broadband access gateway may enable the registration of the access device with the wide area network, and may receive firmware/software updates and/or provisioning parameters via the broadband network. The gateway may then transfer the firmware/software update and/or provisioning parameters to the access device via the personal area network and/or wireless local area network. | 04-17-2014 |
20140106714 | Systems And Methods For Providing Security To Different Functions - Methods and systems provide secure functions for a mobile client. A circuit may include a memory configured to store a server access key and a first function authentication key. The circuit may also include authentication circuitry configured to access the server access key to authenticate access to a server to download a function capsule comprising a first function and to access the first function authentication key to authenticate use of the first function of the function capsule. | 04-17-2014 |
20140111319 | ACCESS, MONITORING, AND CONTROL OF APPLIANCES VIA A MEDIA PROCESSING SYSTEM - A device and method for accessing, monitoring, and controlling home appliances in a media exchange network by establishing a communication link between a communication initiation device and at least one home appliance and communicating at least one command from the communication initiation device to the at least one home appliance via the communication link. The at least one home appliance then generates at least one response to the at least one command. The commands may include turning the home appliance(s) on and off, parameter adjustment commands, access commands, monitoring commands, mode change commands, and programming commands. Appliance responses may include powering on, powering off, changing a mode of operation, sending a status to the communication initiation device, adjusting an operational parameter, and changing a programmed operational step. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112196 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION OUTSIDE A MESH BY INCLUDING NETWORK CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION IN ROUTER CONFIGURATION MESSAGES - A Wireless mobile communication (WMC) device may maintain user preference information, which is unique to the WMC device capabilities and the device user. WMC devices located in near proximity of each other may be enabled to form an ad hoc wireless network wherein each WMC device within the network may function as a router for other devices. Utilizing such routing capability within an ad hoc wireless network may allow WMC devices that are out of their wireless coverage area to use other WMC devices within such ad hoc wireless network to route any impending communication through such other WMC devices wherein these devices may have wireless connectivity to their coverage networks. WMC devices that are may have external connectivity may be enable to be selective in routing information and/or data from other WMC devices in the ad hoc network. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112644 | COLLECTION AND CONCURRENT INTEGRATION OF SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION RELATED TO CURRENTLY PLAYING MEDIA - Collection and concurrent integration of supplemental information related to currently playing media. Based on certain characteristics associated with the media, additional information related thereto is identified and output along with the media itself. This provides an enhanced experience for a user, in that, this supplemental information augments the presentation of the media to the user. Such supplemental content can be any one or combination of a wide variety of types including textual information, image content, audio content, video content, etc. This supplemental content may be output automatically in conjunction with the media (e.g., when such media is being output). Alternatively, the supplemental content may be output upon the authorization of a user. The supplemental content may be output in a predetermined location (e.g., location within a video display). Alternatively, such supplemental content may be output within an unused (or infrequently used) area of such a video display. | 04-24-2014 |
20140117772 | WIRELESS POWER SYSTEM WITH SELECTABLE CONTROL CHANNEL PROTOCOLS - A wireless power system includes a wireless power transmit and receive units. The wireless power transmit unit includes a wireless power transmit circuit that generates a wireless power magnetic field and a transmit unit transceiver that transceives a communication regarding the wireless power magnetic field in accordance with a control channel protocol. The wireless power receive unit includes a wireless power receive circuit, a transceiver, and a processing module. The wireless power receive circuit converts the wireless power magnetic field into a voltage. The receive unit processing module is operable to: identify the control channel protocol; determine whether the receive unit transceiver is capable of communication using the control channel protocol; and, when the receive unit transceiver is capable of communication using the control channel protocol, coordinate configuration of the receive unit transceiver to transceive the communication regarding the wireless power magnetic field via the control channel. | 05-01-2014 |
20140118615 | MODIFICATION OF DELIVERY OF VIDEO STREAM TO WIRELESS DEVICE BASED UPON POSITION/MOTION OF WIRELESS DEVICE - Processing video data for delivery to a remote wireless includes receiving video data from a video source and receiving position and motion information regarding the remote wireless device. Operation also includes, based upon the position and motion information regarding the remote wireless device, determining an anticipated Quality of Service (QoS) available for servicing of transmissions to the remote wireless device and determining video processing parameters based upon the video data and the anticipated QoS. Operation further includes processing the video data based upon the video processing parameters to produce an output video stream and transmitting the output video stream for delivery to the remote wireless device. Operation may also/alternatively include altering wireless transmission parameters of a transport stream servicing delivery of the video data to alter the anticipated QoS. | 05-01-2014 |
20140120880 | Multiple Network, Shared Access Security Architecture Supporting Simultaneous Use Of Single SIM Multi-Radio Device And/Or Phone - A method and system is presented for a mobile wireless communication device that may communicate information to a first network device for enabling authentication, authorization and/or management of accounting for the mobile wireless device for use within a first network that utilizes a first wireless communication standard. A communication session may be established with a second network that utilizes a second wireless standard based on data sent to the second network related to the first authentication, authorization and/or accounting management. The wireless mobile device is operable to establish simultaneous communication sessions with the first network and the second network without communicating authentication, authorization and/or accounting information to the second network. The first and/or second network may comprise and/or share a session control server. The mobile wireless device may receive, store and/or modify additional information associated with the authentication, authorization and/or accounting management. | 05-01-2014 |
20140122211 | Method and System for Recognizing Energy Efficient Certified Devices Through a Gateway - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, may be operable to identify an energy efficient certified device from the plurality of devices. The broadband gateway may handle at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Information related to the identified energy efficient certified device, including usage information of the device, may be communicated to one or more entities. The broadband gateway may acquire the usage information of the energy efficient certified device by monitoring whether the device is operating in an energy efficient mode. The broadband gateway may obtain a credit and/or a reward from the one or more entities based on the usage information of the energy efficient certified device. The broadband gateway may deposit the credit and/or the reward to an account associated with the energy efficient certified device. | 05-01-2014 |
20140129654 | Media exchange network supporting local and remote personalized media overlay - Certain aspects of the invention for displaying alerts in a communication network may comprise receiving an alert from a first device coupled to the communication network. A message corresponding to the received alert may be generated within a home and displayed on a television screen within the home. The generated message may be displayed along with a media broadcast on the television screen and an acknowledgment of the displayed message may be received via a user selection. The acknowledgement may be received from a remote control that controls various functions of the television screen. Displaying of the generated message may be terminated upon receiving the acknowledgement or the generated message may be displayed for a predetermined or specified period of time. The alert, which may be received via a wireless and/or a wired connection, may indicate a status of the first and/or a second device. | 05-08-2014 |
20140132483 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING RENDERING OF ELECTRONIC MEDIA CONTENT VIA A SECURE AD HOC NETWORK CONFIGURATION UTILIZING A HANDHELD WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) establishes an ad hoc network comprising interconnected networks for a user. The HWCD gains access to content on a first device and controls communication of the content from the first device via the HWCD to a second device. The HWCD enables the second device to consume the content. The content may be streamed from the first device via the HWCD to the second device. The first device is a service provider network device or other network device. The access may be authenticated and/or secure. Secure access to the content is extended from the first device to the second device. The ad hoc network is configured and/or reconfigured until communication is complete. The HWCD comprises multiple wireless interfaces. The ad hoc network comprises a PAN, WLAN, WAN and/or cellular network. The HWCD may hand-off among base stations during communication of the content. | 05-15-2014 |
20140137156 | Television System And Method For Providing Computer Network-Based Video - A television system and method for providing computer network-based video. Various aspects may, for example, comprise a television system and method for providing both standard television video combined with computer network-based video, serially and/or concurrently. Various aspects may also comprise a user interface system and method for interacting with a user regarding the presentation and/or control of computer network-based video. | 05-15-2014 |
20140137167 | Remote control device transaction setup in a home network - A technique of using a remote control device to identify a source for transferring content on a home network, a renderer for rendering the content and a pathway within a home network to couple the source to the renderer to transfer the content. The remote control device then transmits control information to the source to set a control parameter value within the source to send the content and transmits control information to the renderer to set a control parameter value within the renderer to receive the content. The commands from the remote configure parameter values associated with a media layer in the source and/or the renderer to initiate a hand-shake to effect the content transfer, so that the source and the renderer need not initiate the hand-shake between themselves. | 05-15-2014 |
20140143841 | WIRELESS DEVICE FOR GROUP ACCESS AND MANAGEMENT - A system and method for establishing a group of wireless devices having shared media stored thereupon associates each group member device of the group of wireless devices, communicates with at least some of the group member devices of the group of wireless devices to identify shared media and upon receiving a request transmitted by a group member device of the group of wireless devices, supports access to shared media. The shared media may be stored on a different group member device, upon a managing server computer, or a media server. Upon a successful validation, the group member device that made the request is notified to facilitate the access to the shared media. The notification includes access information. | 05-22-2014 |
20140148101 | WIRELESS EARPIECE AND WIRELESS MICROPHONE TO SERVICE MULTIPLE AUDIO STREAMS - A wireless microphone and wireless earpiece each may exchange radio frequency (RF) signals with a base unit and render content contained within the exchanged RF signals to a user. This wireless earpiece further includes a wireless interface, a processor, a speaker, a user interface, and an authentication module. The wireless interface allows the earpiece to wirelessly communicate with the base unit. The processor recovers communications exchanged with the base unit that the speaker then renders audible. A user interface coupled to the processor may alert the user to any additional incoming audio communications. Having received the alert, the user may select between the communications. The authentication module allows the wireless earpiece and microphone to pair and register with the base unit. | 05-29-2014 |
20140148173 | Efficient Network Hand-Off Utilizing Stored Beam-Forming Information - A system and method for performing efficient network hand-off (e.g., of a mobile communication device) utilizing stored beam-forming information. For example and without limitation, before determining to perform a particular hand-off, various aspects may comprise storing beam-forming information associated with the particular hand-off. Various aspects may also, for example, comprise determining to perform the particular hand-off. Various aspects may additionally, for example, comprise (e.g., after determining to perform the particular hand-off) accessing the stored beam-forming information associated with the particular hand-off to be performed. Various aspects may further, for example, comprise utilizing the accessed beam-forming information to form a communication beam to utilize for performing the particular hand-off. | 05-29-2014 |
20140173757 | Method And System For Integrating Remote Devices Into A Domestic VLAN - A gateway network device may establish secure connections to a plurality of remote network devices using tunneling protocols to distribute to the remote network devices multimedia content received from one or more content providers. The consumption of the multimedia content may originally be restricted to local network associated with the gateway network device. The secure connections may be set up using L2TP protocol, and the L2TP tunneling connections may be secured using IPSec protocol. Use of multimedia content may be restricted based on DRM policies of the content provider. DRM policies may be implemented using DTCP protocol, which may restrict use of the multimedia content based on roundtrip times and/or IP subnetting. Each content provider may use one or more VLAN identifiers during communication of the multimedia content to the gateway network device, and the gateway network device may associate an additional VLAN identifier with each secure connection. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177441 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A QUEUING SYSTEM INSIDE A MESH NETWORK - Wireless mobile communication (WMC) devices located in operating proximity of each other may be enabled to form a mesh (ad hoc wireless) network. WMC devices in a mesh network may form a queuing system wherein each WMC device may store data forwarded to and/or from other WMC devices in the mesh network. Each WMC device in the mesh network may have different queuing capability based on a plurality of factors that may comprise internal factors such as processing, storage, power, and/or connectivity. The mesh network may comprise an internal addressing scheme that may enable utilization of the queuing system whether or not WMC devices in the mesh network are communicatively coupled to external networks. | 06-26-2014 |
20140208354 | Method and system for TV interface for coordinating media exchange with a media peripheral - Aspects of the invention may be found in a method and system for communicating media and may comprise controlling communication of media from a television without consuming the media by the television. Under control of the television, the media may be transferred from a first location to at least one media peripheral located at a second location. A command initiated from or through the television may also cause media to be transfer from the first location to the second location. At least one command may be received that may effectuate the transfer of media from the first location to the second location. Accordingly, at least one request may be received by the television and utilized to facilitate or control transfer of the media. The television may redirect media from a first location to a second location with the media being received and/or consumed by the television. | 07-24-2014 |
20140219136 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING DIRECTORY SERVICES FOR PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices and handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. A user may be associated with one or more of the plurality of devices. A directory may be generated by the broadband gateway for the peer-to-peer communications based on the identified one or more individuals. The directory may comprise name information, location information, contact information, communication device information, and/or content sharing information. The broadband gateway may communicate the directory to one or more network access service providers and/or one or more content providers. Peer-to-peer exchanges and/or network resource allocations for the peer-to-peer communications may be controlled and/or monitored by the network access services providers and/or the content providers based on information in the directory. | 08-07-2014 |
20140223483 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING PROGRAM PREVIEW OF A PARTICULAR PROGRAM DURING CHANNEL CHANGES VIA A GATEWAY - A gateway (e.g., a broadband gateway), which enables communication with a plurality of devices and handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider, may be operable to receive one or more programs in preview formats from one or more program sources. Each of the one or more programs may be specified in a list. The programs specified in the list may be from different program sources. The broadband gateway may process the received one or more programs in the preview formats for presentation to one or more of the plurality of devices. The processed one or more programs in the preview formats may be communicated by the broadband gateway to the one or more of the plurality of devices, via a programming guide, for program preview by one or more users during program selections from the list. | 08-07-2014 |
20140282737 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEDIA PROCESSING PROVIDING ACCESS TO DISTRIBUTED MEDIA VIA A CHANNEL GUIDE - Certain embodiments of the invention for presenting available media for selection and playback on a television display may comprise detecting available media and constructing at least one display indicating the availability of the detected available media at a plurality of different storage locations. An indication of the different storage locations for the detected available media may be presented in the constructed display in a text format, a graphic format and/or an audio format. One or more content categories associated with the detected available media may be identified and the indication of the different storage locations may be associated with one or more of the content categories. Providers of media and/or storage devices at the different storage locations may be queried for available media and the media acquired accordingly. The constructed display may be represented as a graphical user interface (GUI) and displayed on the television screen. | 09-18-2014 |
20140289775 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERSONAL MEDIA PROGRAM PRODUCTION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - Certain aspects of the invention may be found in a method and system for producing and delivering media content. The method may comprise establishing a personal television channel, modifying media content to produce a media program, and associating the produced media program with the established personal television channel. Metadata such as program metadata and/or primitive metadata associated with the media content may be acquired and edited. Accordingly, the acquired metadata associated with media content may be updated to reflect changes associated with modifying the media content. At least a portion of the produced media content may be displayed within the personal television channel. | 09-25-2014 |
20140304421 | ADAPTIVE MULTIPLE PATHWAY SESSION SETUP TO SUPPORT QoS SERVICES - A user device is operable to request setup of one or more serving routes to be utilized for delivering content to the user device. The user device is operable to receive the delivered content via the one or more serving routes and/or one or more auxiliary routes based on the request. The serving routes and the auxiliary routes are determined based on a provisioning profile for the user device. The provisioning profile comprises preferred service types, desired QoS for one or more services, client account information, and/or client billing and credit verification information. A connection or communication session is established dynamically based on demand, from the user device and/or a supporting network, for each of the determined one or more auxiliary routes. The user device is operable to receive the delivered content via the determined auxiliary routes in the established connection sessions. | 10-09-2014 |
20140308945 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING AND/OR CONFIGURING A MOBILE PLATFORM TO PROVIDE A SUITE OF SERVICES - A system and method for determining a service provider set of one or more service providers to provide a service suite of one or more services in a platform (e.g., a mobile device platform) and configuring such platform to utilize such service provider set to provide such service suite to a user, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 10-16-2014 |
20140323115 | Communication Method And Infrastructure Supporting Device Security And Tracking Of Mobile And Portable Multimedia Devices - From a laptop and a client server interface, a subscriber securely initiates tracking and/or disabling of an electronic device by a server. The subscriber receives location and/or usage reports for the electronic device. The subscriber is provided with the capability to modify a profile, device status and/or transfer ownership of the electronic device via a client server interface. Based on the profile, detection of a particular event triggers tracking and/or disabling of the device by the server. The electronic device registers with the server utilizing its unique device ID and/or the subscriber identity information when accessing the internet. The server is enabled to communicate a status and/or a request for tracking information, to the electronic device. The server is also enabled to receive tracking and/or location information and communicates it to the subscriber's laptop. | 10-30-2014 |
20140366062 | System And Method In A Television System For Providing Information Associated With A User-Selected Person In A Television Program - A system and method in a television system for providing information associated with a user-selected person in a television program, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 12-11-2014 |
20140379886 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING POWER CONSUMPTION IN A HOME NETWORK VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Before allowing the devices to access content from the service provider, the broadband gateway may identify a device power profile for each of the devices, and a network power profile for the content to select a corresponding content delivery mechanism to optimize power consumption. The content may be communicated to the devices utilizing the corresponding selected content delivery mechanism. Depending on configuration, content transcoding may be performed at the broadband gateway and/or at the devices. The content may be burst downloaded and stored in a local storage to be consumed by the devices thereafter. Upon completion of download, the broadband gateway may shut down receiving components to save resources and power. The receiving components may be tuned on to receive additional content when needed. | 12-25-2014 |
20140380381 | System And Method In A Television System For Responding To User-Selection Of An Object In A Television Program Based On User Location - A system and method in a system for responding to user-selection of an object in video based on geographical location, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 12-25-2014 |
20140380401 | System And Method In A Local Television System For Responding To User-Selection Of An Object In A Television Program - A system and method in a local display system for responding to user-selection of an object in video, substantially as shown in and/or described in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims. | 12-25-2014 |
20150015668 | THREE-DIMENSIONAL DISPLAY SYSTEM WITH ADAPTATION BASED ON VIEWING REFERENCE OF VIEWER(S) - A display system that presents three-dimensional content to a viewer is described herein. The display system includes a screen assembly having one or more adaptable display characteristics relating to the presentation of three-dimensional content, first circuitry that at least assists in producing reference information corresponding to at least one aspect of a viewing reference of the viewer, and second circuitry that causes modification of at least one of the one or more adaptable display characteristics, the modification corresponding at least in part to the reference information. The viewing reference of the viewer may comprise one or more of a location of the viewer relative to the screen assembly, a head orientation (tilt and/or rotation) of the viewer, and a point of gaze of the viewer. The first circuitry may comprise, e.g., viewer-located circuitry and/or other circuitry that is communicatively connected to the second circuitry for providing the referencing information thereto. | 01-15-2015 |
20150040241 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SECURE CONTENT DISTRIBUTION BY A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway, which enables communication with a plurality of devices, handles at least one physical layer connection to at least one corresponding network access service provider. Security boundaries such as conditional access (CA) and/or digital right management (DRM) boundaries associated with the broadband gateway are identified based on security profiles associated with the plurality of devices and/or a service from networks. The identified security boundaries are utilized to determine or negotiate CA information for content access for the service. The received content may be distributed according to the determined CA information and the security profiles of the corresponding devices. The broadband gateway may be automatically and dynamically configured based on the identified security boundaries to secure content distribution to the devices. Content distribution security schemes, for example, super encryption, simul-crypt, IPSec and/or watermarking, may be selected by matching the CA information with corresponding device security profiles. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043502 | MANAGEMENT UNIT WITH LOCAL AGENT - A management unit manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via either a logical or physical control channel. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit includes a local agent that gathers environmental data, wherein the management processing unit processes the inbound control data, the environmental data and the network resource data and that generates the outbound control data in response thereto. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043659 | VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEM AND TRANSCODER FOR USE WITH LAYERED VIDEO CODING AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A video processing system includes a video transcoder that receives a independent video layer stream and a first dependent video layer stream that requires the independent video layer for decoding, the video transcoder generating a transcoded video signal based at least one of the independent video stream and the dependent video layer stream. | 02-12-2015 |
20150051748 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING POWER CONSUMPTION UTILIZING INTER-GATEWAY COMMUNICATION - Aspects of a method and system for managing power consumption utilizing inter-gateway communication are provided. In this regard, a first broadband gateway residing in a first location may determine past, present, and/or expected power consumption of the first location. The gateway may receive, from one or more other broadband gateways residing in one or more other locations, information that enables determining past, present, and/or expected power consumption of the other location(s). The gateway may control power consumption of the first location by controlling a state of operation of devices residing in the first location. The gateway may determine aggregate power consumption of the first location and the other location(s). The gateway may control power consumption of the first location by enabling operation of one or more devices during periods of lower aggregate power consumption and disabling operation the devices during periods of higher aggregate power consumption. | 02-19-2015 |
20150067103 | Media processing system automatically offering access to newly available media in a media exchange network - A method and system for communication of information in a distributed media network includes receiving an indication of the availability of new media in the media network. A first device of a first user in the media network attempts to predict whether the new media will likely be selected at a future time by the first user, and if so, selectively retrieves the new media for a possible future playback of the new media by the first user. | 03-05-2015 |
20150074713 | Utilizing a Replacement Pathway for Lost Packet Delivery During Media Reception in a Set-Top Box (STB) - A replacement pathway in an STB is utilized to determine loss of packets and delivery error during reception of media broadcasts, and to retrieve replacement data from one or more replacement media servers. The retrieval of the replacement data is performed during playback of the received media broadcasts. The communication of media broadcast incorporates delays to accommodate the retrieval of replacement data. Alternatively, received broadcast media streams are buffered to enable retrieval of replacement data and to provide seamless presentation of media content in the media broadcasts. The replacement media server performs access authentication operations during replacement data retrieval. The replacement media server is accessed via markup language, for example, HTML and/or XML, based interfaces and/or dedicated APIs. The replacement media server may deny replacement data based on plurality of service criteria such as acceptance and denial criteria, which may comprise allowable bandwidth and/or error rates. | 03-12-2015 |
20150082415 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING SECURE TRANSACTIONS VIA A BROADBAND GATEWAY - A broadband gateway may be used to authorize transactions associated with one or more accounts, which may be associated with a user of the broadband gateway. The transaction may be handled by the broadband gateway. The authorizations may be performed based on information associated with the accounts, whose storage may be controlled by the broadband gateway. The broadband gateway may block and/or terminate transactions failing authentication and/or validation, which may be performed based on the stored information. The transactions may be initiated within a network serviced by the broadband gateway. The transactions may also be initiated outside the serviced network. The stored information may comprise a user profile, which may comprise a plurality of settings for controlling and/or managing authorization performed by the broadband gateway. The user profiles may be configurable by users, wherein configuration may comprise initializing and/or modifying one or more of the transaction related settings. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085850 | Enabling and Controlling Access to Wireless Hot Spots - A process of enabling and controlling access to a wireless hotspot by a wireless portable device is disclosed. An access request is sent, seeking access to a wireless hotspot, to an authenticating entity and response to the access request is awaited. Additional verification information is provided when requested by the wireless hotspot and wireless network data is exchanging between the wireless portable device and the wireless hotspot. Additionally, the access request includes an identifier used by the authenticating entity to authenticate the wireless portable device. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087227 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING INFORMATION AMONG PERSONALIZED AND SHARED RESOURCES WITH A PERSONALIZED PORTABLE DEVICE - A user's request via a portable or handheld wireless communication device (HWCD) to process data may result in discovery of one or more networked resources capable of handling the processing. One or more communication routes may be established between one or more discovered network resources and one or more of the HWCD and a networked terminating device. The portable HWCD may be configured as a gateway. The user's identity may be determined and the user's personal networking preferences may be acquired. Based user's preferences, a route may be established between discovered networked resources and one or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device. The user's identity may be authenticated. Data may undergo rate and/or format conversion. The data may be protected by secure operations. One or more of the HWCD and the networked terminating device may consume or render the requested data. | 03-26-2015 |
20150089029 | Providing Automatic Format Conversion Via An Access Gateway - A system and method supporting the automatic conversion of multimedia information from a first format to a second format in a broadband access gateway and/or network-based server are disclosed. The broadband access gateway and/or network-based server may convert multimedia information that is in a format that an access device is not capable of processing. The gateway and/or server may automatically detect the format incompatibility, and may automatically convert or arrange for conversion of the multimedia information to a format that is compatible with the access device, based upon compatibility information associated with the access device. The conversion may be based upon a set of user-defined quality of service criteria, and may be subject to the control of digital rights management parameters associated with the requested multimedia information. The user of the access device may be prompted when the conversion is expected to impact the quality of the multimedia information being played, and the user may be offered options that permit the user to minimize the impact upon the user. | 03-26-2015 |